United States
           Environmental Protection
           Agency
&EPA
            Office of
            Administration and
            Resources Management (2304)
Revised July 2006
EPA FACILITIES MANUAL, VOLUME 2

Architecture and
Engineering Guidelines

-------
July 2004                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                                 Foreward

                                                                               £&.
                                                                               ^V Printed on Recycled Paper

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2006
Foreword
                                             Foreword
The EPA Facilities Manual is comprised of four distinct, yet complementary resources for planning and managing
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) facilities. These four volumes are meant to be used simultaneously to
determine design intent, requirements, and the ongoing evaluation of all EPA facilities.  The use of one volume
without reference to the other three would result in an incomplete understanding of the requirements for EPA
facilities.

Volume 1:   The Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines contain information on space planning, space
             estimation, environment, materials, furniture, process, and maintenance. EPA's Office of
             Administration and Resources Management developed this document to help EPA facilities managers,
             space managers, and line personnel plan and use their space.

Volume 2:   Architecture and Engineering Guidelines (referred to as theA&E Guidelines') provide guidance for
             facilities management, engineering, planning, and architecture professionals in the design and
             construction of new EPA facilities and the evaluation of existing facilities.

Volume 3:   The Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual: Safety and Health Requirements
             outlines safety and health considerations for owned or leased EPA facilities.  The Manual's goal is to
             maintain a safe and healthful workplace that protects against injury, illness, and loss of life.

Volume 4:   The Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual: Environmental Management Guidelines,
            establishes environmental specifications to be addressed by designers and managers of EPA facilities
            and related building systems.

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                       July 2006
Table of Contents
                      Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
Introduction

1 - General Requirements
1.1  Overview
    1.1.1    Facility Design Process
    1.1.2    Design Principles
1.2  Pre-Design Process
1.3  Design Submittals
    1.3.1    15 Percent Submittal
    1.3.2    3 5 Percent Submittal
    1.3.3    60 Percent Submittal
    1.3.4    95 Percent Submittal
    1.3.5    100 Percent Submittal
1.4  Design Considerations
    1.4.1    General
    1.4.2    Environmental Design Requirements
    1.4.3    Expansion and Flexibility
    1.4.4    Aesthetics
    1.4.5    Interaction
    1.4.6    Amenities
    1.4.7    Handicapped Access
    1.4.8    Exterior Building Materials
    1.4.9    Confined Spaces
1.5  Structural Design Requirements
    1.5.1    General
    1.5.2    Calculations
    1.5.3    Loads
    1.5.4    Structural Sy stems
1.6  Architectural Requirements
    1.6.1    L aboratory Zone
    1.6.2    Administrative-with-Support Zone
    1.6.3    Building Support Zone
1.7  Special Room/Space Requirements and
      Concerns
    1.7.1    Restrooms
    1.7.2    Janitor Closets/Custodian Space
    1.7.3    Shop Facilities
    1.7.4    Library
    1.7.5    Chemical Storage
    1.7.6    General Storage
    1.7.7    Food Service
    1.7.8    Outside Research Facilities
    1.7.9    Fire Department Access
1.8  Security
    1.8.1    Entrance Requirements
    1.8.2    Access and Egress
    1.8.3    Exterior Spaces
1.9  Quality Assurance/Quality Control
1.10 Commissioning Requirements
                                             CONTENTS

                                                        2-
                                                        2.1


                                                        2.2
    Site Work
    Scope of Project
    2.1.1    General
    2.1.2    Development Codes
    Site Influences
    2.2.1    Land Resources
    2.2.2    Transportation Systems
    2.2.3    Environmental Considerations
2.3 Site Investigations
    2.3.1    Site Surveys
    2.3.2    Site Evaluation
    2.3.3    Geotechnical Investigation
    2.3.4    Groundwater Investigation
2.4 Site Development
    2.4.1    Surveying
    2.4.2    Site Planning and Design
    2.4.3    Facility Siting
    2.4.4    Site Preparations
    2.4.5    Dewatering
    2.4.6    Shoring and Underpinning
    2.4.7    Earthwork
    2.4.8    Waterfront Construction
2.5 Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements
    2.5.1    General
    2.5.2    Professional Qualifications for Site
               Design
    2.5.3    General Site Requirements
    2.5.4    Hardscape Requirements
    2.5.5    Recreational Requirements
    2.5.6    Irrigation
2.6 Vehicle and Pedestrian Movement
    2.6.1    Access and Circulation
    2.6.2    Parking and Loading Facilities
    2.6.3    Pedestrian Access
    2.6.4    Airports and Heliports
2.7 Stormwater Management
    2.7.1    Street Drainage
    2.7.2    Watershed Development
    2.7.3    Erosion and Sedimentation Control
    2.7.4    Stormwater Retention and Detention
    2.7.5    Conveyance
    2.7.6    Stormwater Quality
    2.7.7    Floodplain and Wetlands Development
    2.7.8    Coastal Development
2.8 Utilities and Support Services
    2.8.1    Water Distribution System
    2.8.2    Wastewater Collection Systems
    2.8.3    Natural Gas Distribution Systems
                                                   111

-------
July 2006
            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                          Table of Contents
    2.8.4    Electrical Distribution Systems
    2.8.5    Telecommunications Systems
    2.8.6    Solid Waste Collection Sy stems

3 - Concrete
3.1  General Requirements
    3.1.1    Design and Construction
    3.1.2    Codes
    3.1.3    Use of Coal Fly Ash in Concrete
3.2  C oncrete F ormwork
3.3  Concrete Reinforcement
    3.3.1    Reinforcement Materials
    3.3.2    Reinforcement Details
3.4  Cast-in-Place Concrete
    3.4.1    General
    3.4.2    Materials, Testing and Quality Control
    3.4.3    Tolerances
    3.4.4    Selecting Proportions for Concrete
            Mixes
    3.4.5    Mixing, Transporting and Placing
    3.4.6    Climatic Considerations
    3.4.7    Post-tensioned Concrete
3.5  Precast/Prestressed Concrete
    3.5.1    Structural
    3.5.2    Architectural
3.6  Cementitious Decks for Building
    3.6.1    General
    3.6.2    Materials, Design and Construction
3.7  Repair and Restoration of Concrete Structures
3.8  Concrete Inspection and Testing

4- Masonry
4.1  General Requirements
    4.1.1    Design and Construction
    4.1.2    Codes and Specifications
4.2  Mortar and Grout
    4.2.1    General
    4.2.2    Mortar
    4.2.3    Grout
4.3  Unit Masonry
4.4  Masonry Accessories
4.5  Masonry Inspection and Testing
    4.5.1    Special Inspection

5-Metals
5.1  General requirements
5.2  Structural Steel
5.3  Steel Joists
    5.3.1    Codes and Specifications
    5.3.2    Intended Use
    5.3.3    Support of Vibrating Equipment
5.4  Steel Decks
5.5  Miscellaneous Metals
    5.5.1    Definition
    5.5.2    Codes and Specifications
5.6 Light-Gauge Steel
5.7 Preengineered Metal Buildings
    5.7.1    Codes and Specifications
    5.7.2    Loads
5.8 Structural Steel Inspection and Testing

6 - Wood and  Plastics
6.1 General Requirements
6.2 Partitions
    6.2.1    Ceiling-High Partitions
    6.2.2    Wood Stud P artitions
    6.2.3    Less-than-Ceiling-High Partitions
6.3 Use of Wood and Plastic

7-Thermal and Moisture Requirements
7.1 General Requirements
7.2 Design Characteristics
7.3 Thermal Resistance
7.4 Moisture Transport
7.5 Panel, Curtain, and Spandrel Walls
    7.5.1    Panel and Curtain Walls
    7.5.2    Spandrel Wall

8 - Doors and Windows
8.1 Doors
    8.1.1    General
    8.1.2    Exterior  Doors
    8.1.3    Interior Doors
    8.1.4    Fire Doors
8.2 Windows
    8.2.1    General
    8.2.2    Fixed Window Sy stems
    8.2.3    Safety of Storefront and Curtain Wall
            Systems
    8.2.4    Window Height
    8.2.5    Glazed Panels in Interior Partitions and
            Walls
8.3 Permanent Window Coverings
    8.3.1    General
    8.3.2    Sun Shading
    8.3.3    Security

9 - Finishes
9.1 Interior Finishes
    9.1.1    Trim and Incidental Finishes
    9.1.2    Final Finishing Material
    9.1.3    Airspace
    9.1.4    Combustible Substances
9.2 Wall Materials
    9.2.1    Wall Finishes
                                                    IV

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                        July 2006
Table of Contents
    9.2.2    Wall Covering and Finishes
9.3 Finished Ceilings
    9.3.1    General
    9.3.2    Ceilings Not Along Exit Path
    9.3.3    Ceilings Along Exit Path
    9.3.4    Ceiling Finishes
    9.3.5    Open Ceilings
9.4 Floor Treatments
    9.4.1    General
    9.4.2    Carpet
    9.4.3    Resilient Tile
    9.4.4    Seamless Vinyl Flooring
    9.4.5    Ceramic Tile Flooring
    9.4.6    Special Flooring
    9.4.7    Exposed Concrete Flooring
9.5 Painting
    9.5.1    General
    9.5.2    Reflectance Values
    9.5.3    Wall and Ceiling Colors
    9.5.4    Accent Are as
    9.5.5    Lead-Based Paint
9.6 Window Covering
    9.6.1    Blinds
    9.6.2    Blackout Shades
    9.6.3    Draperies and Curtains

10 - Specialties
10.1 Magnetic, Liquid Chalk, Dry-Marker Boards and
    Tack Boards
10.2 Interior Signage Systems and Building Directory
    10.2.1   General
    10.2.2  Door Identification
    10.2.3   Room Numbering
    10.2.4  Building Directory
10.3 Portable Fire Extinguishers
    10.3.1   Fire Extinguisher Locations
10.4Laboratory Casework
    10.4.1   General
    10.4.2  Cabinet Assemblies
    10.4.3   Base Cabinets
    10.4.4  Wall Cabinets
    10.4.5   Shelving
    10.4.6  Vented Storage Cabinets
      10.4.7 Countertops
    10.4.8  Laboratory Fume Hoods
    10.4.9  Environmental Rooms

11 - Equipment
11.1 Design
11.2 Catalog Cut Sheets
11.3 Layout and Clearances
11.4 Floor Preparation
11.5 Structural Support
11.6 Special Ventilation Requirements for Equipment
11.7 Equipment Specifications
11.8 High-technology equipment
11.9 Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
11.10 Equipment Consultants
11.11 Procurement of Energy Efficient Equipment

12- Furnishings
12.1 Furnishings

13 - Special Construction
13.1 Noise Control
    13.1.1   Vibration Insulation
    13.1.2   Piping and Ducting Sy stems
    13.1.3   Sound Dampening
13.2Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls
    13.2.1   Fire Walls
    13.2.2   Fire Earner Walls
    13.2.3   Openings
13.3 Vertical Opening and Shafts
    13.3.1   Atriums
    13.3.2   Shafts
    13.3.3   Monumental Stairs
    13.3.4   Escalators
    13.3.5   Penetrations
13.4Fire Protection
    13.4.1   General
    13.4.2   Water Supplies
    13.4.3   Size and Zoning
    13.4.4   Systems
    13.4.5   Operation
    13.4.6   Codes

14 - Conveying Systems
14.1 General
14.2 Elevators
    14.2.1   Elevator Recall
    14.2.2   Smoke Detectors
    14.2.3   Capture Floor
    14.2.4   Signage
    14.2.5   Chemical Transport Use
14.3 Escalators

15- Mechanical  Requirements
15.1 General
15.2 References
15.3 Heating, Ventilation, and Air-conditioning
    Design Criteria
    15.3.1   General
    15.3.2   Ventilation Requirements
    15.3.3   Equipment Design Temperatures
    15.3.4   Equipment Sizing
    15.3.5   Load Calculations

-------
July 2006
            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                        Table of Contents
    15.3.6   Waste Heat Recovery
      15.3.7 Energy Efficiency
15.4 Automatic Control Systems
    15.4.1   General
    15.4.2   Humidity Control
    15.4.3   Simultaneous Heating and Cooling
    15.4.4   Mechanical Ventilation Control
    15.4.5   Energy Conservation Control Schemes
    15.4.6   Automatic Control Dampers
    15.4.7   Variable-Air-Volume Systems Fan
            Control
    15.4.8   Fire and Smoke Detection and
            Protection Controls
    15.4.9   Gas-Fired Air-Handling Unit Control
    15.4.10 Cooling Tower and Water-Cooled
            Condenser System Controls
    15.4.11 Central Controls and Monitoring
            Systems
    15.4.12 Energy Metering
    15.4.13 DDC Hardware Requirements
    15.4.14 DDC Software Requirements
15.5 Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning
    Systems
    15.5.1   General
    15.5.2   Air- Conditioning Sy stems
    15.5.3   Water Chillers
    15.5.4   Condensers/Condensing Units
    15.5.5   Cooling Towers
    15.5.6   Building Heating Systems
    15.5.7   Heating Equipment
    15.5.8   Two-Pipe Combination heating and
            Cooling Systems
    15.5.9   Water Distribution Sy stems
    15.5.10 Pumps and Pumping Systems
    15.5.11 Steam Distribution Systems
    15.5.12 Air-Handling and Air Distribution
            Systems
    15.5.13 Fans/Motors
    15.5.14 Coils
    15.5.15 Walk-In Environmental and Cold
            Storage Rooms
    15.5.16 Central Plant Heat Generation and
            Distribution
15.6 Ductwork
    15.6.1   General
    15.6.2   Fabrication
    15.6.3   Access Panels
    15.6.4   Insulation
    15.6.5   Fire Dampers
15.7 Laboratory Fume Hoods
    15.7.1   Laboratory  Control Design
            Considerations
    15.7.2   Hood Requirements
    15.7.3   Constant Volume Bypass-Type Fume
            Hood
    15.7.4   Vanable-Air-Volume (VAV) Hoods
    15.7.5   Radioisotope Hoods
      15.7.6 Perchloric Acid Fume Hoods
    15.7.7   Special Purpose Hoods
      15.7.8 Horizontal Sashes
    15.7.9   Noise
    15.7.10  Exhaust Sy stem
      15.7.11   Effluent Cleaning
15.8 Other Ventilated  Enclosures
    15.8.1   Glove Boxes
    15.8.2   Biological Safety Cabinets
    15.8.3   Flammable Liquid Storage Cabinets
15.9 Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems
    15.9.1   Dry Filtration
    15.9.2   Absolute Filtration
    15.9.3   Air-Cleaning Devices for Special
            Applications
    15.9.4   Operation
    15.9.5   Maintenance Access
    15.9.6   Location of Air Intake
    15.9.7   Air Flow Characteristics Study
15.10   Plumbing
    15.10.1  General
    15.10.2  Water Supply
    15.10.3  Drain, Waste and Vent Lines
    15.10.4  B ackflow Preventers
    15.10.5  Safety Devices
    15.10.6  Laboratory Safely Devices
    15.10.7  Laboratory Service Fittings
    15.10.8  Glassware Washing Sinks
    15.10.9  Centralized L aboratory Water Sy stems
    15.10. lODrinking Fountains
    15.10.11 Toilet Facilities
    15.10.12Shower Stalls
    15.10.13HoseBibbs
    15.10.14 Water Conservation Elements and
            Techniques
    15.10.15 Single Pass Cooling
15.11   Acid Neutralization Sy stem
15.12   Laboratory Gases and Processed Piping
        Systems
    15.12.1  Nonflammable and Flammable Gas
            Systems
    15.12.2  Compressed-air Systems
    15.12.3  Vacuum Systems
15.13   Testing, Balancing and Commissioning
    15.13.1  C ontractor Re quirements
    15.13.2  Scope of Work
    15.13.3  Testing and Balancing Procedures
    15.13.4  Testing and Balancing Devices
    15.13.5  Reporting
                                                   VI

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                       July 2006
Table of Contents
15.4 Commissioning

16- Electrical Requirements
16.1 General
    16.1.1   Code Compliance
    16.1.2   Electrical Installations
    16.1.3   Energy Conservation in Design
    16.1.4   Coordination of Work
    16.1.5   Power Factors
    16.1.6   Handicapped Accessibility
            Requirements
    16.1.7   Materials and Equipment Standards
    16.1.8   Environmental Requirements
16.2 Primary Distribution
    16.2.1   Ductbanks and Cable
    16.2.2   Switches
    16.2.3   Overhead Power Supply Lines
    16.2.4   Transformers
    16.2.5   System Redundancy
16.3 Service Entrance
    16.3.1   Overhead Services
    16.3.2   Underground Services
    16.3.3   Service Capacity
    16.3.4   Metering
    16.3.5   Service Entrance Equipment
16.4 Interior Electrical Systems
    16.4.1   Basic Materials and Methods
    16.4.2   Conductors
    16.4.3   Raceways
    16.4.4   Neutral Conductor
    16.4.5   Panelboards and Circuit Breakers
    16.4.6   Motor Controllers and Disconnects
    16.4.7   Grounding
    16.4.8   Laboratory Power Requirements
16.5 Interior Lighting Systems
    16.5.1   Illuminance Levels
    16.5.2   Lighting Controls
    16.5.3   Lamps and Ballasts
    16.5.4   Emergency Lighting (Generators and
            Battery Units)
    16.5.5   Energy Conservation
    16.5.6   Glare
    16.5.7   Automatic Data Processing Areas
16.6Fire Safely Requirements for Lighting Fixtures
    16.6.1   Mounting
    16.6.2   Fluorescent Fixtures
    16.6.3   Light Diffusers
    16.6.4   Location
16.7 Exterior Lighting Systems
    16.7.1   General
    16.7.2   Parking Lot Lighting
    16.7.3   Building Exterior Lighting
    16.7.4   Traffic Control Lighting
    16.7.5   Roadway Lighting
    16.7.6   Exterior Electric Signs
16.8Emergency Power System
    16.8.1   General
    16.8.2   Emergency Loads
    16.8.3   Uninterruptible Power Supply
16.9Lighting Protection Systems
    16.9.1   Minimum Scope
    16.9.2   Additional Scope
    16.9.3   Master Label
16.10   Seismic Requirements
    16.10.1  Seismic Review
16.11   Automatic Data Processing Power Systems
    16.11.1  Computer Power
    16.11.2  Non-UPS/PDU Outlets
    16.11.3  Lighting
    16.11.4  Grounding
16.12   C athodic Protection
    16.12.1  Investigation and Recommendation
16.13 Environmental Considerations (Raceways,
      Enclosures)
    16.13.1  Corrosive Atmosphere
    16.13.2  Saltwater Atmosphere
    16.13.3  Extreme Cold
16.14   Communication Systems
    16.14.1  Telecommunications/Data Systems
    16.14.2  Video Conference Rooms
    16.14.3  Recording Sy stems
    16.14.4  Satellite Dishes
    16.14.5  Television Broadcast Systems
    16.14.6  Microwave Communications
    16.14.7  Other
16.15   Alarm and Security Systems
    16.15.1  Fire Alarm Systems
    16.15.2  Safety Alarm Systems
    16.15.3  Security Systems
    16.15.4  Disaster Evacuation Sy stems
    16.15.5  Exit L ighting and Markings
16.16   COMMISSONING

APPENDICES

Appendix A: Codes, Regulatory Requirements,
               Reference Standards, Trade
               Organizations, and Guides

Appendix B: Commissioning Guidelines
1.1  Definition of Commissioning
      1.1.1.  Description of the Process
      1.1.2.  Selection of Commissioning Authority
      1.1.3.  EPA Property (Owned and Leased)
            Commissioning
1.2 Commissioning Process
                                                   Vll

-------
July 2006
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Table of Contents
      1.2.1. Pre-Design Phase
      1.2.2. Design Phase
      1.2.3. Bidding/Contract Negotiation Phase
      1.2.4. Construction Phase
      1.2.5. Warranty Review and Seasonal Testing
      1.2.6. Final Commissioning Report
      1.2.7. O&M Staff Training and
               Documentation
      1.2.8. Commissioning Process Matrix
1.3. Preventive Operation and Maintenance Program
1.4 Retro Commissioning and Continuous
Commissioning
1.5 Commissioning andLEED™ Building Rating
1.6 Definitions

Appendix C: Room Data Sheets

Appendix D: Abbreviations and Acronyms
INDEX
                                                  Vlll

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Introduction

                                            Introduction


PURPOSE

The Architecture and Engineering Guidelines (hereafter referred to as either the A &E Guidelines or this Manual) are
a compilation of standards and guidelines to be used in the design and construction of new Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) facilities (including additions and alterations) and the evaluation of existing facilities.  This Manual
shall be used in conjunction with the Safety, Health, and Environmental Management Manual (the Safety Manual)
as the basis for the Program of Requirements (FOR) and Solicitation for Offers (SFO).  This Manual is also intended
to be used, with the concurrence of EPA, to develop construction documents for public bidding and/or the award of
construction contracts to meet relevant building code and EPA facilities requirements.

The primary purpose of this Manual is to establish a consistent, Agency-wide level of quality and excellence in the
planning, design, and construction of all EPA facilities projects. It is not intended to deter use of more stringent or
greater performance criteria for design.  Project-specific design and construction requirements that are not in conflict
with the requirements of this document  should be met in developing the final program.  The generic information and
requirements described herein must be verified and further defined and refined.

USE OF THIS MANUAL

This Manual does not relieve the architects, engineers, and consultants of any of their responsibilities as design
professionals.  It is intended only to clarify and supplement existing codes and requirements to facilitate the design
process for the design professional and the offerer.  The  architect, engineers, and consultants who will be involved
in the design of an EPA -occupied laboratory, office, or storage facility shall be licensed professionals in their fields
of expertise and shall be experienced in the design of such facilities. They will be required to ensure that all
portions of the project comply with all established applicable codes, regulations, and practices for laboratory
facilities, as well as with this Manual.

Citations of standards, codes, or references within this Manual should be assumed to refer to the most current
edition. Years and publication dates specifically stated in the Manual reflect the version in use when the Manual
was written and published. When using this Manual, the user should verify that the documents referenced are the
most current and have not been superseded.

ORGANIZATION OF THE MANUAL

This document is generally organized according to the Masterformat, published by the Construction Specifications
Institute (CSI).  The 16-section format should be familiar to many in the fields of architecture, planning,
engineering, and construction.  When used throughout this Manual, the term "new construction" shall be understood
to include additions and alterations to existing buildings.

The paragraphs in each section of this Manual are considered to be subsections and are identified by a hierarchical
numbering system. When a paragraph is not numbered, it should be considered part of the preceding subsection.
When subsections from this Manual are used in the project-specific manual, the subsections shall have the same
numbers that they have in this Manual.  Because the subsections of the project-specific manual are not renumbered,
the project-specific manual can be directly compared and referenced to subsections in this  generic Manual. When
subsections from this Manual are not used, those numbers are omitted from the project-specific manual. As an
alternative, the project-specific manual may contain all subsection numbers from this Manual, with the notation "this
subsection not used" inserted after those numbers not included in the project-specific manual.


END  OF INTRODUCTION
                                                    IX

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements

                           Section  1 - General Requirements


1.1     Overview

1.1.1    FACILITY DESIGN PROCESS
        This section presents EPA generic space requirements, identifies the types of spaces anticipated for the
        various functions of an EPA facility, identifies general technical requirements, and gives general guidance
        for actual layout. The design professional must work in close coordination with EPA to produce the final
        building layout in accordance with this document and the guidance gained through consultation with EPA.
        Appropriate local, state, and federal regulatory agencies shall also be consulted.

1.1.2    DESIGN PRINCIPLES
        The design of EPA facilities shall follow the following general principles:

            •   The design of any proposed EPA facility shall meet the specified program requirements while
                being functional and flexible—capable of keeping pace with the changes that are continually
                occurring in EPA programs.
            •   EPA facilities shall comply with the requirements of this Manual, relevant national, state and local
                codes, and GSA's Public Building Service guideline PBS-P100.
            •   The facility design must provide a high degree of energy efficiency and demonstrate sustainable
                design principles.
1.2     Pre-Design Process
        The pre-design process for EPA facilities, including space acquisition and planning requirements, is
        generally discussed in Volume 1 of the EPA Facilities Manual. The pre -design process will generate
        various planning documents, studies, evaluations, and reports.  The results and conclusions of these
        documents shall be properly addressed and incorporated into the facility design and construction phases of
        the project. The following considerations will be defined during the facility planning phase of the project
        and will be included in documents for guidance to the design professional.

            •   A brief overview and description of all existing facilities, and of the campus if the facilities are so
                composed.
            •   An overview of each component of the facility or campus
            •   A brief introductory description of the organization of the various branches and laboratories in the
                project and how they interrelate, and a more detailed description of each branch and laboratory
            •   A brief overview o f the scope of the specific proj ect requirements
            •   A brief description of the facility concept (i.e., number of floors, floor area, number of
                laboratories/special spaces, offices, location of site, acreage, characteristics)
            •   An environmental design intent document, which identifies the sustainable design goals and initial
                concepts. Gather typical meteorological year (TMY) data.
            •   A general description of the various facility spaces and area requirements to be utilized during the
                design of the facility and also the pertinent area requirements for the exterior areas of the proj ect.
            •   Quantitative and qualitative requirements of the specific program and space identification and
                sizes
            •   Room data  sheets for all facility spaces developed in accordance with the requirements of Volume
                1, Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines and Appendix C of this volume (for laboratories).
                The room data sheets must indicate specific room or laboratory requirements and identify
                appropriate installed equipment.
            •   Preliminary scope of work for the Commissioning Authority.

                                                   1-1

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 1 - General Requirements
        The design professional will be responsible for ensuring that the facility final design conforms to the
        specifications outlined in the planning phase documents and this Manual.
1.3     Design Submittals
        The A-E shall submit required construction drawings, specifications, cost estimates, and design
        analyses/calculations to EPA-FMSD at interim stages of development.  Not all projects will require
        submission at each of the stages indicated below; applicable submittals for each project shall be specifically
        indicated in the Solicitation for Offers (SFO) and/or Program of Requirements (FOR).  If submittals are
        found to be unacceptable at any stage, the A-E shall revise and resubmit them at no additional cost to EPA.

1.3.1    15 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
        This schematic submittal stage  is required on complex projects and/or where architectural design elements
        require coordination with interior design development or development of exterior design considerations.
        The 15% submittal ensures that the A-E demonstrate an understanding of the scope of the project and
        adherence to project criteria, formats, and conventions.  At this stage, the A-E will submit, for example:

            •    Vicinity plan showing existing and new topography and utilities, access roads, extent of parking
                 and site circulation, and relationships to other buildings
            •   Photographs of the site and surroundings.
            •    Single line floor plans showing all walls, openings, rooms and built-in features
            •   Facility organization plans and/or sections, showing main circulation paths and the locations of
                 shared and specialized spaces.
            •   Building sections and typical wall  sections showing floor-to-floor heights
            •   Exterior elevations showing fenestration and exterior building materials
            •    Space tabulation by room indicating net square footage, architectural treatment, and utilities
            •   Environmental design plan, including energy goals and strategy for achieving LEED™
                 Certification under the U. S. Green Building Council program (see 1.4.2.1).
            •   Energy model baseline simulations.
            •    Cost estimate reflecting the cost of the intended project and the cost of alternate schemes/solutions
                presented, including the cost for providing expansion contingency
            •    Code analysis, identifying all applicable codes and key criteria that will affect the design.
            •    Credentials of proposed Commissioning Authority.

1.3.2    35 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
        The 35% submittal includes design development documents and supporting design  calculations to clearly
        show the adequacy of project design and functional arrangements.  This submittal includes, for example:

            •    Site  development plans delineating all buildings in the area, proposed parking locations, roads,
                 sidewalks, curbing, fencing, landscaping, storm drainage, and routing of water, sewer, gas, and
                other utilities
            •   Architectural plans showing complete functional layout, room designations, critical dimensions,
                 all columns, and built-in equipment for each building section
            •   Analysis of LEED™ Certification potential, with checklist identifying the points to be sought and
                the strategies and steps necessary to achieve them.  Energy-model report and recommendations.
            •   Life safety plans showing fire subdivisions and fire separation ratings throughout the building
            •   Preliminary furniture layouts for conference rooms, libraries, and similar spaces
            •   Mechanical plans delineating proposed layout  of systems, location and preliminary arrangements
                of all major items of mechanical equipment, and basic outline of control system requirements
                 (materials, methods, and sequence of operation)

                                                   1-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements

            •   Plumbing plans showing proposed fixture locations and basic riser diagrams
            •   Electrical plans showing proposed electrical service and distribution array (preliminary one line
                diagram), lighting fixture patterns, and receptacle locations
            •   Preliminary riser diagram for communication and fire alarm systems
            •   List of applicable specifications for all materials, types of work, and architectural, structural, and
                mechanical systems
            •   Itemized cost estimates identifying all intended work
            •   Basis of Design Report
            •   Final scope of work for the Commissioning Authority.

1.3.3    60 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
        The 60% submittal includes contract documents and supporting materials that clearly show the
        development of the project at the 60% stage. The objective is to provide EPA with sufficient drawings,
        cost estimates, and specifications to evaluate the A-E's adherence to detail and systems criteria, to review
        coordination between disciplines, and to ensure that comments made during previous reviews were
        understood and incorporated. The 60% submittal shall include, for example:

            •   Completed title sheet, drawing index, and legend sheets
            •   Detailed site and utility plans
            •   Detailed building floor plans with all walls, partitions, dimensions, door and window schedules
                and details, plumbing fixtures, and fixed equipment or items (e.g., fume hoods, sinks, cabinets)
            •   Composite floor plans (when applicable) showing construction phasing when required
            •   Developed roof plan and exterior elevations
            •   Developed finish  schedule
            •   Updated LEED™ checklist,  including preliminary calculations for points sought
            •   Completed fire protection/life safety plans
            •   Detailed calculation of heating and cooling loads, piping, ductwork, and equipment sizing
                associated with the HVAC system
            •   Detailed outline of control system requirements (materials, methods, and sequence of operation)
                and basic ladder diagrams and temperature control schematics indicating remote sensors, panel
                mounted controllers, and thermostats
            •   Detailed calculations for the sizing of the following plumbing systems: domestic hot and cold
                water, waste and vent, natural and liquified petroleum gases, vacuum, compressed air, distilled and
                deionized water, medical gases, and other specialty systems
            •   Detailed description of the fire suppression system and its controls, including activation, interlocks
                with HVAC system, and connection to detection and alarm systems
            •   Detailed description of electrical system design, including: lighting system(s), wiring system and
                location of proposed use, lighting protection system, grounding, basic characteristics of
                panelboards (including short circuit and voltage drop calculations), electrical metering, and
                electrical schedule
            •   Systems commissioning plan and preliminary commissioning specification
            •   Detailed cost estimate using  quantity take-offs and unit prices.

1.3.4    95 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
        The 95% submittal shall include contract documents and supporting material that can be considered
        biddable documents by EPA. This submittal includes, for example:

            •   Contract drawings and specifications that are 100% complete for all disciplines (architectural,
                structural, mechanical, electrical)
            •   Final calculations for all systems and equipment
            •   Final energy control system drawings, including the drawing index, control system legend, valve
                schedule, damper schedule, control system schematic and equipment schedule, sequence of

                                                    1-3

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 1 - General Requirements

                operation and data terminal strip layout, control loop wiring diagrams, motor starter and relay
                wiring diagram, communication network and block diagram, and direct digital control (DDC)
                panel installation and block diagram
            •   List of proprietary items, long lead items and/or items that because of their uniqueness, critical
                tolerance in manufacture and/or installation, require particular scrutiny during construction
            •   Final architectural finish boards showing samples of proposed finishes
            •   Detailed cost estimate using quantity take-offs, unit prices, and labor costs. The cost estimate
                shall be sufficiently accurate at this stage that EPA can begin funding procedures.
            •   Draft LEED™ submittal, including all required information except that to be collected during
                construction

1.3.5    100 PERCENT SUBMITTAL
        This submittal shall provide all final drawings, specifications, and cost estimates ready for contract award.
        With this submittal, the A-E shall also include an estimate of the time necessary to complete the project in
        calendar days and shall include manufacturer's catalog cuts and published data of major items specified and
        used as basis of the design.
1.4     Design Considerations

1.4.1    GENERAL
        The facility should blend in with its natural and man-made environment. The building itself and all of its
        systems—architectural, mechanical, and electrical—shall be as flexible and adaptable as possible because
        functions and related laboratory operations often change. The proposed building(s) and systems shall allow
        for future space adjustments with minimal disruption to ongoing activities.

1.4.2    ENVIRONMENTAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
        EPA facility design and construction must meet all requirements of EPA Facilities Manual, Volume 3,
        Safety and Health Manual and Volume 4, Environmental Management Guidelines and other environmental
        requirements of this volume.  EPA facility design must also meet the requirements of Executive Order
        13101, Greening the Government Through Waste Prevention, Recycling, and Federal Acquisition;
        Executive Order 13123, Greening the Government Through Efficient Energy Management; Executive
        Order 13148, Greening the Government Through Leadership in Environmental Management; or any
        subsequent or superseding Executive Orders relating to the protection of the environment.

        The architectural and engineering design of the facility shall use proven methods, strategies, and
        technologies exhibiting respect for, and protection of, the environment. These methods, strategies, and
        technologies include the use of nonhazardous recycled construction materials and construction materials
        produced with minimal expenditure of energy; and use of insulation, fire protection, and refrigeration
        systems that avoid use of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and other ozone-depleting chemicals. The facility
        shall be designed to meet the requirements of the EPA Internal Pollution Prevention Program.

1.4.2.1      GREEN BUILDING CERTIFICATION
            EPA is a recognized leader in energy conservation, pollution prevention and other sustainable building
            practices. As such, it is necessary to identify and incorporate these features in the design and
            construction of new and renovated facilities to the fullest extent possible.  As one means of evaluating
            and measuring achievements in these areas, all EPA buildings must be certified through the Leadership
            in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Green Building Rating System (*TM) of the U.S. Green
            Building Council. Projects are encouraged to xceed basic LEED green building certification and to
            achieve the highest level of LEED certification available for each project undertaken. Specific
            achievement levels for each design and construction project will be indicated in the SFO and FOR.


                                                   1-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements

            For more information about this certification, please visit the following web site:
            http://www.usgbc.org/programs/leed.htm

1.4.2.2      ENERGY-CONSCIOUS DESIGN
            Fundamental design decisions related to energy conservation shall be made during the planning stages.
            New facilities shall meet energy efficiency standards set by the American Society of Heating,
            Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE 90.1, 1999) and also shall be Energy Star
            certified.  Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy
            consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See
            Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient products.  The building
            design and all construction features (materials and methods of installation, including mechanical and
            electrical systems) shall provide concepts that will reflect reduced energy consumption. The new
            design shall also utilize passive design techniques to minimize heating and cooling loads. These
            techniques include:

                •   Siting of facilities using prevailing wind and existing vegetation views (sun angle light and
                    shading study).

                •   Efficient design of building form and envelope in response to climate

                •   Reducing cooling load and electrical lighting load through use of day lighting

                •   The use of natural but controlled day lighting shall be maximized to the extent that it does not
                    conflict with other EPA energy conservation objectives. EPA values natural light and
                    considers it part of a good working environment.  The building organization and design
                    concept shall consider bringing natural light into personnel spaces.

                •   Size, number, and location of windows shall be determined on the basis of need for natural
                    light and ventilation and of other energy considerations. All windows in heated or air-
                    conditioned spaces shall be double-glazed, insulated windows. Low E glass should be used
                    for all exterior windows. Laboratory windows shall be fixed-pane, nonoperative windows.
                    Use of operable windows in all non-laboratory function is encouraged.  In an air-conditioned
                    building where windows are  operative, these windows must have a removable operating
                    handle.  Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy
                    consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated
                    products.  See section 6.1 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for
                    energy efficient residential windows.

                •   Encouraging open plan concepts, with enclosed offices/rooms clustered and located off the
                    windows, for HVAC efficiency and daylight penetration.

                •   Reducing solar heat gains through orientation and proper design of solar-shading devices
                    combined with proper selection and  location of building materials. Laboratory windows in
                    particular are sensitive to solar gain and should be shaded on the exterior from direct rays
                    with appropriate shading devices.

                •   Allowing occupant control of sunlight and glare at different times of the day/year through the
                    use of interior shading devices such as light shelves, shades and/or blinds.

                •   HVAC systems designed for an integrated, energy-conserving facility.  Section 104 of the
                    Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all
                    federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See sections 2.0
                    (Commercial and Industrial Equipment) and 4.0 (Appliances) of Addendum 1 to view
                                                   1-5

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 1 - General Requirements

                    FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient heating, ventilation, and air-
                    conditioning systems.

            All EPA buildings shall be designed to promote the use of natural light and to afford optimum use of
            energy-efficient lighting systems (e.g., electronic ballasts, task lighting).  These include Energy Star
            lighting, light fixtures controlled by sensors, and other devices that save energy without jeopardizing
            safely or the light quality required for visual tasks. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005
            requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy
            Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 1.0 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing
            specifications for energy efficient lighting.

1.4.2.3      CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
            EPA wishes to take a very active role in the selection of the materials used in the project and during the
            construction process. The design professional, in close coordination with EPA, shall carefully examine
            the environmental sensitivity of materials and products specified for construction and build-out for the
            new facility. EPA will encourage minimal use of products that are insensitive to the environment
            during and after manufacture and should consider local manufacturers (<500 miles) if available and
            cost effective.  Construction materials shall have the highest practicable percentage of recovered
            materials as indicated in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG). The specifications
            shall include environmental performance characteristics or other criteria to manage construction
            substitutions.

1.4.2.4          ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS
            EPA seeks to limit the presence  of electromagnetic fields (EMFs) in close proximity to people within
            the new facility. Prudent avoidance is required in the routing of electrical power.  EPA recommends
            that the routing of power throughout the facility be well away from people and offices; for instance,
            elevator electrical chases and other electrical chases should be located away from offices and on
            exterior walls to the maximum ext ent feasible.

1.4.2.7      WATER CONSERVATION
            EPA requires that the design of new facilities minimize water consumption through the use of water-
            saving measures.  Facility design should follow the Federal Energy Management Program (FEMP) ten
            water efficiency improvement best management practices developed pursuant to E.O. 13123. The
            facility design should consider the use of low impact development and stormwater management
            strategies, including gray water recycling and xeroscaping, where feasible.

1.4.2.8      CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION
            EPA recognizes that practices during the construction process can further the project's environmental
            goals, or compromise them. The design and the careful product selections must be protected during
            the construction period from damage, dirt, chemicals and moisture.  To ensure good indoor air quality
            at occupancy, it is important that pollutants do not get into the building's air handling systems, which
            would circulate them throughout the finished space. In the specifications, the design professional will
            require the contractor to submit a construction protection plan that addresses the following:

                •   Preventing dust, dirt and smells from migrating into finished space from areas under
                    construction
                •   Sealing ductwork and equipment until dust-producing activities are complete
                •   Keeping absorbent materials sealed or offsite until painting, adhesive application or similar
                    activities are complete
                •   Using low-toxic cleaning supplies
                •   Collecting worker refuse (e.g., food, beverages)
                                                   1-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements

                •   Preparing an erosion and sedimentation control plan that follows the practices in EPA's Storm
                    Water Management for Construction Activities, Chapter 3 (EPA Document #EPA-832-R-92-
                    005)
                •   Minimizing the disturbance to the site's natural features (e.g., trees, erosion control).

1.4.2.9      CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE
            Planning and on-site management can result in the reduction of construction waste generated, and the
            diversion of construction and demolition waste from landfills through salvage and recycling. With
            new construction and existing building renovations, the design professional will work will EPA to
            identify opportunities for reuse, salvage or recycling.  Goals for recycling of construction and
            demolition waste will be incorporated into the contract documents. The facility design should
            incorporate waste prevention strategies, such as the use of modular components, designing to standard
            material sizes, considering prefabricated components, specifying mock-ups for tricky, repetitive
            details, planning for anticipated changes and material recycling of any construction/demolition waste
            (at a minimum: wood, metals, and paper).

            The contractor shall recycle as much material as  possible throughout all project phases. To accomplish
            this, the contractor shall: (1) submit a waste handling plan detailing how the  waste stream will be
            separated and managed; and (2) provide onsite instruction on the appropriate separation, handling,
            recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the
            project. See  for more information.

1.4.3    EXPANSION AND  FLEXIBILITY
        Providing for future expansion and change is an integral part of the requirements for any new EPA project.
        The design professional shall review and/or confirm with EPA all anticipated expansion needs and shall
        recommend methods of accommodating expansion to meet these anticipated needs,  as well as addressing
        future expansion beyond the anticipated needs. The design professional shall be responsible for
        recommending the direction(s) of expansion, after consultation with EPA. All expansion  shall be
        accommodated in a logical manner, both programmatically and by construction sequencing.

            •   Corridor layout and circulation patterns shall enhance flexibility and aid in future expansion.
                Open plans,  which allow greater flexibility in expansion and general facility changes, are
                encouraged where feasible, practical, and permitted by EPA.

            •   Floor plans that encircle a department with permanent corridors, stairs, mechanical and electrical
                rooms, or other fixed building elements that  are difficult to relocate should be avoided. Column -
                free functional areas should be maximized, and use of transfer beams should be minimized.

            •   Anticipated  expansion must be reviewed by  representatives of all disciplines on the project.

            •   Expansion space shall be designed for each type of space used in the facility and for parking
                facilities. The design professional shall review the space requirements developed during the
                planning of the facility and identify areas that appear to be inadequately addressed for future
                expansion. Special attention should be given to the anticipated needs of technical or specialized
                space, because these are the most expensive  to expand later.

            •   Electrical, mechanical, plumbing, and other  support systems should be designed and sized to
                permit modification and expansion with the  least cost and least disruption to overall operations.

            •   Design drawings that show existing building and  site conditions along with proposed building and
                site designs  are required to show both proposed building and expansion areas. All drawings shall
                be at the same scale.  Enlarged studies of selected areas may be included. However, EPA desires a


                                                   1-7

-------
July 2006                                                             Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                            Section 1 - General Requirements

                complete overview massing of the entire site for each proposed design, with expansion and
                flexibility clearly defined.

1.4.4    AESTHETICS
        Aesthetics refers to the nature of both the interior and exterior of the facility.  Aesthetic considerations
        should include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

            •   Contextual relationship of the adjacent buildings and environment. Color, texture, and massing of
                building components should be investigated. Historical and contextual details should be
                considered.

            •   The landscape design shall integrate site and building into one concept.

            •   The sequence of access, entry, and use of the building from the viewpoint of both staff and visitor
                must be considered.

            •   The interior finishes must be integrated into a single concept for the entire facility. This shall
                include all visible materials.  Typical finishes, such as office/laboratory flooring and wall finishes,
                should be standardized to the extent practical, not only for consistency but also for maintenance
                efficiency and waste prevention.

            •   Consider accent and background colors, with special attention to their psychological effect on
                people.

            •   Special aesthetic consideration should be given to all building entrance lobby spaces

            •   Consideration shall be given to lighting from the view of both visual comfort and aesthetics.
                Visual comfort probability (VCP) for lighting fixtures should be a factor in selection.  .

1.4.5    INTERACTION
        Appropriate interaction space shall be incorporated where feasible.  Design considerations to promote
        office group or researcher interaction shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:

            •   Communication is a function of both organization and proximity.  People communicate more if
                they work on a similar project or are in close proxmity to each other.  Research has shown that
                communication drops off dramatically after 30 meters (approximately 90 feet).  It is desirable in
                laboratory facilities to cluster researchers in 30-meter-diameter groups, with shared facilities in
                between thes e research clusters.  In office settings, a mixture of enclosed offices and open plan
                workstations in close proximity encourages group interaction and communication.

            •   Building form has an influence on communication.  Whenever possible, personnel that need to
                communicate should be located in close proximity on the same floor. Research  has shown that
                components of less than 10,000 square meters (108,000 square feet) should be located on one floor
                if possible.

            •   In laboratory facilities, the laboratory director shall be located strategically among his or her
                research staff.  The director's office is best located toward the center of the facility. From an
                interaction perspective,  a corner office with the best view is not the best location for the director's
                office.

            •   Offices arranged in a cluster may be  a better form to promote communication and interaction than
                offices arranged in a linear configuration. Buildings that are arranged in odd shapes to provide all
                private offices with an outside window often compro mise communication. Solutions  that provide
                                                     1-8

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements

                for both natural light and office clusters should be strongly considered. Additionally, clustering
                offices off the windows allows a better distribution of natural light, HVAC, and window access to
                those in workstations.

            •   When offices are put near laboratories, the researchers located in these offices have a greater sense
                of territoriality than if offices are farther away.

            •   Direct access should be provided to managers.  Locating secretaries directly outside the manager's
                door often inhibits a subordinate from initiating informal contact with that manager.

            •   Library space appropriate to the laboratory/office functions should be located strategically to
                promote professional interaction and efficiency.

            •   Shared building facilities can be used as a tool to promote greater communication.  Place the
                shared facilities to provide maximum intergroup  communication. Shared building facilities should
                be located by proximity and in locations that enhance the users' ability to positively influence
                interaction.

1.4.6    AMENITIES
        Amenities are spaces and/or features that provide an enjoyable environment for staff and visitors. A
        workplace that encourages communication, interaction, and collaboration among its users enhances worker
        productivity and increases employee retention. Strategic location of common support areas (i.e.,
        conference rooms, restrooms, coffee and vending areas, clerical support services, and supplies) and
        carefully considered circulation patterns shall be incorporated to foster meaningful interaction.  Building
        amenities must be dedicated, neutral spaces that are protected from encroachment and future conversion.
        An amenity exceeds the minimum functional requirements established by the program and may include the
        following:

            •   Interaction spaces, lounges, and break areas should be strategically located to foster maximum
                interaction while being convenient to both offices and laboratories.

            •   Conference and meeting room spaces appropriate to the laboratory/office functions should be
                provided in close proximity to the users.  The meeting room spaces should be of various sizes and
                shapes to  accommodate a wide range of conference needs.  At least one of these conference rooms
                should be designed to accommodate teleconferencing and other audiovisual use.

            •   Lunchroom facilities should be sized specifically to each facility. Quality design of food service
                areas, concession areas, and seating areas with exterior views will contribute to an enhanced
                quality of life.  It is also important to provide a place to safely consume food and drink outside of
                the laboratories, offices, and other work areas.  Refrigerator space must be integrated into coffee
                and vending areas to eliminate the temptation to store lunches in refrigerators within the
                laboratories.  Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy
                consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated
                products.  See sections 3.6 and 6.1 of Addendum  1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for
                energy efficient beverage vending machines and  refrigerators.  Consideration should be given to
                appropriate microwave and oven appliances. A "white board" for impromptu conversations
                should be considered.

            •   In laboratory buildings, attempt to locate lockers  and toilets close to laboratories and offices in
                such a manner that clothing and valuables are easily accessible to the staff. These facilities could
                be contiguous in most cases. Avoid placement of lockers in corridors.  Where appropriate, the
                toilet/locker combination should accommodate a shower. The shower could satisfy staff after
                exercise and be used to stabilize a chemical accident victim prior to medical assistance.

                                                    1-9

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section 1 - General Requirements
            •   Space for an employee wellness center with appropriate facilities should be considered.

            •   Provide special attention to artwork and/or photos and how they are to be integrated into the
                design.  The solution should include an integrated design for the display of EPA materials, which
                can be easily, quickly and inexpensively changed. This could accommodate research material in
                laboratory buildings, or ongoing EPA projects in other buildings.

            •   For reasons of safety, day or elder care facilities should not be included inside a laboratory facility.

1.4.7    HANDICAPPED ACCESS
        The design and layout of an EPA facility must ensure that the facility is accessible to the physically
        challenged, in accordance with the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) (1988) adopted by the
        GSA in 41  CFR Parts  101-19.6, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),  and all other applicable
        federal, state, and local laws and standards for buildings and facilities required to be accessible to and
        usable by physically challenged people (barrier-free design). Where different laws and standards are in
        conflict, the most stringent code shall apply.  If there is difficulty in determining which code is most
        stringent, the Government reserves the right to make the final decision on the interpretation of all codes.

1.4.7.1      GENERAL ACCESSIBILITY
            General access to the facility and any portion thereof shall be based on practical design and shall
            comply with all applicable standards, guidelines, and codes, including ADA and GSA 41 CFR Parts
            101-19.6. Other aspects of general access are as follows:

                •   Avoid crossing pedestrian and vehicular circulation paths.

                •   Provide adequate circulation space at points of traffic congestion and provide architectural
                    features that emphasize overall circulation patterns and major entrances.

                •   Avoid confusing corridor systems and extensions of through corridors from department to
                    department.

                •   Avoid horseshoe-shaped major corridor systems that require excessive walking distances.

                •   Avoid dead-end departmental corridors.

                •   Minimize single -loaded corridors.

                •   Eliminate major corridors through elevator lobbies or through other areas that tend to
                    concentrate circulation patterns.

                •   Locate vertical transportation so that it is visible from major entrances

                •   Provide clear directional signage for wayfinding,  and departmental directories that can be
                    changed easily.

1.4.7.2      LABORATORY ACCESSIBILITY
            Accommodating the handicapped in a laboratory demands a design that is flexible, adaptable, and
            practical.  The environment must function properly within handicapped regulatory requirements of the
            law and must offer safety for the users.  Casework in all laboratories shall be capable of being
            modified to meet accessibility requirements at minimum cost.  Some general criteria for handicapped
            accommodation in laboratories are as follows:

                                                   1-10

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements

            •   The handicapped-accessible workstation shall provide a work surface that is 30 inches above the
                floor, with all wheelchair clearances below. Adjustable work surfaces that provide a range of
                height adjustments shall be considered for all such workstations.

            •   Utilities, equipment, and equipment controls for laboratory furniture should be within easy reach
                of persons who are physically handicapped and have limited mobility. Controls shall have single-
                action levers or blade handles for easy operation.

            •   Aisle widths and clearances shall be adequate for maneuvering of wheelchair-bound individuals.
                Aisle widths of 60 inches are required.

            •   Handicapped-accessible workstations shall be located as close to laboratory exits and safety
                showers as possible.

1.4.8    EXTERIOR BUILDING MATERIALS
        The external treatment and materials utilized shall be of proven long-term durability and require minimum
        maintenance. The quality of materials shall be consistent with the image and dignity appropriate to a U.S.
        agency. Material selection should be based on an anticipated 100-year life cycle. In selecting building
        materials, careful consideration shall be given to all technical criteria as well as to the requirements and
        recommendations for recycled content contained in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines
        (referred to hereafter as CPG) and Recovered Material Advisory Notices (see www.epa.gov/cpg).

1.4.8.1      EXTERIOR ELEMENTS
            Mechanical, electrical, transportation, and equipment elements that are to be located on the exterior of
            the facility shall be integrated elements of the design. These elements include air intake and exhaust
            vents, exterior lights, utility connections, plumbing vents, fuel tank vents, liquid oxygen tanks,
            transformers, trash compactors, containers, loading docks, condensers, cooling towers, and mechanical
            equipment.

            For laboratory buildings, mechanical equipment should not be located on roofs, due to vibration
            concerns, unless it is totally impractical to do otherwise.  If mechanical or other equipment is located
            on the roof, particular attention must be paid to the vibration and to isolating such vibration inside the
            building.  The equipment must also be aesthetically screened. Screening shall be designed to
            aesthetically hide the equipment and to prevent the entrance of rain into the fresh-air intakes of the
            facility and to prevent entrainment of laboratory exhaust air into the fresh-air intakes of the facility and
            adjacent facilities. Location of all exterior elements on EPA facilities shall meet the security
            guidelines in Section 1.8 and the requirements of Volume 3 of the EPA  Facilities Manual (Safety,
            Health, and Environmental Management Manual: Safety and Health Requirements).

1.4.8.2      DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
            The design characteristics of wall schemes shall be evaluated in terms of aesthetics, function, and cost
            effectiveness with respect to the following:

                •   Moisture transport

                •   Thermal performance

                •   Aesthetic appropriateness

                •   Historic considerations (if applicable and appropriate)

                •   Durability (life cycle maintenance costs)


                                                   1-11

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 1 - General Requirements

            •   Exterior wall termination at the roof or top of parapet walls (including penthouse)

            •   Construction and control joint locations, considering impact on construction sequence and
                building movement due to expansion and contraction

            •   Comer conditions, especially material relationships at the intersection of vertical planes and the
                continuity of wall supports and flashings

            •   Load transfer of the wall to the structure, including consideration of structural frame exposure and
                lateral wall supports

            •   Weathertight design, including sealant profiles, material adjacencies, and flashing configuration

            •   Window placement relative to the wall, secondary connection requirements, material adjacencies,
                window washing, glass type and thickness, day lighting, and life safety hardware.

            Refer to Section 7,  Thermal and Moisture Requirements, of this Manual for additional information on
            exterior building requirements in relation to thermal and moisture protection.

1.4.9    CONFINED  SPACES
        As much as possible, all areas with limited access or no ventilation shall be designed to ensure that the area
        is not and will not become a confined space as defined by 29 CFR § 1910.146. Refer to the Safety Manual
        for ventilation requirements for storage rooms.


1.5 Structural Design Requirements

1.5.1    GENERAL
        This section applies to the structural elements of buildings and other incidental structures.  The structural
        elements include, but are not limited to, the following:

            •   All floor, roof, and wall framing members and slabs
            •   All piers, walls, columns, footings, piles, and similar elements of the substructure
            •   All other substructures and superstructure elements that are proportioned on the basis of stress,
                strength,  and deflection requirements.

1.5.1.1      MATERIAL, FRAMING SYSTEMS, AND DETAILS
            Material, framing systems, and details shall be compatible with the following:

            •   Clear space and span requirements
            •   Serviceability requirements
            •   Applicable fire protection classification, applicable local  building code, and/or NFPA 220,
                as applicable
            •   Security requirements.
            •   Foundation conditions
            •   Future expansion requirements
            •   Architectural requirements
            •   Climatic conditions
            •   Structural design loads for the specific facility and location
            •   Site conditions
            •   Material reuse  and recycling
            •   CPG requirements and recommendations, as appropriate.
                                                   1-12

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements

1.5.1.2      CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND LABOR
            Local availability of construction materials and labor force shall be considered in the selection of the
            structural system.

1.5.1.3      DESIGN CRITERIA
            The structural design drawings shall indicate the design criteria; the structural materials and their
            strengths, with applicable material standards; the design loads, including loads that can occur during
            construction; and the allowable foundation loads that were used in the design.

1.5.2        CALCULATIONS
            Calculations shall be prepared and presented as stated in the following paragraphs.

1.5.2.1      GENERAL
            All design (including calculations) shall be performed and checked by a structural engineer registered
            within the project state.  All calculations shall be on S'/z -by-11-inch paper.  Calculations shall be
            indexed and every page numbered. Dividers shall be placed between distinct sections. A summary
            shall be included describing the type of structure and indicating the live load capacity of each floor and
            roof.

1.5.2.2      MANUALLY PREPARED CALCULATIONS
            Manually prepared calculations shall be neat and legible.  Each  sheet shall indicate the structural
            consultant's firm name, address,  and telephone number. Each sheet shall indicate the designer's name
            or initials, the checker's name or initials, and the date prepared.  Design assumptions regarding live
            loads, material strengths, conditions of fixity, etc., shall be clearly stated. Calculations shall be
            sufficiently  cross-referenced that a third party can review the calculations without requiring additional
            information.

1.5.2.3      COMPUTER ANALYSIS AND DESIGN
            Computer software used for structural analysis and design shall be from a nationally recognized
            vendor. Each separate run shall indicate software licensee, project name and number, engineer's name,
            and date. Additional manual annotation shall be provided, if necessary, to adequately cross-reference
            computer printouts, so that a third party can review the calculations without requiring additional
            information.

1.5.3        LOADS
            Structures and their elements shall be designed for the loads prescribed in these criteria unless
            applicable codes or ordinances provide more stringent requirements.  The most stringent requirement
            shall be used.

1.5.3.1      DEAD LOADS
            Dead loads are loads that remain  permanently in place. They  shall include the weights of all
            permanent materials and equipment (including the structure's own weight) supported in, or on, a
            structure. Load calculations shall include an allowance for any  loadings that are anticipated to be
            added  at a later date. Initially assumed loads shall be revised  so that the final design reflects the
            configuration shown on the drawings.

            •   The minimum allowance for the weights of partitions, where partitions are likely to be rearranged
                or relocated, shall be as follows:

                    For partition weights of 150 pounds per linear foot (plf) or less, an equivalent uniform dead
                    load may be used, determined on the basis of the room dimensions (normal to the partition)
                     and the partition weight in pounds per linear foot, but not less than 20 pounds per square foot
                     (psf).

                                                   1-13

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 1 - General Requirements

                    For partition weights above 150 plf, the actual loads shall be used.

                    Partitions that are likely to be rearranged or relocated should be calculated as live loads for
                    load factor design. A factor of 1.1 shall be applied to the live loads due to movable partitions
                    before application of building code-required live-load factors.

            •   The unit weights of materials and construction assemblies for buildings and other structures shall
                be those given in American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) Standard 7-02. Where unit
                weights are neither established in that standard nor determined by test or analysis, the weights
                shall be determined from data in the manufacturer's drawings or catalogs.

            •   Design dead loads shall include the weight of all permanent service equipment.  Service
                equipment shall include plumbing stacks, piping, heating and air-conditioning equipment,
                electrical equipment, flues, fire sprinkler piping and valves, and similar fixed furnishings. The
                weight of service equipment that may be removed with change of occupancy of a given area shall
                be considered as live load.

1.5.3.2      LIVE LOADS
            Live loads shall include all loads resulting from the occupancy and use of the structure whether acting
            vertically down, vertically up, or laterally. The weight of service equipment that may be removed with
            change of occupancy of a given area (e.g., fume hoods) shall be considered as live load.  The design
            professional mu st secure any special requirements for floor loading from the Project Officer with the
            understanding that building codes, local codes, and agencies having jurisdiction regulate these
            requirements.  Analysis in the early planning stages of a project is required to establish the loadings for
            specific pieces of equipment since these equipment loads may exceed the design floor loads.  The
            timing and  sequencing that the equipment is  placed into the building must be considered; this will
            affect the design or construction phasing. The travel path of the equipment into the building must also
            be considered.  The  most stringent floor loading requirements shall govern. Operating, moving,
            stopping, and impact forces shall be considered part of the live loads. Live loads shall include neither
            dead loads nor loads from the environment, such as wind, tornado, earthquake, thermal forces, earth
            pressure, and fluid pressure.

            •   Live loads for buildings and other structures shall be those produced by the intended use or
                occupancy. In no case shall they be less than the minimum uniform load or concentrated load
                stipulated in ASCE Standard 7- 02, or required by the local building code, whichever is more
                stringent.  A minimum of 60 psf of hanging load shall be included for any central energy plant or
                major mechanical room where significant hanging loads are anticipated.

            •   Live loads on roofs shall be as stipulated in ASCE Standard 7 -02, or as required by  local building
                codes,  whichever is more stringent. Live loads on roofs shall include the minimum roof live loads
                or the snow loads and snow drifts or possible rain loads stipulated in the code, whichever produces
                the more severe effect. An allowance of 10 psf shall be included in the design of all roofs to allow
                for one re-roofing in the future.  If a planted roof is being considered as a sustainable design
                feature, the load for the roofing system and retained water shall be included.

            •   In continuous framing and cantilever construction, the design shall consider live load on all spans,
                as well as arrangements of partial live load that will produce maximum stresses in the supporting
                members.

1.5.3.3      SNOW LOADS
            Snow loads shall be as calculated in compliance with the provisions of ASCE Standard 7-02,  or the
            requirements of local building codes, whichever is more stringent.


                                                   1-14

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements

1.5.3.4      WEND LOADS
            Wind load design for buildings and other structures shall be determined in accordance with the
            procedures in ASCE Standard 7-02, or local codes, whichever is more stringent, using site-specific
            basic wind speeds.

            •   Exposure "C," as defined in ASCE Standard 7-02, shall be used as a minimum for all construction
                unless it can be shown that the necessary permanent shielding will be provided by natural terrain
                (not including shielding from trees or adjacent buildings).

            •   Building additions shall be designed as parts of a totally new building without regard to shielding
                from the original building and without regard to lesser wind resistance for which the original
                building may have been designed. The possibility that the original portion of the building may
                require strengthening because of an increase in the wind loads acting on it shall be considered.

1.5.3.5      SEISMIC LOADS
            To comply with Executive Order 12699, Seismic Safety of Federal and Federally Assisted or
            Regulated New Building Construction, the completed design for all new construction projects shall be
            submitted along with proper certification from a structural engineer registered in the state of
            performance that the design substantially meets or exceeds the seismic safety level in the current
            edition of the National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP) Recommended Provisions
            for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and Other Structures.

1.5.3.6      OTHER LOADS
            Other load requirements are as follows:

1.5.3.6.1    EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
            Equipment supports shall be designed to avoid resonance resulting from the harmony between the
            natural frequency of the structure and the operating frequency of reciprocating or rotating equipment
            (e.g., fume hood exhaust fans, vacuum pumps) supported on the structure.  The operating frequency of
            supported equipment shall be determined from manufacturers' data before completion of structural
            design.  Resonance shall be prevented by designing equipment isolation supports to reduce the
            dynamic transmission of the applied load to as low a level as can economically be achieved in the
            design.

1.5.3.6.2    FOUNDATION OR OTHER RETAINING STRUCTURES
            Every foundation or other wall  serving as a retaining structure shall be designed to resist, not only the
            vertical loads acting on it, but also the incident lateral earth pressures and surcharges, and the
            hydrostatic pressures corresponding to the maximum probable groundwater level.

1.5.3.6.3    RETAINING WALLS
            Retaining walls shall be designed for the earth pressures and the potential groundwater levels
            producing the highest stresses and overturning moments. When a water-pressure-relief system is
            incorporated into the design, only earth pressures need be considered. In cohesive soils, the long-term
            consolidation effects on the stability of the walls shall be considered. Lateral earth pressures shall be
            determined in accordance with accepted structural and geotechnical engineering practice.

1.5.3.6.4    STRESSES AND MOVEMENTS
            The design of structures shall include the effects of stresses and movements resulting from variations
            in temperature.  The rise and fall in the temperature shall be determined for the localities in which the
            structures are to be built.  Structures shall be designed for movements resulting from the maximum
            seasonal temperature change.
                                                   1-15

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section  1 - General Requirements

1.5.3.6.5    CREEP AND SHRINKAGE
            Concrete and masonry structures shall be investigated for stresses and deformations induced by creep
            and shrinkage.  For concrete and masonry structures, the minimum linear coefficient of shrinkage shall
            be assumed to be 0.0002 inch per inch, unless a detailed analysis indicates otherwise.  The theoretical
            shrinkage displacement shall be computed as the product of the linear coefficient and the length of the
            member.

1.5.3.6.6    VIBRATION-SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT
            The design professional shall be responsible for verifying the requirements of, and for, installation of
            vibration-sensitive equipment in all laboratory areas. The structural system in laboratory areas shall be
            designed to accommodate and control specific high localized frequency loads and vibration inputs
            from the general building systems to these sensitive areas. Five controls must be pursued:

            •   Use of physical separation to keep powerful sources of vibration well clear of the laboratory space.

            •   Identification and isolation of particular services that involve running speeds close to the natural
                frequencies of the floor.

            •   Identification and additional isolation of sources that, although they do not match the running
                speed of equipment and primary structural response frequencies, may produce sufficient vibration
                to cause a threat to the building.

            •   Identification, and, where possible, appropriate attenuation, of powerful transient impulses from
                services (e.g.,  switching in or out).

            •   Providing structural stiffness to reduce the peak acceleration responses caused by footfall-induced
                vibration.

1.5.3.7      LOAD COMBINATIONS
            Combination of loads, allowable stresses, and strength requirements for buildings and incidental
            structures shall be as stipulated in the governing local building code.

1.5.4        STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
            The following paragraphs concern the basic supporting systems of buildings.

1.5.4.1      FOUNDATIONS
            The provisions  of the  local governing building code shall be the minimum requirements for foundation
            design. The potential adverse effects of frost heave and movements due to expansive soils shall also
            be considered in the design.  For all structures, the requirements of standard design criteria shall be met
            with respect to determining subsurface conditions, recommending foundation type, establishing
            allowable soil-bearing pressure, determining seismic potential, and differential settlement.

            Where concrete slab-on-grade construction is used, the slab shall be placed on a capillary water barrier
            overlying a compacted subgrade. A moisture retardant shall be used under the slab, where moisture
            conditions warrant. Excess loads, or equipment subject to vibration, shall be supported by separate
            pads isolated from the rest of the floor slab with flexible joints.

1.5.4.2      FRAMING SYSTEMS
            Buildings shall  be framed to allow for simple formwork, fabrication, and construction procedures.
            Structural systems shall be designed for ductile modes  of failure to the extent feasible.

            In the selection of a framing system, consideration shall be given to the structure's functional
            requirements, including:
                                                    1-16

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements


                        Column-free areas
                        Floor-to-ceiling heights
                        Number of stories
                        Elevator, escalator, crane, and hoist installations
                        Heavy loads
                        Other requirements pertaining to the specific facility.

            For framed floors, the economy of prefabricated systems shall be considered, especially systems that
            simplify the installation of mechanical, electrical, and communications services.

1.5.4.3      LATERAL LOAD-RESISTING SYSTEMS
            Lateral load-resisting systems shall be provided to resist the effects of wind, earthquake motions,
            thermal forces, soil pressures, and dynamic forces caused  by rotating, reciprocating, or moving
            equipment. Use systems recognized by the local building code.  In the absence of local building code
            criteria, use structural systems recognized by the International Building Code for use in resisting
            seismic loads.

1.5.5        BUILDING MOVEMENT JOINTS
            Devices, usually in the form of joints, shall be designed into buildings to control movement.

1.5.5.1      CONTROL JOINTS
            Control joints shall be provided in all materials  subject to  drying shrinkage.  Control joint size and
            spacing shall be based on a rational analysis.

1.5.5.2      EXPANSION JOINTS
            Expansion joints shall be provided in all materials subject to thermal expansion. Expansion joint size
            shall be based on a rational analysis. In the absence of local building code requirements, building
            expansion joints shall be provided as recommended in Technical Report No. 65 Expansion Joints in
            Buildings (National Academy of Sciences, 1974).

1.5.5.3      SEISMIC JOINTS
            When seismic design is required, building expansion joints shall be seismic type. Buildings shall be
            separated adequately to prevent contact during an earthquake that would damage the structural systems
            of the buildings.


1.6     Architectural  Requirements
        Facility components shall be organized in a functional and aesthetic manner, according to a modular design
        concept that addresses the needs of all users of the facility. All administrative functions and all technical
        functions  shall be grouped into separate organizational blocks  of space while keeping them sufficiently
        close together to facilitate and encourage employee interaction.

        EPA facilities are generally  separated into three definable zones: laboratory (where applicable),
        administrative, and building support.  This division allows not only the most flexibility for facility design
        but also the most cost effective construction. In reference to the interior space of a building or facility, the
        following definitions apply:

        •    Rooms and spaces refer to individual divisions of space, each one usually defined or enclosed by
             partitions or walls.

        •    Blocks are groups or series of rooms or spaces, usually having  similar orientation and adjacencies.


                                                   1-17

-------
July 2006                                                             Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section 1 - General Requirements

        •     Zones are composed of two or more blocks of spaces, often providing the same or similar
              functionality.

        The building design concept shall establish the appropriate horizontal and vertical alignments of the facility
        to facilitate required programmatic relationships. Multiple floor facilities with repetitive support areas
        should consider vertical stacking and clustering of similar functions and structural loading requirements to
        reduce costs, quantity of penetrations through floors, and system vulnerabilities. Floor plate areas shall be
        optimized to accommodate the required occupancies and to allow for future expansion or alterations.

1.6.1    LABORATORY ZONE
        In research facilities, this zone includes all laboratories and laboratory support blocks within an individual
        branch or section. Laboratory-related office blocks shall be located in close proximity to related
        laboratories and laboratory support blocks.  These offices shall be across from related laboratory space or in
        "clusters" along a laboratory -related corridor. Window exposure for both offices and laboratories should
        be maximized.

1.6.1.1      LABORATORY MODULES
            The laboratory block(s)  shall utilize a modular laboratory planning concept to maximize flexibility and
            adaptability of research  space. The laboratory module represents the fundamental planning and
            organizing element. The repetitiveness and regularity of size,  shape, and arrangement of space
            provides the ability to convert and renovate space quickly on the basis of each investigator's unique  set
            of laboratory design requirements and demands.  As changes are required, the modular planning
            approach allows the expansion, subdivision, or reconfiguration of rooms without disturbing adj acent
            spaces or altering or forcing shutdown of, central building utility systems.

            •   The width of the laboratory module shall be at least 11 feet, from the centerline of the walls
                framing the laboratory module. The depth of a laboratory module should not be less than 26 feet
                or more than 33 feet. Within these limits, size shall be determined on the basis of task
                requirements and shall be consistent throughout a given block of laboratory rooms within a
                laboratory building.  Laboratories with heavy instrumentation requirements may require the wider
                module due to equipment wire and service access. The design professional shall study the
                requirements, evaluate the equipment and instrumentation needed for each laboratory, and either
                use the planning module size or propose other module sizes that architecturally and operationally
                will provide the required features.

            •   The structural system shall allow for future changes in various mechanical and utility services.
                Floor-loading capability shall be uniform throughout the building to permit space usage
                conversions.

            •   Laboratory systems capacity must be determined on the basis of a common per-module
                denominator that anticipates future needs.  In this determination, each module represents a unit of
                capacity for the building system (e.g., gallons of water, watts of power, cubic feet per minute
                [cfm] of supply and exhaust air). This generic method of calculating systems distribution ensures
                adequate building utility systems capacity  and prevents costly shutdown and reconstruction of
                primary building systems components.

            •   Modular laboratory design shall integrate primary building systems (HVAC, piping, electrical
                power, and communications) into a distribution loop with modulated, consistent, recurring points
                of distribution relative to each planning module.  These points of distribution give each module
                access to all laboratory systems; any additional services required in the future can easily be
                extended from the main distribution loop to the point of use. Each module shall have a readily
                accessible disconnect from each building system.


                                                   1-18

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements

            •   Building systems must be readily accessible for maintenance and servicing.  Components that
                require routine servicing should be located in corridor ceiling spaces or other spaces outside the
                laboratory perimeter.  Servicing building systems components inside the laboratories is disruptive
                and difficult because of the amount of scientific equipment that must be protected.  Whenever
                systems components are placed above ceilings, a lay-in type ceiling should be used, or access
                panels installed, to facilitate access for servicing and maintenance.

            •   An important consideration for the laboratory design is the distribution of services on a modular
                basis within the laboratory. Special design attention shall be paid to location of structural
                members related to penetrations for services along the walls and near the benches located in the
                center of the laboratory.

1.6.1.2      LABORATORY SUPPORT BLOCK
            Laboratory support space shall suit the needs of the specific laboratory. In some cases, a service
            corridor is used for laboratory support.  In some cases, special support spaces are needed between
            laboratories.  The laboratory support block is defined as the space that houses common, or shared,
            activities or equipment, such as analytical instrumentation, specialized equipment, environmental
            rooms, and glassware preparation areas, that indirectly support laboratory activities. These spaces can
            be interspersed between laboratories, supporting a specific activity, or can be  grouped together
            adjacent to a block of laboratories. Particular attention shall be paid to functional relationships among
            laboratory support spaces and laboratories, with an emphasis on the efficiency of the travel path of
            personnel, tasks, and material within a particular zone and between zones.

1.6.1.3      TECHNICAL SPACE
            Research support personnel (i.e., technicians, postdoctoral employees, laboratory assistants) should be
            provided with work space outside of the laboratory room in order to minimize long-term exposure to
            laboratory chemicals and the hazards presented by their use.  Technician space, such as shared offices,
            alcoves, and cubicles, does not have to be directly outside of the laboratory as long as it can be placed
            reasonably close to the laboratory. Some desktop work space should also be provided in the laboratory
            for laboratory-related reporting and documentation that should not be done at the laboratory bench.
            These workstations, where provided, must be so located as to minimize exposure to noxious, or
            otherwise hazardous, conditions.  The supply air and exhaust distribution system within the laboratory
            must be carefully coordinated with the designed work space to provide one or more "clean air" zones.
            In some instances, a physical separation, or barrier, may be required between the work space and the
            laboratory bench.

1.6.2    ADMINISTRATIVE ZONE
        Administrative zones include office spaces and support service areas.  The administrative offices shall be
        designed considering: circulation patterns of staff and staff interaction, visitors expected at the facility and
        their potential circulation patterns, and proximity of administration support functions, especially the
        resource center and meeting rooms, to administrative offices.

        In laboratory buildings, the administrative zone should be physically separated from the laboratory zone in
        the same building.  Building links between the administrative zone and the laboratory zone shall house
        pleasant and comfortable interaction spaces, such as  a lounge.

        Administrative support spaces include, but are not limited to, the spaces described below:

1.6.2.1      CONFERENCE ROOM
            Conference room areas must be sized in proportion to the number of staff and conference activities
            anticipated. The proper and adequate design of conference space for administrative areas and research
            areas reduces travel time and promotes interaction.  "Satellite conference rooms" can also double as
            "satellite resource centers" for periodicals related to special laboratory groups.

                                                    1-19

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section 1 - General Requirements

            Conference areas that are centrally located for general administrative meetings are often designed to be
            subdivided with the use of folding sound-resistant doors. A vending area and related seating area may
            be coordinated adjacent to the main conference area to provide a broader use of the conference area.
            Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming
            products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 3.6
            of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient beverage vending
            machines.  When conference areas and food-related areas are adjacent to one another, walls and doors
            must provide adequate  sound control. CC>2 monitors should be considered for the HVAC control.

1.6.2.2      TELECONFERENCE ROOM
            The teleconference room shall be designed to meet the specific teleconferencing needs of the facility.
            Additional issues to resolve include:

            •   Number of participants anticipated
            •   Special lighting requirements
            •   Special acoustic requirements
            •   CO2 monitors should be considered for the HVAC control.
            •   Acoustic isolation from  adjacent spaces
            •   Storage requirements
            •   Control room requirements
                      Determine whether a common control room for two conference rooms is required
                      Define control room requirements
                      Identify equipment requirements
                      Is a control room even required.

1.6.2.3      STORAGE
            Storage areas adjacent to administrative offices are required to hold paper stock and miscellaneous
            equipment storage and for collecting old corrugated cardboard.  Special attention  shall be exercised
            regarding the need for storage space to hold extra supplies related to administrative conference space
            (e.g., tables, chairs, overhead projectors, slide projectors, and easels).

1.6.2.4      COPIER
            Copier area shall be provided in close proximity to administrative areas.  It shall be located to promote
            researchers/staff interaction. Area shall be enclosed and directly exhausted to the outside to provide
            adequate air quality. Adequate space adjacent to the copier is needed for proper storage, placement of
            mixed office paper and toner cartridge recycling bins, and collating or layout areas for sorting copies.

1.6.2.5      COFFEE/VENDING
            A coffee/vending area shall be strategically located within a short travel distance from the area
            serviced.  Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005  requires that, when procuring energy
            consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See
            section 3.6 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient beverage
            vending machines. The coffee/vending area should be located to promote communication and
            researcher interaction.  Adequate area shall be provided to accommodate separate bins for collecting
            newspapers and commingled bottles and cans for recycling. Often coffee/vending areas are co-located
            with concession purchased items.  Special attention must be given to designing concession areas for
            both functional use and good aesthetic design. If there will be microwaves or other cooking
            appliances, the area shall be enclosed and exhausted directly to the outdoors for good indoor air
            quality.

1.6.2.6      COMPUTER ACCESS / PRINTER OUTPUT
            Computer areas including computer staff offices, paper storage and computer tape storage are often
            designed into a "computer suite."  Often, the "suite" will include printer output areas.
                                                   1-20

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements


            •   The computer area shall be located as centrally as possible to reduce travel as well as wiring to
                computer terminals.  The computer printer output areas are good interaction areas for staff and
                should be located to promote interaction.

            •   Special care is required to design both floor loading and fire ratings for film and paper storage
                areas.  Special fire protection consideration is required for the computer areas. A preaction fire
                protection system shall be a part of the fire protection analysis for these areas.

            •   Computer areas will probably have access flooring that may require accessible ramps (ADA
                compliance required) to these areas.  Special acoustical consideration is required in computer and
                printer output areas.  If a glass wall is used to view into the computer area, adequate attention shall
                be given to fire protection of this glass wall.

            •   Adequate space adjacent to printers shall be allocated for placing bins for recycling mixed office
                paper and boxes for collecting used laser toner cartridges for recycling.

1.6.2.7      VISITOR INFORMATION CENTER
            If the facility will be open to domestic and/or foreign visitors, a visitor center should be considered. A
            visitor center shall include, at a minimum, the following amenities:

            •   Relaxation area
            •   Projection/sound equipment
            •   Large screen television with video cassette recorder (VCR)
            •   Coffee area.

            Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming
            products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products.  See section 3.6
            of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient beverage vending
            machines.

1.6.3    BUILDING SUPPORT ZONE
        The building support zone design shall house a receiving dock, facility physical plant, mechanical
        equipment, and central storage.  Its location shall be determined in accordance with the site master plan and
        should optimize service vehicle circulation.  In laboratory facilities, the building support zone  should be
        located adjacent to the laboratory zone to facilitate the movement of equipment and material to and from
        the laboratories.

        Appropriate loading dock/staging facilities are required relative to the size, function, and material
        requirements of each laboratory. The truck turning radius to loading facilities should be appropriate to the
        truck size anticipated.  The loading dock might include a leveling device for accommodating different size
        trucks.  A covered loading/unloading area is desirable. The loading dock area shall be considered for video
        monitoring for security purposes. Issues to resolve are as follows:

            •   Nitrogen storage requirements and location; note security fence requirements
            •   Breakout area size
            •   Bulk mail process defined
            •   Access for emergency vehicle and ramps
            •   Truck parameters (dock height,  leveler requirements)
            •   Security requirements
            •   Concrete paving for loading dock area
            •   Dumpster and compaction requirements
            •   Area for waste stream separation and recycling.
                                                   1-21

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                         Section 1 - General Requirements
        For laboratory facilities, an isolated hazardous materials/waste storage facility (HMSF) shall be also
        located near this zone to facilitate transportation and handling of explosive/flammable materials, toxic
        chemicals, and biohazardous waste before disposal at an off-site location by a licensed contractor.


1.7     Special Room/Space Requirements and Concerns

1.7.1    RESTROOMS
        Each men's and women's restroom should have shower stalls and adequate lockers for the operation and
        the number of people, men and women, to encourage staff to bike or walk to work.  Restrooms shall
        conform to ADA and/or UFAS requirements, as applicable. All sanitation finishes shall be non-permeable,
        non-corrosive, and easily maintainable. Restrooms shall be equipped with exhaust ventilation to the
        outside.

1.7.2    JANITOR CLOSETS/CUSTODIAL SPACE
        Janitor closets shall be provided in sufficient numbers to service the various areas of the building(s). Each
        floor or block shall have at least one janitor closet with mop sink. These rooms shall be equipped with
        exhaust ventilation to atmosphere and louvered doors. Custodial space shall contain adequate storage space
        for cleaning equipment and supplies.  Besides the custodial space located on each floor, a central custodial
        office, locker rooms and storage space shall be considered during the early phases of design. This area
        shall be located in close proximity to  other building services areas.

1.7.3    SHOP FACILITIES
        Shop facilities shall be located with exterior access appropriate to their function. The shop facilities shall
        be remotely located from vibration, noise, and dust-sensitive areas.

1.7.4    LIBRARY
        The library shall be located with good access to storage, services elevator,  and conference facilities.
        Additional issues are as follows:

        •     Type of library storage
        •     Computer terminals required
        •     Study carrels required
        •     Work space required
        •     Floor loading/structural requirements.

1.7.5    CHEMICAL STORAGE
        Chemical storage shall be provided and be in compliance with the requirements of Chapter 4 of the Safety
        Manual.

1.7.6    GENERAL STORAGE
        General storage is usually required on every floor. General storage  facilities are the most typically
        forgotten or undersized spaces in EPA facilities.  In Government facilities, where it is difficult to resolve
        equipment disposition, adequate storage space is critical.  Additional issues to resolve:

        •     Locate storage internal to the building, maximizing underused space for occupied functions
        •     Ensure good access to service elevator
        •     Size rooms with freezers or other bulky equipment relative to equipment dimensions  and layout
        •     Check corridor and elevator dimensions for movement of equipment
        •     Resolve signal runs to central control area as required by program
        •     Ensure space to collect corrugate cardboard for recycling.

                                                  1-22

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 1 - General Requirements


1.7.7    FOOD SERVICE AND DINING
        Food service must be located with good access to the loading dock and the service elevator.  The food
        service and dining shall be as centrally located as possible with an exterior view if possible. Additional
        issues to resolve:

        •   Quantity of seating required
        •   Type of food service to be provided
        •   Secondary uses of food service spaces
        •   Placement of separate recycling bins for collecting newspaper and commingled bottles and cans.

1.7.8    OUTSIDE RESEARCH FACILITIES
        Any outside research space related to a laboratory facility shall be constructed and designed to be of a
        quality that is in keeping with the research complex environment.

1.7.9    FIRE  CONTROL ROOM
        A fire control room is required inside high-rise buildings. In conjunction with local and EPA requirements,
        the local fire marshal shall be consulted to address and resolve any special concerns.  Special attention shall
        also be provided to the elevator/service elevator design and its function in a fire fighting mode. Special
        consideration shall be given to the removal of fire victims from the building.


1.8    Security

1.8.1    ENTRANCE  REQUIREMENTS
        All entrances to the facility must be clearly defined. There shall be only one main entrance, although
        access to this main entrance may be from  a variety of directions.  The following are general design
        requirements for the main entrance:

        •   The main entrance shall be consistent with the design of the facility.  The design of the space(s) and
            the material selection shall express EPA's and the facility's position in the world environmental
            community. Materials shall be high quality and durable.

        •   All entry spaces should be open, airy, and inviting to the entrant. All major entries should have
            vestibules and walk-off grilles to capture dirt, unless these are prohibited by historic preservation
            requirements.

        •   The main entrance must be easily recognizable and allow easy transition to other facility areas by first-
            time users of the facility.

        •   Each main entrance should be designed for incorporation of security equipment as defined in the FOR.
            Security equipment may include card readers, x-ray equipment and metal detectors.

1.8.2    ACCESS AND EGRESS
        The building subdivisions and the arrangement of exits, corridors, vestibules, lobbies, and rooms shall
        conform to requirements of the latest edition of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, and/or local codes,
        whichever is most stringent,  and shall allow fast and orderly exit in case of emergency and provide
        appropriate security for personnel, property, and experiments. The facility, buildings, and interior modules
        shall have controllable access, which should ensure a reasonably safe and secure working environment.

        A security control station shall be at the main entrance, and security personnel shall have good visual
        control over the building's main entrance  and lobby space, as well as monitor control over all other exits
        and entrances. Often a full-time security station is not economically justified by the amount of staff and

                                                   1-23

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                          Section 1 - General Requirements

        visitor traffic through the main entrance of the facility.  The receptionist may need to fulfill the security
        role. Administrative areas shall be in close proximity to the security control to provide reception function
        activities to support the security control staff.

1.8.3    EXTERIOR SPACES
        The exterior spaces on the property shall be adequately secured to eliminate the potential of unauthorized
        individuals gaining access to the property. Potentially hazardous or accident prone exterior areas shall be
        secured by adequate perimeter security.


1.9    Quality Assurance/Quality Control
        The design and construction contractor shall be responsible for quality control and shall establish and
        maintain an effective quality control system.  The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures,
        and organization necessary to produce an end product which complies with the contract requirements.  The
        Contractor shall furnish for review by the Government, the Contractor Quality  Control (CQC) Plan
        proposed to implement these requirements. The plan shall identify personnel, procedures, control,
        instructions, test, records, and forms to be used.

        At a minimum the plan shall include:

        •   A description of the quality control organization, including a chart showing lines of authority.

        •   The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of each person
            assigned a CQC function.

        •   Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing required samples, submittals,
            including those of subcontractors, off-site fabricators,  suppliers, and purchasing agents.

        •   Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test to include the test name,
            specification paragraph requiring test, feature of work to be tested, and person responsible for each
            test.

        •   Procedures for tracking construction deficiencies from identification through acceptable corrective
            action. These procedures will establish verification that identified deficiencies have been corrected.

        For construction contracts, the system shall cover all construction operations, both on-site and off-site, and
        shall be keyed to the proposed construction operations sequence.  Construction will be permitted to begin
        only after acceptance of the CQC Plan or acceptance of an interim plan applicable to the particular feature
        of work to be started.

1.10   Commissioning Requirements

        Refer to Appendix B of this Manual for the commissioning guidelines.


END OF SECTION 1
                                                   1-24

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

                                    Section  2 - Site Work

2.1     Scope of Project

2.1.1    GENERAL
        The location, type of building and support facility proposed, impact on site development, and general scope
        of work shall be described for the project. The description shall include such elements as access roads,
        parking areas, and loading and unloading areas, utilities, water supply, storm and wastewater.

2.1.2    DEVELOPMENT CODES
        All site work must comply with the applicable federal, state, city, and local zoning and building codes and
        with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Uniform Federal Accessibility
        Standards (UFAS). Refer to Appendix A for some of the many codes, regulations, trade organizations,
        publications, and guides that may be applicable.  When codes and/or regulations conflict, the most stringent
        standard shall govern. Information on applicable codes must be provided as stated in the following
        subsections.

2.1.2.1      ZONING
            A brief overview of local zoning and land development codes and their impact on site development
            shall be given for the proposed project.

2.1.2.2      BUILDING CODES
            Description of the applicable building codes shall be provided, with any specific references to seismic,
            floodplain, or coastal development as it relates to site development.

2.1.2.3      ADA REQUIREMENTS
            The proposed project will  comply with current federal (28 CFR Parts 35 and 36), state, and local ADA
            guidelines for the physically disabled.


2.2     Site Influences

2.2.1    LAND RESOURCES
        Information shall be provided on the geography,  geology, climate, typical meteorological data, and
        hydrology of the site areas.

2.2.1.1      SITE VICINITY
            The geographic location of the project shall be described.  Site location with respect to designated
            floodplains will be noted.  EPA facilities shall not be located within the 100-year floodplain.
            Appropriate information on the local area economy, business, and industry shall also be provided.

2.2.1.2      PHYSIOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY
            A general description of known site geology and physiography shall be provided. Appropriate
            information shall be taken from the preliminary geotechnical investigation if this has been performed
            and is available when information is being gathered for this document.  Seismic effects and the
            geological, foundation, and tsunami (seawave) hazards often associated with earthquakes must be
            considered. Probability with respect to severity and frequency of ground shaking varies from one
            geographic region to another; regions in which there are similar hazard factors are identified as seismic
            zones.  Refer to the National Earthquake Hazards Reduction Program to determine the seismic zone in
            which the site is located.
                                                  2-1

-------
July 2006                                                             Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Section 2-Site Work

2.2.1.3      CLIMATOLOGY
            The specific climatic conditions of the proposed site shall be described, especially precipitation and
            predominant wind directions and highest expected wind gust on the site. Where available, local
            precipitation data shall be used in lieu of regional data for specific site hydrologic modeling.

2.2.1.4      HYDROLOGY
            A general description of site hydrology shall be provided. This description shall include data taken
            from the preliminary geotechnical investigation and the Soil Conservation Service soil survey.  The
            following specific site information shall be assembled for use in the hydrologic modeling of the
            project:

            •   Geographic location
            •   Precipitation frequency data
            •   Drainage area
            •   Soil and cover
            •   Runoff distribution
            •   Groundwater
            •   Rainfall intensity-duration curves based on historic record should be developed and used for each
                locale.  The design storm events shall be based on a study of precipitation frequency, runoff
                potential, and runoff distribution relative to the physical characteristics of the watershed. Where
                available, stream gauge data shall be used to estimate design flows in major channels. Where
                stream gauge data are inadequate or unavailable, rainfall information shall be taken from
                documented sources, such as National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration/U.S. Weather
                Bureau Technical Paper No. 40. Design storm precipitation values taken from documented
                sources or derived by published engineering methodology shall be used to estimate design flood
                discharges.

2.2.2        TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
                The transportation requirements of the project and the project's relationship to and effect on
            existing roadways shall be described.

2.2.2.1      AIR
            A general description of project requirements for heliports or airfields shall be provided.

2.2.2.2      LAND
            A general description of the proposed project and its location relative to existing roadways shall be
            provided. Development of the proposed facility and the impacts on the existing roadway system shall
            be addressed. This assessment shall include references to the traffic impact analysis if such an analysis
            is required for the project. For sites located in metropolitan areas with extensive public transportation
            systems, access to public transportation is desirable. A general description of proposed pedestrian and
            bicycle transportation systems should be included.

2.2.2.3      WATER
            A general description of project requirements relative to boating shall be provided, including
            requirements for marinas, docking and/or storage facilities, seawalls and refueling facilities.
            Applicable permitting requirements of federal, state, and local agencies shall also be addressed.

2.2.3        ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
            The project's effects on the surrounding environment, including air quality, water quality, and noise
            levels shall be addressed. Communities involved should be given the opportunity to participate in the
            identification of ways to reduce adverse environmental effects that negatively affect human health. A
            written Environmental Protection Plan for the construction effort  shall be required.

                                                    2-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

2.2.3.1      AIR QUALITY
            The impact of the proposed project on air quality shall be addressed. The assessment shall include all
            sources of air emissions and compliance with the requirements of federal, state, and local agencies.

2.2.3.2      WATER RESOURCES
            The proposed project's impact on available water resources, including both ground and surface waters,
            shall be addressed.

2.2.3.3      NOISE POLLUTION
            Any noise pollution that will be associated with the proposed project, its impact on surrounding
            development, and the project's compliance with applicable zoning and land development codes on
            noise pollution shall be addressed.

2.2.3.4      REDEVELOPMENT
            EPA encourages building on previously developed land, rather than on undeveloped property. If
            brownfield sites are considered, remedial actions must be identified and resolved per EPA guidelines
            prior to construction.


2.3         Site Investigation

2.3.1        SITE SURVEYS
            The design professional shall be responsible for providing site investigations, land (metes and bounds)
            surveys, and an environmental assessment of the site. Site investigations, land surveys, and
            environmental assessments shall be performed by professional engineers registered in the state of
            performance and/or land surveyors, as applicable.

            At a minimum, the survey(s) shall show legal property boundaries, easements, and legal restrictions, as
            well as all man-made and natural physical characteristics, utility service locations (temporary and
            permanent), horizontal and vertical controls, benchmarks, roadways, and parking areas. Land surveys
            should  conform to the requirements of General Services Administration (GSA) document PBS-P100
            and the minimum standard detail requirements for ALTA/ACSM Land Title Surveys (1999), as
            applicable.

            The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be consistent
            with the nature and importance of each survey. Where required by law (i.e., applicable state statutes),
            all control and property surveys at EPA sites shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, a
            professional land surveyor registered in the state in which the site is situated.

2.3.1.1      PRELIMINARY SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION
            Preliminary subsurface exploration shall be performed by a registered geotechnical engineer. The
            registered geotechnical engineer shall supervise all required testing, review and analyze all data and
            samples, and submit a report. All tests shall be performed by independent testing laboratories.
            Subsurface investigations should conform to the requirements of GSA document PBS-P100 Appendix
            A, as applicable.

2.3.1.2      ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT
            Design and environmental professionals selected by EPA will evaluate the effects that the additions
            and improvements will have on the local environment. Under the purview of the National
            Environmental Policy Act (NEPA), an environmental assessment (EA) may also be required, which
            will determine the need for an environmental impact statement (EIS).  The EA should conform to EPA
            environmental assessment requirements, as applicable. The preparation of the environmental


                                                  2-3

-------
July 2006                                                             Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Section 2-Site Work

            assessment, if required, may be included as a part of the professional services contract. See also
            Chapter 9 of the Environmental Management Guidelines (Volume 4 of the EPA Facilities Manual).

2.3.1.3      OUTDOOR POLLUTANT SOURCES
            The facility shall meet the indoor air quality requirements described in Section 15 of this document.
            To address these requirements, the primary strategy for indoor air quality control is source control of
            outdoor pollutant sources. Effective source control requires that potential sources be clearly identified
            and addressed.  The sources of air pollutants that must be considered are adjacent and nearby stationary
            pollution sources, for example, exhausts from other research facilities or from commercial buildings
            such as dry -cleaning establishments or restaurants,  nearby roadways, parking lots, loading docks, trash
            storage, and garage and their motor vehicle traffic patterns.  Consideration must be given to variations
            in the potential sources over time, including daily, weekly, and seasonal patterns.  Temporal and
            spatial variations in wind direction and velocity, traffic patterns, and emissions from industrial
            processes that affect air quality at the site must be considered. The locations and forms of adjacent
            buildings that might result in local wind patterns causing reentrainment of the facility's own exhausts
            must be considered and addressed.  The potential impact that ponds, cooling towers, cooling coil  drip
            pans, and other potential sites of microbial contamination may have on IAQ must also be considered.
            Previous land uses, such as agriculture or industry,  might result in emissions from contaminated soil or
            groundwater as a potential source of indoor air pollutants. Some examples of potentially  significant
            prior uses are wood preservation and treatment; solid or hazardous waste handling, storage, treatment,
            or disposal; dry-cleaning processes; leather, paint, or chemical manufacturing; refrigerated storage;
            gasoline storage or dispensing; and agriculture.  Even nearby building demolition can result in
            significant site contamination through release of building materials such as asbestos into air or into
            soil, which may remain on-site or be backfilled onto it.  The design professional must include
            consideration of the following factors:

            •   Prior history of the site
            •   Off-site and on-site sources of pollution
            •   Soils and soil gases (including radon, organic chemicals, metals, and microbes)
            •   Ambient air quality
            •   Landscaping (including highly sporulating types of plantings).

2.3.2        SITE EVALUATION
            The ultimate purpose of the site evaluation is to provide EPA with sufficient pertinent data to allow a
            complete evaluation of the physical conditions of the given project site.

2.3.2.1      SITE DATA COLLECTION
            Using the information developed above and in other sources required by this document, the design
            professional shall consider planning and zoning criteria for the subject property.  This consideration
            shall include the investigation of all potential site development regulations such as density limitations,
            building setbacks, building height, building coverage, buffer requirements, and other development
            guidelines set forth in any applicable campus, site,  or facility master plan or elsewhere in this
            document.

            An on-site investigation and review shall be conducted, which shall include representatives of the
            client, the design professional, and the preconstruction testing and inspection company. A site
            representative shall verify land features indicated on the survey. Photographs shall be taken at various
            locations to provide a visual record to  aid in the development of the site analysis drawings.

2.3.2.2      SITE RESOURCE INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS
            A site resource inventory and analysis shall be prepared, which shall include investigation of soil
            information, identification of site vegetation, hydrology and drainage analysis, topographic and
            elevation analysis, and analysis of view corridors and other physical characteristics of the site. A

                                                    2-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

            "buildable area" plan shall be developed by compiling information from the various analysis drawings.
            This plan shall indicate the acres of land that are suitable for construction.  The site inventory and
            analysis shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
            •   The site overview will include, but will not be limited to, location, parcel delineation and acreage,
                existing zoning, and adjoining land uses.

            •   Physical site characteristic analyses include, but are not limited to, slope analysis, elevation
                analysis, existing vegetation identification, hydrology analysis, geological and soils analysis, site
                analysis, buildable areas analysis, wetland analysis, solar and shadow studies, and analysis of
                prevailing winds.

            •   Utilities include, but are not limited to, stormwater drainage, potable water, sanitary sewer,
                electrical power and communications, and mechanical systems.

2.3.3        GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION
            For permanent structures, subsurface conditions shall be determined by means of borings or other
            methods that adequately disclose soil and groundwater conditions. Data obtained from previous
            subsurface investigations shall be used, along with any additional investigations at the location that are
            deemed necessary.  Subsurface investigations shall be performed under the direction of a licensed
            professional geotechnical engineer. Groundwater levels must be recorded when initially encountered
            and after they have been allowed to stabilize. In earthquake-prone areas, appropriate geological
            investigations shall be made to determine the contribution of the foundation (subsurface) to the
            earthquake loads imposed on the structure. These investigations shall include, but shall not be limited
            to,  a recommendation of foundation type, determinations of allowable soil bearing capacity, and
            assessment of the possible effects of seismic activity on the soil mass. A settlement analysis under
            different design loads shall be performed where differential settlement may cause structural,
            architectural, or any other type of building damage.

2.3.3.1      TESTING AND SAMPLING METHODS
            Testing and sampling shall comply with American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
            standards, including ASTM D-1586, ASTM D-1587, and ASTM D-2113. Soil samples shall be taken
            below the existing grade and at each change in soil stratification or consistency. The depth of soil
            samples shall be determined by the geotechnical engineer after consultation with the project engineer
            on  site-related design requirements.

2.3.3.2      TEST REPORTS
            All data required by ASTM or the other standard test methods used shall be obtained, recorded in the
            field, and referenced to boring numbers.  Soil shall be visually classified in the field logs in accordance
            with ASTM D-2488, but the classification for final logs shall be based on the field information, results
            of tests, and further inspection of samples in the laboratory by the geotechnical engineer preparing the
            report. At a minimum, the report shall:

            •   Include a chart illustrating the  soil classification criteria and the terminology and symbols used in
                the boring logs.

            •   Identify the  ASTM or other recognized standard sampling and test methods used.

            •   Provide a plot plan giving dimensioned locations of test borings.

            •   Provide vertical sections plotted showing (1) material encountered, (2) reference to known datum,
                (3) number of blows per linear foot (N value), and (4) groundwater level for all holes where
                groundwater is encountered. Data for groundwater shall include both the initial groundwater level
                and the static groundwater level.

                                                    2-5

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                      Section 2-Site Work
            •   Note the location of strata containing organic materials, weak materials, or other inconsistencies
                that might affect engineering conclusions.

            •   Describe the existing surface conditions.

            •   Summarize the subsurface conditions.

            •   Provide pavement structural design data, including results of California bearing ratio tests or
                modulus of subgrade reaction tests.

            •   Provide a profile and/or topographic map of rock or other bearing stratum.

            •   Analyze the probable variations in elevations and movements of subsurface water due to seasonal
                influences.

            •   Report all laboratory determinations of soil properties, including shrinkage and expansion
                properties.

2.3.4        GROUNDWATER INVESTIGATION
            A groundwater investigation shall be made before selection of a dewatering control system. The
            investigation shall examine the character of subsurface soils, groundwater conditions and quality, and
            the availability of an electric power source. The source of seepage shall be determined and the
            boundaries and seepage flow characteristics of geologic and soil formations at, and adjacent to, the site
            shall be analyzed in accordance with the mathematical,  graphic,  and electroanalogous methods
            discussed in Technical Manual 5-818-5, Dewatering and Groundwater Control (November 1983), U.S.
            Army Corp of Engineers. Field reports identifying groundwater elevations and other relevant features
            should be provided to the construction contractor responsible for dewatering and groundwater
            investigation.


2.4         Site Development

2.4.1        SURVEYING
            The following surveys must be conducted, and the following survey documentation provided, for each
            site.

2.4.1.1      GENERAL
            Construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be conducted in coordination with the
            appropriate EPA authority and the Project Architect/Engineer. Where feasible, surveying support
            available fromEPA contractors shall be used.  Survey field notes shall be legibly recorded on standard
            (8!/2-by-l 1-inch) field-note forms.  Field notes and final plots of  surveys shall be furnished to the
            appropriate EPA authority. Any boundary surveys and recorded maps shall be forwarded to the
            appropriate EPA authority.

            The degree of accuracy of construction, control, property, and topographic surveys shall be consistent
            with the nature and importance of each survey.  Surveys shall conform to the requirements of
            applicable local and state statutes), and shall be performed by, or under the supervision of, a
            professional land surveyor registered in the state in which the subject site is situated.

2.4.1.2      SURVEY CONTROL
            The appropriate EPA authority shall be responsible for establishing, recording, and perpetuating
            primary on-site horizontal and vertical control monumentation. In addition, the appropriate EPA
                                                  2-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                         July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

            authority shall be responsible for correlating primary site-specific horizontal and vertical
            monumentation with that of other appropriate agencies. All surveying and mapping shall conform to
            the standards listed in Table 2.4.1.2, Survey Standards and/or state survey standards, whichever are
            more stringent.

 Table 2.4.1.2 Survey Standards
 Survey Standard
Survey Type
 TEC-1110-1-147
 ETL-1110-1-150
 EM-1110-1-1000
 EM-1110-1-1001
 EM-1110-1-1002
 EM-1110-1-1003
 EM-1110-1-1005

 EM-1110-1-1006
 EM-1110-2-1003
 EM-1110-1-1807
CORPS Construction
Global Positioning System (GPS)/Dredging
Photogrammetry
Geodetic control
Monumentation
GPS control
Topographic and  field supervision and
maintenance [FY-94]
Land boundary [FY-95]
Hydrographic survey
Computer-aided drafting design (CADD) (volumes
2.4.1.3          MONUMENTATION
                Requirements with respect to monumentation are as follows.

2.4.1.3.1         TEMPORARY CONTROL
                For temporary control monuments:

                •   Where the scope and complexity of the project warrants, the placement, number, and location
                   of temporary horizontal and vertical control monuments in new development areas shall be
                   coordinated with the existing system and approved.

                •   A minimum of two intervisible control monuments shall be placed along, or adjacent to, right-
                   of-way lines. These temporary control monuments shall be tied to an established grid. The
                   surveyor who sets such monumentation shall submit legible notes, drawings, and reproducible
                   documentation to the appropriate EPA authority. The location and construction of all
                   temporary monuments in the immediate vicinity of new construction shall be indicated on the
                   construction drawings.

                •   Temporary control monuments shall be 5/8-inch-diameter mild steel bars or 3/4-inch-diameter
                   iron pipe with a minimum length of 2 feet or plastic hubs. These monuments shall be set
                   flush with, or within 0.2 feet of, the ground surface. Manhole rims, markings chiseled in
                   concrete, PK nails in asphalt, and lead and tack in bedrock shall be suitable as alternative
                   temporary monumentation when approved.

                •   Three guard posts with reflective-paint striping shall be installed adjacent to temporary
                   control monuments in high-traffic areas to prevent vehicular damage. Temporary control
                   monuments shall be set in conformance with the accuracy standards of the U.S. Corps of
                   Engineers.
                                                 2-7

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                    Section 2-Site Work

2.4.1.3.2        PERMANENT CONTROL
                For permanent control monuments:

                •   The placement, number, and location of permanent survey monuments for horizontal and
                    vertical control shall be coordinated with, and approved by, the appropriate EPA authority.
                    The location and description of the nearest permanent survey monument shall be provided on
                    construction drawings. These monuments shall be tied to an established state plane coordinate
                    system.

                •   Any surveyor who sets a permanent survey monument shall submit legible notes, sketches, or
                    other reproducible documentation that shows the location of the new monument relative to the
                    on-site horizontal and vertical control network, to the applicable state plane coordinate
                    system, to the North American Datum (NAD) of 1983, and to the National Geodetic Vertical
                    Datum (NGVD) of 1929. The convergence, scale factor, and elevation on the monument shall
                    also be shown.

                •   Permanent survey monuments shall be considered properly positioned and represented only
                    after the appropriate EPA authority has approved all survey procedures and calculations and
                    has verified conformance to the Corps of Engineers standards and specifications.

                •   Permanent survey monuments shall be identified as prescribed by Corps of Engineers
                    standards.

                •   These identification numbers shall be documented within the survey field notes and shown on
                    the design drawings and within related documents.  Temporary point identification for
                    permanent survey monuments may be assigned by the surveyor; however, permanent point
                    identification shall only be assigned to such monuments by the appropriate EPA authority.
                    Permanent survey monuments shall not be removed without prior authorization from the
                    appropriate EPA authority.

2.4.1.3.3        BENCHMARKS
                For benchmarks:

                •   A minimum of one permanent benchmark for vertical control shall be established in each new
                    development area. A minimum of three benchmarks shall be established if there are no
                    existing benchmarks within a 3-mile radius of each new development area.  Elevations shall
                    be referenced to the North American Vertical Datum (NAVD) of 1983 or to the NGVD of
                    1929.  Level section misclosures between fixed benchmark elevations shall equal or exceed
                    third-order accuracy, as defined in the Federal Geodetic Control Committee (FGCC)
                    Standards and Specifications for Geodetic Control Networks.

                •   Permanent benchmarks shall be identified in the same manner as permanent survey
                    monuments. Permanent benchmarks shall not be removed without prior approval by the
                    appropriate EPA authority. The location and description of all benchmarks in the immediate
                    vicinity of new construction shall be indicated on the construction drawings.

2.4.1.3.4    UTILITY, ROADWAY, AND PARKING AREA SURVEYS
                Surveys of utilities, roadways, and parking areas  shall be conducted  according to the following
                requirements:

                •   Coordinates and elevations shall be determined for utilities, roads, and parking areas at their
                    principal points of definition. This information shall be provided on the construction
                    drawings. The principal points of definition for utility systems shall be utility poles,
                                                  2-8

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

                     obstructions, manholes, valve boxes, culverts, and other appurtenances for heating and
                     cooling lines, sewers, and overhead and underground power and telephone systems.

                •    Principal points of definition for potable water, and natural gas, distribution systems shall be
                     valve boxes, main line intersects, elbows, and fire hydrants.

                •    The principal points of definition for roads shall be roadway centerline intersects. Road
                     alignment surveys shall include stationing, bearings, and curve information tied to these
                     principal points of definition. Where applicable, the following information shall also be
                     provided on the construction drawings:

                         Stations and deflection angles for each point of intersection.
                         Right-of-way lines and markers.
                         Spot elevations (centerline, edge of pavement, and at intersects) at maximum intervals of
                         100 feet.
                         Other improvements (e.g., drainage inlets, wheelchair ramps, fire hydrants, sidewalks,
                         and curb and gutter).
                         Topographic features within project limits.
                         Elevation contours.
                         Overhead and underground utility crossings (plan and profile).
                         Roadway drainage crossings.
                         Location and description of underground utility witness markers.

2.4.1.3.5    UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
                Where exact routes of underground utilities are not defined within record drawings, the
                appropriate EPA authority shall coordinate necessary electronic line detection and exploratory
                excavation activities. Such utilities shall be located by survey and documented on the construction
                drawings.

2.4.1.3.6    CONSTRUCTION STAKING
                Construction staking for new EPA facilities shall comply with local standards and with practices
                approved by the appropriate EPA authority.

2.4.2        SITE PLANNING AND DESIGN
            In the development of a site proposed for construction, it is necessary, at a minimum, to address,
            analyze, and assess all site-related issues outlined below and to comply with the requirements of
            Chapter 2, Site Planning and Landscape Design, GSA document PBS-P100, as applicable.

2.4.2.1      IMPACT
            The following issues are to be studied in assessing the impact of a project on a  given site or the man-
            made or natural environment:

            •   On-site capacities of present and future utilities

            •   Existing buildings (discussion shall include any need for temporary facilities and services to these
                buildings)

            •   Existing site utilities (discussion shall include any need for utility relocation and shutdown)

            •   Stormwater run-off, wastewater discharge (including acid wastewater)

            •   Existing traffic patterns and vehicles, including emergency and service vehicles


                                                    2-9

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                      Section 2-Site Work

            •   Availability and proximity of public transportation

            •   Need for traffic phasing and control-plan requirements

            •   Existing parking structures and surface parking (discussion shall include any need for temporary
                parking areas and additional capacity)

            •   Exhaust discharge

            •   Energy usage (e.g., building placement/orientation, sun and shadow, analysis of prevailing wind
                patterns)

            •   Need for an environmental impact statement.

2.4.2.2      DEVELOPMENT
            The following issues must be taken into account in determining whether the proposed development is
            appropriate and compatible with  its natural environment and surrounding community.

            •   Preserving surrounding neighborhoods and communities. Laboratory facilities shall be located in
                areas where local zoning permits; however, facilities should be no less than one-quarter mile from
                existing residential developments and shall be located in such a way that prevailing winds will not
                direct fumes exhausting from EPA stacks toward existing residential developments.

            •   Preserving the character of the site, to the maximum possible extent, by retaining natural features,
                such as  ground forms, trees,  and other natural vegetation.

            •   Using the existing site to best advantage by locating and orienting buildings so that they are
                compatible with natural site features.

            •   Developing functional relationships between site access points, parking lots, buildings, service
                areas, and all other project site elements.

            •   Providing for orderly future expansion of facilities by considering logical expansion of buildings,
                parking, and support services.

            •   Reviewing and assessing the impact of development with respect to any approved campus master
                plan and site infrastructure master plan.

2.4.2.3      DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
            The following issues must be considered in planning any EPA facility or site.

2.4.2.3.1        ENERGY CONSIDERATIONS
                Sun angles, light and shadow studies, prevailing winds, existing topography, microclimatic
                conditions, and major wooded areas shall be carefully analyzed to contribute to a more energy-
                efficient solution. Energy conservation should be enhanced by careful consideration and
                evaluation of the orientation of buildings. Climate assets should be maximized and climate
                liabilities minimized

2.4.2.3.2        VIEWS
                Proper orientation of facilities to  capitalize on major vistas is strongly encouraged. Views into the
                site from major roadways should be carefully designed to be attractive and reflective of EPA's
                mission.

                                                   2-10

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 2-Site Work
2.4.2.3.3        TOPOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE
                A design shall be provided that works with, and not against, the existing grades.  Significant
                positive drainage away from any existing or new construction is a primary concern. The design
                shall preserve, as much as is practical, any major existing drainage patterns.

                •   The natural grades of the site should be used to develop multilevel entry points, if possible.
                    Positive drainage away from all portions of the building is required.

                •   The location of the 100-year floodplain shall be determined, and if this is present on the site,
                    the boundaries should be delineated on all surveys and site plans.

                •   The impact of development on stormwater runoff must be assessed, including absorption and
                    retention..

2.4.2.3.4        ADJACENT LAND USE
                In siting a facility, consideration should be given to existing land uses or potential development
                nearby, because such land use may affect or restrict the facility design. Existing and proposed
                traffic patterns shall be considered in the design of site access and driveway locations.

2.4.2.3.5        NOISE, FUMES, AND ODORS
                Adjacent land uses may contribute noise, fumes, and odors; these uses shall be considered in the
                site development process. Noise or odors may be severe enough to disqualify a site from
                consideration; therefore, a thorough analysis of neighboring facilities must be undertaken to
                ensure compatibility of the proposed facility with the existing adjacent land uses and environment.

2.4.2.3.6        VIBRATION
                If there are adjacent land uses that produce vibrations that can be measured on a proposed site, the
                extent of the vibration and whether it will affect the proposed program shall be determined.

2.4.2.4          HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS
                All applicable publicly available documents shall be reviewed for any on-site historical or
                archaeological information.  Any public record indicating historically or archaeologically sensitive
                areas on-site must be reported to EPA before any design is initiated.  Archaeologically and
                historically sensitive areas on-site must be completely avoided until, and after, a thorough
                investigation has been completed and findings documented that provide direction on whether the
                area(s) in question may be used or must be preserved for future exploration.

2.4.2.5          COMMUNITY ISSUES AND ENVIRONMENTAL JUSTICE
                Environmental justice issues, as established by EPA, shall be addressed and the requirements of
                any required community review processes ascertained. A report shall be provided to EPA early in
                the design process and well before any community review is required on the project. All
                community reviews are over and above  any EPA design review; reviews shall not be combined.
                Requirements of community review panels may include, but are not limited to, the following:

                •   Separate plans prepared to specifically highlight or emphasize that group's concern.

                •   Research and data collection to be used in generating special reports and in the environmental
                    assessment.

                •   Presentation graphics for a formal submission or presentation during the review process.
                                                   2-11

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                      Section 2-Site Work

                •   Documentation of the review and approval process, submission requirements, deadlines for
                    each portion of the process, and the sequence that must be followed.

                •   Identification of the methodologies, research, and data needed to identify and evaluate
                    populations at disproportionately high environmental or human health risks and to ensure that
                    these needs are considered in developing any EPA facility.

2.4.3        FACILITY SITING
            This subsection addresses facility siting issues and requirements.

2.4.3.1      GENERAL
            A site development plan shall be used to locate new facilities on existing or new sites in order to
            ensure effective site utilization and avoid future conflicts between existing and new facilities.

            •   During facility siting, an environmental assessment shall be prepared before the initiation of a
                Government action that may significantly affect the environment.

            •   To the extent possible, facilities shall not be sited in floodplains or in areas subject to flash floods;
                facility siting shall minimize destruction, loss, or degradation of wetlands.

            •   In selecting the particular site on an acquired or predetermined campus style site for new facilities,
                the conditions and requirements of Section 3.2.2 of the Space Acquisition and Planning Guidelines
                and the following shall be considered:

                    Programmatic and operating efficiency.
                    Endemic plant and animal species.
                    Past use of site and existence of known Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)
                    and/or Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act
                    (CERCLA) sites.
                    Health, safety, and environmental protection requirements.
                    Indoor air quality  impacts (e.g., presence of radon in foundation soils and contamination from
                    other exterior sources, natural or man-made).
                    Hazardous operations and consequences of potential accidents in adjacent facilities.
                    Wave action within any natural or man-made body of water (in accordance with the Coastal
                    Engineering Research Center [CERC] Shore Protection Manual).
                    Energy conservation requirements.

2.4.3.2      LABORATORY SITING
            New laboratories, EPA owned and leased, should be sited in consideration of the following guidance.

            •   Guidance from Criteria for Siting of Laboratory Facilities Based on Safety and Environmental
                Factors, prepared for EPA by  Johns Hopkins University, School of Hygiene and Public Health,
                Peter S. J. Lees and Morton Corn.

            •   Site acquisition methodology as prescribed in the Environmental Closure Process for EPA
                Laboratories chapter of the Safety, Health and Environmental Management Program Guidelines.

            •   Local zoning code.

            •   Indoor air quality criteria referenced in Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual.
                                                  2-12

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

            •   Location shall be large enough to accommodate the laboratory building and outbuildings
                (hazardous materials building) with adequate setbacks meeting local requirements and RCRA
                requirements.

            •   Laboratories preferably shall be located in light industrial areas where there are provisions for
                containing accidental spills prior to discharge to the local stormwater system and in areas that have
                fully staffed emergency response personnel (fire and medical), including hazardous materials
                (HAZMAT) teams.

            •   Laboratories shall not be located in residential areas or in mixed-occupancy high rise locations.

2.4.3.3          BUILDING LOCATION
                New buildings and building additions shall be located in accordance with the site development
                plan.

2.4.3.3.1        OPEN SPACE
                Open space shall be provided between structures to accommodate site security, landscaping, and
                other environmental considerations.  Sufficient access shall be provided around building exteriors
                to accommodate emergency vehicles, maintenance vehicles, and snow removal equipment.  In
                cold climates,  building entrances, stairs, and other pedestrian circulation features should not be
                placed along the north side of buildings or within shaded areas. Off-site drainage areas and the
                environmental impacts that proposed stormwater management practices will have on surrounding
                properties shall also be carefully reviewed.

2.4.3.3.2        CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
                The following conditions and requirements shall be considered during site selection for new
                buildings:

                •   Architectural and functional compatibility with the environment
                •   Operation and service function relationships
                •   Natural and humanistic orientation and wayfinding
                •   Natural topographic and geologic conditions
                •   Existing cultural and archaeological resources
                •   Historic sites
                •   Abandoned mines or wells and potential for subsidence
                •   Endemic plant and animal species
                •   Availability of existing utility services
                •   Building setback requirements
                •   Availability of existing road systems and public transportation
                •   Traffic volume
                •   Refuse handling and loading zone requirements
                •   Adequacy for parking, future expansion, and other land use requirements
                •   Health, safety, and environmental protection requirements
                •   Physical protection requirements
                •   Security and safeguard requirements
                •   Energy conservation requirements
                •   Indoor air quality impacts  (e.g., presence of radon in foundation soils)
                •   Impact of site selection
                •   Minimum fire separation between buildings (in accordance with National Fire Protection
                    Association [NFPA]  80A)
                •   Utilities.


                                                   2-13

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                      Section 2-Site Work

2.4.3.4      HAZARD SEGREGATION
            In general, occupancies posing different levels of risk shall be separated by fire-resistive construction.
            Areas shall be segregated as noted below and as required by local building codes and NFPA 101.

2.4.3.4.1    PARKING STRUCTURES
            The construction, protection, and control of hazards in parking structures shall comply with the
            requirements of NFPA 88A. Parking garages located within buildings that contain other occupancies
            shall be separated from the remainder of the building by construction that has a fire resistance of at
            least 2 hours. Entrances between garages and elevators shall be protected by a vestibule having a VA-
            hour, Class B or higher fire door. Doorways between garages and stairs, building corridors, or other
            non-garage areas shall be protected by 1 '/2-hour, Class B or higher fire doors. The  garage ventilation
            system must be designed as a separate entity from the main building and from the occupied spaces,
            with the exhaust from the garage directed outside. No recirculation of air is allowed in garages. In
            garages located under buildings, elevator vestibules shall be positively pressurized to prevent garage
            vapors from entering the occupied areas.

2.4.3.5      BUFFER ZONES
            The buffer zone between the EPA facility and other existing or potential sites for building(s) shall be
            no less than 100 feet. Hazardous materials storage facilities (HMSF) shall be at least 50 feet away
            from any building or potential sites for building(s).  Both the main facility and the HMSF shall be
            located at least 50 feet away from the property line. Existing highways and streets can be part of the
            100-foot buffer zone. Paved parking area(s) for vehicles can be considered as part of the building
            buffer zone.

2.4.4        SITE PREPARATION
            Local topography shall be considered during project and facility design. New facilities shall be
            planned to fit the local topography and to require a minimum amount of grading. Design shall include
            provisions for erosion control and soil stabilization in ditches, fill slopes, embankments, and denuded
            areas, and restoration of areas disturbed by the project.  Restoration shall be  to original or improved
            conditions.

2.4.4.1      DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
            Site preparation design shall meet the following criteria:

            •   Vehicle parking, sidewalks, and road requirements shall comply with subsection 2.6 of this
                Manual

            •   Site drainage design shall comply with subsection 2.7 of this Manual

            •   Site power and lighting shall comply with Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.

            •   Site security requirements shall be taken into account and provided for in accordance with criteria
                established by the appropriate EPA authority.

2.4.5        DEWATERING
            The design, installation, and operation of dewatering systems for groundwater control shall be the
            responsibility of the construction contractor, unless otherwise stipulated in the contract. The
            groundwater investigation and the selection and design of a dewatering control system shall comply
            with TM 5-818-5 and consider recharge beds and retention basins. The design engineer shall
            determine whether the assistance of a qualified groundwater hydrologist shall be required.
                                                   2-14

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

2.4.6        SHORING AND UNDERPINNING
            All shoring and underpinning shall comply with the safety requirements of CFR Part 1926, Subpart P.
            Remedial underpinning shall be performed where existing foundations are inadequate.  Precautionary
            underpinning shall be performed where new construction adjacent to an existing structure requires
            deeper excavation. A structural engineer specializing in underpinning shall perform any underpinning
            design, which shall comply with the principles in Winterkorn and Fang, Foundation Engineering
            Handbook.

2.4.7        EARTHWORK
            Earthwork includes excavation, filling, stabilizing, and compaction of earth at the site. Earthwork also
            includes the addition of borrow and the disposal of excavated material.  The earthwork design shall
            incorporate the findings of the geotechnical report required by subsection 2.3.3 of this Manual.

2.4.8        WATERFRONT CONSTRUCTION
            Waterfront construction includes seawalls, docks, marinas, and other ancillary boating facilities
            associated with coastal development. This type of construction for EPA facilities shall comply with
            applicable federal, state, and local standards and with practices approved by the appropriate EPA
            authority.

2.5         Landscaping and Site-Related Requirements

2.5.1        GENERAL
            Landscape planning, design, and development must be integrated with building massing, design, and
            materials. The landscaping design process must coincide with the building design process to create a
            single design that integrates site and buildings(s).  The use of durable exterior materials that enhance
            both the site landscaping and the building design and help to integrate the two design disciplines is
            strongly encouraged.

            If the facility  is to be a part of an existing campus or among other buildings in a master-planned
            development, the landscape design as well as the building design must be integrated and compatible
            with the style(s) of the previously constructed permanent facilities on campus.  The existing physical
            features of the site and surrounding buildings shall be observed and documented.

                •   The landscaping of the site shall create an environmentally  sensitive and aesthetically
                    attractive design.  The natural environment should blend with the proposed new construction.

                •   Landscaped courts and open spaces that are accessible to all staff are encouraged.

                •   Grass-covered areas away from public view shall be provided and equipped as outside eating
                    and visiting areas (with picnic tables, benches, and landscape furnishings).

                •   The facility surroundings shall be landscaped with trees, shrubs, flowering plants, and grass in
                    a way that will enhance the aesthetic character of the building(s) and hide or screen exposed
                    equipment and building parts, features, or functions that, by their nature, are not aesthetically
                    pleasant. Vegetation may be used to screen, or form a barrier to, particulate matter and to
                    protect the building(s) from motor vehicle pollutant sources.

            Using trees and vegetation to shade large hardscape areas, such as parking lots and summer sun
            building exposures, is encouraged.

                •   The topography of the site around the building(s) shall slope away from the building(s) and
                    away from neighboring building(s) to direct any water away from the new facility and from
                    any neighboring building(s).

                                                   2-15

-------
July 2006                                                             Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Section 2-Site Work
                •   Xeriscape design practices (use of sustainable local/regional vegetation requiring minimal
                    watering) shall be used to minimize maintenance of the plantings.  Use of irrigated turf grass
                    in new landscape design shall be prohibited.

                •   In general, low-maintenance landscape design and features shall be used. High efficiency
                    irrigation, and/or the use of captured rainwater is encouraged where irrigation is necessary.

                •   Energy efficient exterior lighting with low-voltage or solar powered is encouraged. Section
                    104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming
                    products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See
                    section 1.0 of Addendum  1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient
                    lighting.


2.5.2        PROFESSIONAL QUALIFICATIONS FOR SITE DESIGN
            All site landscaping shall be designed by a state-registered landscape architect. This landscape
            architect must maintain his or her registration continuously and without break for at  least the entire
            design and construction process and for the life of the design contract for the project.

                •   All site landscaping shall be installed and/or modified by a professional landscaper or
                    professional gardener. All landscaping (plants and grass), except for annuals, if used, shall be
                    guaranteed for  16 months after acceptance by EPA.

                •   All costs for the landscaping shall be anticipated in the final cost estimate.  These costs shall
                    be included in the overall costs  of the project. Such costs shall include, but shall not be
                    limited to, the following:

                        Retaining curbs and walls
                        Plantings and grasses
                        Exterior signage and graphics
                        Site furniture and furnishings
                        Irrigation
                        Site hardscape and special pavings
                        Warranties and guarantees
                        Exterior screens and barriers
                        Specialty features incorporated into the design
                        Maintenance guarantees
                        Site lighting
                        Site sculpture

2.5.3        GENERAL SITE REQUIREMENTS
            All landscaping and site amenities for the proposed development shall be in accordance with all
            applicable local, state, and federal codes and industry standards. Also, landscaping and site amenities
            shall comply with any master plan or campus design require ments and all construction requirements
            and standards.  The more stringent requirements shall be used  if a conflict exists.

2.5.3.1      EXISTING CONDITIONS
            The landscape architect  shall (1) preserve existing trees and undergrowth, where appropriate, for
            buffers; (2) review buffer requirements of the local community; and (3) use existing trees to the extent
            possible, since the larger size will provide greater immediate impact on-site.

2.5.3.2      PLANTINGS

                                                   2-16

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

            Guidelines on plantings are as follows:

            •   Establish functional design criteria.
            •   Consider focal or entry area; design main entry area to produce an obvious sense of arrival at
                facility
            •   Create views or screen views as needed.
            •   Develop color and seasonal interest.
            •   Provide orientation (e.g., with respect to sun and wind) for facility and creation of shade.
            •   Consider ultimate size and scale relative to specific area or site size.
            •   Consider site-appropriate formal planting plan or informal, naturalistic plan.
            •   Avoid major plantings in areas where expansion is planned.
            •   Provide appropriate location of plantings relative to prevailing wind and sun.
            •   Break up large areas of pavement with landscape islands.
            •   Choose local/regional plants and design plantings to be tolerant of climate, weather conditions,
                rainfall, and other environmental conditions.
            •   Determine irrigation requirements.
            •   Determine maintenance requirements such as fertilization rates, soil acidity, and, if required,
                pruning and trimming needs.
            •   Coordinate plantings with location of signs, light standards, hydrants, underground utilities, and
                other man-made structures.
            •   Ensure that lawns slope to provide proper drainage (minimum 1 percent grade).
            •   Provide ground cover on severe slopes for aesthetic and maintenance considerations.
            •   Planting must be reviewed  and approved by the appropriate EPA personnel. The landscaping plan
                shall identify the names, caliper sizes, and number of trees, shrubs, and all other plantings in the
                plan.

2.5.3.3      SITE FURNITURE AND FURNISHINGS
            Guidelines for choosing and locating site furniture and furnishings are as follows:

            •   Select furniture design to complement the building theme
            •   Use materials with recycled content as designated in the  CPG, with  an emphasis on sustainability
                and longevity
            •   Determine quantity and location of furniture
            •   Establish function intended for seating and waiting areas, outdoor meeting areas, and eating areas
            •   Determine flag pole heights, location, and quantity and integrate into the design
            •   Locate fences and identify their style, color, and purpose
            •   Integrate trash and recycling receptacles, cigarette urns, newspaper dispenser boxes, and
                mailboxes into the design
            •   Include safety review of proposed surfaces, equipment, and layout of programmed recreational
                and playground equipment.

2.5.3.4      SITE LIGHTING
            The following guidelines apply  to site lighting:

            •   Design lighting to complement the architectural and land planning theme and to accord with any
                current master plan or campus requirements.

            •   Utilize energy-efficient and easily maintainable fixture types (the selection of lighting fixtures
                must consider long-term costs).

            •   Heights of lighting  standards must be appropriate to the scale of the building and the area being lit.

                                                   2-17

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                      Section 2-Site Work

            •   Provide lighting intensity that is commensurate with the use of the area and the health and safety
                of employees and other persons accessing the building during non-daylight hours.

            •   Control light with respect to adjacent property and to minimize glare, striving for zero direct beam
                illumination leaving the building site.

            •   Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming
                products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See
                section 1.0 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient lighting.


2.5.3.5      EXTERIOR SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS
            Considerations with respect to exterior signage are:

            •   Appropriate scale
            •   Viewing angle and speed of observer
            •   Appropriate color and letter style and clarity of message
            •   Appropriate locations for signage, including intersections, parking lots, and entries
            •   Design that complements the building style, accent color, or building color
            •   Clear identification of functions: traffic direction, orientation, and general information
            •   Coordination of building identification at site entries with that on the buildings themselves;
                identification should be strong, legible, and compatible with interior signage and graphics
            •   Compliance with signage ordinances (such compliance  is required)
            •   Providing special identification for the project, if required
            •   Signage must be reviewed and approved by appropriate EPA personnel
            •   Designing exterior signage to allow future removal and change without damage to existing
                exterior materials and to allow possible reuse of the signage after its removal and/or reuse of the
                lettering of the removed  signage.

2.5.3.6      OUTSIDE SERVICE AND UTILITY AREAS
            Many elements are necessary for the proper operation of a building.  Some are visually undesirable and
            require proper planning for screening and buffering, which should be incorporated into the building
            design. The design professional is responsible for coordinating the work of all disciplines and for
            identifying all  elements of the proposed project that will have a visual impact.  The following are
            among the items that may require appropriate screening and buffering:

            •   Meters
            •   Vaults
            •   Transformers
            •   Dumpsters
            •   Recycling containers
            •   Compactor units
            •   Emergency generators
            •   High pressure gas cylinder storage and manifold systems
            •   Pressure reducers
            •   Valves
            •   Pump hoses
            •   Outdoor storage areas
            •   Loading docks
            •   Mechanical equipment
            •   Compressors and cooling towers.

                                                  2-18

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 2-Site Work
2.5.4        HARDSCAPE REQUIREMENTS
            Hardscape (paving) and hardscape materials shall be integrated with the building and architectural
            planning and with landscaping design and concept. In general, materials that soften typical hardscape
            (paving) designs shall be used.  Light colored, high albedo, hardscape materials shall be considered to
            reduce the absorption and radiation of heat.  Use of porous pavement materials is encouraged where
            feasible. Appropriate materialusage shall be integrated with an understanding of project budget and
            public versus restricted access and use areas.

2.5.5        RECREATIONAL REQUIREMENTS
            Recreational site requirements shall be reviewed with EPA on a project-by-project basis.

2.5.6        IRRIGATION
            Water efficient irrigation methods, such as drip irrigation systems and low-flow bubblers, shall be
            utilized where  supplemental moisture is required.  All irrigation systems shall be equipped with
            automatic controllers that activate the system according to a desired frequency and duration, and shall
            be equipped with rain or soil moisture sensors that will prevent irrigation during periods of rainfall or
            when there is sufficient moisture in the ground for plant health and survival. Use of reclaimed water
            and/or stormwater for landscape irrigation is acceptable and encouraged.


2.6         Vehicle and Pedestrian  Movement

2.6.1        ACCESS AND CIRCULATION
            Although visual and other aesthetic aspects  of access to the project site, and thus to the project
            facilities, are critical, the primary  access requirements involve fire and life safety. The most current
            version of the Safety Manual shall be reviewed for these guidelines. Either traffic data will be
            provided or a traffic impact analysis will be  performed. Geometric design of all roads, streets, access
            drives, and parking areas shall comply with American Association of State Highway and
            Transportation Officials (AASHTO) GDHS-84. Gradients for roads, streets, and access drives also
            shall comply with AASHTO GDHS-84. Road and street grade changes in excess of 1 percent shall be
            accomplished by means of vertical curves.  The length of vertical curves shall be determined in
            accordance with AASHTO GDHS-84. Roadway centerline gradient profiles shall be shown for
            vertical control.

        •   Design and details of construction of flexible and rigid pavements shall comply with the local state
            highway department standards.  Concrete valley gutters may be provided if swales with flexible
            pavements are necessary. Joint layout plans and details shall be provided for all rigid pavements. A
            thickened edge shall be used along edges of rigid pavement where future construction will occur.

        •   Design should promote logical wayfinding.

        •   Signs, pavement markings, channelization, and other traffic control measures shall comply with the
            requirements of the U. S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Manual of Uniform Traffic Control
            Devices.

2.6.1.1      FIRE DEPARTMENT APPARATUS ACCESS
            Fire department access involves fire department apparatus and on-site fixed fire safety equipment (e.g..
            fire hydrants, fire loops, fire pumps, post-indicator valves, automatic sprinkler and standpipe system
            connections), vehicular circulation, pedestrian circulation, and parking. Local codes, ordinances and
            fire department requirements must be reviewed to provide adequate access.  The following minimum
            requirements shall be met:


                                                  2-19

-------
July 2006                                                             Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Section 2-Site Work

            •   All new buildings shall have at least two sides readily accessible to fire department apparatus at all
                times.

            •   Fire lanes shall be provided for buildings that are set back more than 150 feet from a road or that
                exceed 30 feet in height and are set back more than 50 feet from a road.

            •   Fire lanes shall be at least 20 feet wide, and the road edge closest to the building shall be at least
                10 feet from the building.

            •   The minimum roadway turning radius shall conform to a 48-foot semitrailer template.

            •   Fire lanes shall be constructed of an all-weather driving surface capable of supporting imposed
                loads of 25 tons.  If appropriate for the area and climate, these lanes may consist of compacted
                earth with top soil and seed.

            •   Any dead-end road more than  300  feet long shall be provided with a turnaround at the closed end
                of at least 90 feet in diameter.

            •   Fire lanes and access areas for fire  hydrants and automatic sprinkler or standpipe connections shall
                be clearly identified by painting the curbs yellow, with black lettering reading "NO PARKING -
                FIRE LANE" spaced at 40-foot intervals. In addition, signage carrying the same message shall be
                posted at 100-foot intervals along the restricted  area.

2.6.1.2      VEHICULAR CIRCULATION
            Vehicular circulation design shall comply with the following requirements and guidelines:

            •   Vehicular circulation shall be designed in accordance with code requirements and any overall
                campus master plan or facilities master plan philosophy in effect at the subject site.  Circulation
                shall respect the pedestrian circulation environment of the campus and/or facilities and provide for
                safe movement of vehicles and pedestrians. Existing traffic studies shall be evaluated and
                coordinated in order to implement the best possible overall circulation system.

            •   Vehicular access to a new project shall be evaluated with respect to existing and planned site
                circulation and shall provide for clear separation of staff, visitor, service, and bus vehicular
                circulation.

            •   Adequate emergency vehicle access shall be provided to all points on the building periphery by
                use of proper grades, surface materials, clearances, and other design features.

            •   Entrances to the facility or campus shall be clearly marked and located so that access to each
                building, parking area, group of buildings, and service area is convenient and recognizable.

            •   The siting of new buildings shall take into account the requirements of future expansion, design of
                buildings, roads,  and surface and structured parking.

            •   Site vehicular design shall provide adequate space for queuing at drop-offs and exit drives for
                visitors, buses, 18-wheel vehicles,  taxis, and other vehicle types, keeping turning conflicts to a
                minimum and permitting proper  service vehicle maneuvering and staging.

            •   Internal drive aisle widths and turning radii shall be designed to allow for the expected service and
                emergency vehicles.


                                                   2-20

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

            •   Loop circulation is encouraged to minimize site traffic backup.

2.6.2        PARKING AND LOADING FACILITIES
            Parking areas should not be located in front of buildings or at visually prominent locations along routes
            of approach. Landscaping, grading, and location shall emphasize attractive features and de-emphasize
            or obscure undesirable features. Parking and its related circulation shall be separated from the service
            circulation to minimize conflicts.  Parking lots shall meet local governmental standards for circulation,
            layout, and safety. Handicapped parking allocations shall comply with ADA guidelines. Perimeter
            concrete curbs and gutters shall be considered for all parking areas and access drives in built-up areas.
            In remote or little-used areas, concrete curbs and gutters shall be used only when required to control
            drainage. Removable prefabricated concrete wheel stops may be used where appropriate.  Specific
            parking design guidelines are presented in the following subsection.

2.6.2.1      PARKING DESIGN
            Parking for the proposed development shall be based on applicable codes for occupancy, local zoning
            requirements, and any campus or facility master plan in effect at the subject site. If the parking
            required by  codes falls under 25 cars per 10,000 gross square feet of the facility, a more detailed
            analysis shall be made to verify that adequate parking is provided. If local codes require more parking
            spaces, the more stringent requirements shall apply.  As part of the site development phase, multilevel
            parking garages or below-ground parking shall be considered as an alternative to surface parking. At a
            minimum, the following guidelines shall be followed:

            •   Distribution of total parking (e.g., employee [by type], police, emergency vehicle, visitor,
                handicapped, motorcycle, bicycle) shall be calculated and clearly shown in the site development
                phase.  The minimum size for standard passenger car stalls shall be 9 feet x 19 feet.  Up to 15
                percent of the parking may be designated for compact cars. Stalls for compact cars shall be at
                least 8 feet x 18 feet.  Car-pool policies should be considered in the calculation (and given
                preferential locations.)

            •   The structural design for pavement on surface lots shall comply with local state highway
                department standards for general parking areas.

            •   Parking aisles and lots subject to frequent truck traffic shall be evaluated to determine whether
                thicker  pavement sections are required.

            •   Design  calculations shall provide for a potential growth in staff of 10 percent. Provision shall also
                be made for expansion of the  facility, with the design for future parking expansion shown.

            •   Alternate fuel refueling  station should be considered on a facility-by-facility basis.

        Parking areas must be clearly related to entry points.  Walking distances should be kept to a minimum.

            •   Handicapped parking spaces  shall be provided in accordance with ADA requirements or the
                requirements of state codes and ordinances  if these are more restrictive.

            •   Sufficient slope (1 percent minimum) shall be provided for positive drainage for runoff.  Slopes
                shall be no more than 4 percent.

            •   Sufficient open lawn area shall be allowed adjacent to parking lots for snow storage, as required
                by climate and area.

            •   Wherever possible, 90-degree parking design should be used.


                                                   2-21

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                      Section 2-Site Work

            •   Porous paving and/or recharge beds under parking should be considered, retaining the maximum
                amount of on-site storm drainage.

            •   Surface drainage in parking areas must not cross designated pedestrian paths.

            •   Dead-end parking bays are not allowed.

            •   Existing large trees should be integrated into new parking areas, where feasible.

            •   Except in remote or little -used areas, parking areas should provide curbs (consistent with site
                design) with a minimum 2-foot overhang behind the curb.

2.6.2.2      BICYCLE FACILITIES
            Convenient bicycle parking facilities shall be included at all facilities, except those in remote areas.
            Suitable means for securing the bikes must be provided, sheltered/covered areas are encouraged. The
            capacity should be based on local conditions but a minimum capacity  of 5% of the buildings's
            occupants is suggested, which is commensurate with LEED™ requirements.

2.6.3        PEDESTRIAN ACCESS
            A functional system of walks connecting structures, operational areas, parking areas, streets, and other
            access paths shall be provided to meet the demands of pedestrian traffic. The location and width of
            these areas and paths shall be determined in accordance with the site development plan. Walks subject
            to use by the physically disabled shall comply with current ADA guidelines.  Specific guidelines for
            the design of pedestrian walkways are prescribed in the following subsection.

2.6.3.1      DESIGN OF PEDESTRIAN WALKWAYS
            Pedestrian circulation shall be designed in accordance with industry standards, code requirements, and
            any overall campus master plan philosophy in effect at the subject site.

            •   Pedestrian walks shall have a minimum of 1 percent cross pitch for drainage.

            •   The width of walks shall be a function of pedestrian traffic volumes determined by the master plan
                and/or by specific project requirements.

            •   Walks shall accommodate handicapped persons.  Slopes, landings, and access points shall be in
                accordance with ADA requirements  as well as with the most stringent applicable code or
                combination of codes applicable to the project.

            •   Crosswalks from parking, bus stops, and other buildings shall be clearly painted and properly
                assigned.

            •   Walkway paths shall be designed in response to the expected-origin/destination analysis of the site
                and its users.

            •   Drop curbs shall be used to provide transition for handicapped persons at crosswalks, drop-off
                zones, and ends of walkways.

2.6.4        AIRPORTS AND HELIPORTS
            This subsection provides general guidelines for design of aviation facilities and indicates requirements
            and conditions that must be considered in designing and assessing such facilities.

2.6.4.1      GENERAL

                                                  2-22

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                              July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

            Planning and design of aviation facilities and airspace clearances shall comply with Federal Aviation
            Administration (FAA) AC 150/5050-5.  Planning and design of aviation facilities shall emphasize
            safety for all modes of aircraft operations. Aircraft installations require permanent unobstructed
            airspace, and facilities and equipment constructed to facilitate maintenance, ground handling, and
            flight operations.

            •    Landing and takeoff paths (traffic patterns) shall be oriented to avoid need for critical-facility
                 overflights. Traffic patterns and altitudes shall be established and published to provide for aircraft
                 approaches that are away from critical facilities.

            •    Heliports shall be sited, and traffic patterns established, so that normal operation does not require
                 overflights of critical facilities. Heliports shall not be located closer to critical facilities than 2
                 times the dimension of the landing pad or 3 times the rotor diameter of the largest helicopter
                 authorized to land at the heliport.

2.6.4.2      SITE CONSIDERATIONS
            The following site conditions shall be taken into account in determining the adequacy of the aviation
            facility:

            •    Topography
            •    Vegetation and existing construction
            •    Weather elements
            •    Prevailing wind direction in summer and winter
            •    Soil conditions
            •    Flood hazards
            •    Natural and man-made obstructions
            •    Adjacent land uses
            •    Availability of usable airspace
            •    Accessibility of usable roads
            •    Location of site utilities
            •    Accommodation of future expansion
            •    Aboveground utilities.

2.6.4.3      DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
            The layout of airfield facilities shall support operational efficiency and provide safe conditions for
            takeoff and landing operations and for ground handling of aircraft.

            •    Airfield safely clearances shall comply with the clearance criteria of FAA AC 150/5300.  The
                 critical-decision-point and emergency landing areas for the various aircraft using a facility shall be
                 determined on the basis of the respective aircraft performance charts.

            •    All other applicable design elements shall conform to the most current FAA criteria.

            •    In accordance with FAA AC 150/5070-6A, airfield layout shall also consider:

                     Wind direction and velocity analyzed
                     A taxiway system
                     Parking aprons
                     Supporting facilities.
                                                    2-23

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                     Section 2-Site Work

2.7        Stormwater Management

2.7.1        STREET DRAINAGE
            Street drainage in developed areas shall be conveyed within the roadway cross section. Curb inlets
            shall be used to divert storm flows to surface and subsurface stormwater conveyance systems. Curb
            inlets shall not be located within curb returns or in areas of heavy pedestrian traffic. Pedestrian and
            cyclist safety shall be considered during selection of storm inlet grates. Curb gaps shall be used where
            roadside drainage swales exist. Wherever possible, curb openings with inlets located in grassed areas
            should be utilized in lieu of curb inlets.

            In locations where uninterrupted vehicular access is essential to critical operational activities, roadway
            cross sections shall be designed to convey runoff from the 25-year, 6-hour storm so that one driving
            lane width (12 feet) is free of flowing or standing water. Lower classification roadways shall be
            designed to convey runoff from the 10-year, 6-hour storm.  Stormwater management systems shall
            have sufficient capacity to ensure that runoff from the 100-year, 6-hour design storm will not exceed a
            depth of 10'/z inches at any point within the street right-of-way or extend more than 21A inches above
            the top of the curb in urban streets. Inverted crown roadway cross sections shall not be used unless
            approved by EPA.

2.7.2        WATERSHED DEVELOPMENT
            Site development plans shall be developed with careful review of the impact the plan will have on the
            watershed. Appropriate stormwater management strategies shall be developed to minimize or eliminate
            adverse effects on existing and future development within the watershed.

2.7.3        EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
            Erosion and sedimentation control measures, in accordance with federal, state, and local standards,
            shall be used during construction. The site should be properly graded and planted to minimize erosion.

2.7.4        STORMWATER RETENTION AND DETENTION
            Site development plans shall incorporate appropriate stormwater retention/detention facilities into the
            storm drainage system. These facilities must be designed in strict accordance with all applicable
            federal, state, and local requirements. Consider a further decrease in the rate and quantity of storm
            water run-off as an environmental design strategy.

2.7.4.1      ROOF RECOVERY, CISTERN
            Designers shall consider the use of cisterns to capture roof drainage for on-site use. Cistern design
            should match the expected quantities of recoverable rainfall to planned use, such as toilet flushing,
            irrigation, or cooling tower make-up. Cistern location should accommodate the configuration of the
            rainwater collection system, provide convenient access for planned water use,  and fit within the
            aesthetics of the building architecture and building landscape plan. Section 104 of the Energy Policy
            Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure
            either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 6.2 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's
            purchasing specifications for energy  efficient roof products.

2.7.4.2      DISTRIBUTED STORMWATER MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES
            To the maximum extent practical, implement distributed stormwater management techniques to
            minimize the hydrologic effects of development. Distributed management techniques (or integrated
            management practices) that should be considered include:

            •   Bioretention facilitie s
            •   Dry wells
            •   Filter/buffer strips and other multifunctional landscape areas
            •   Grassed swales, bioretention swales, and wet swales
                                                  2-24

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

            •   Infiltration trenches.

2.7.4.3      REDUCE/MINIMIZE TOTAL IMPERVIOUS AREA
            Careful consideration should be applied during site lay-out to minimize the total footprint of
            impervious land use required for roadways, sidewalks, driveways, and parking areas. Where ever
            practical, porous paving materials shall be used as substitutes for impervious surfaces. Ultimate
            material selection shall be based on permeability, durability under design traffic load, maintainability
            and cost effectiveness.

2.7.5        CONVEYANCE
            Subsurface and open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall meet the following requirements.

2.7.5.1      STORM SEWERS
            Subsurface drainage systems shall be sized to accommodate runoff from the 10-year, 6-hour storm and
            shall be sized for a greater storm in locations where there is substantial risk to critical facilities and
            operations. Subsurface system designs shall meet sediment transport requirements. Storm sewers
            shall be designed to maintain a minimum scour velocity of 2 feet per second. New storm sewers shall
            be sized for open channel flow. The minimum storm sewer size shall be 15 inches. The minimum
            culvert size shall be 15 inches. For roof drain systems, the minimum pipe size for laterals and
            collectors shall be 6 inches.  Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when
            procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-
            designated products. See section 6.2 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for
            energy efficient roof products.

2.7.5.2      OPEN CHANNELS
            Open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be sized to accommodate the 10-year, 6-hour
            design flow with a minimum freeboard and shall be sized for a greater storm in locations where there is
            substantial risk to critical facilities and operations.

            Open channel stormwater conveyance systems shall be designed for minimum maintenance. The
            potential for scour or deposition within earth-lined channels shall be considered before approval by
            the appropriate EPA authority. Preference for earth-lined or "armored" channels shall be based on a
            comparison of capital, maintenance, and operation costs. Inlets to open channel stormwater
            conveyance systems shall be placed at locations where erosion potential is minimal.

2.7.6        STORMWATER QUALITY
            Site development shall incorporate quality control measures that reduce the concentration of pollutants
            in stormwater prior to discharge into receiving waters. Construction sites that disturb one acre or more
            may be required to obtain a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit,
            including developing a site pollution prevention plan. See Chapter 3 of Volume 4 of the EPA
            Facilities Manual, Environmental Management Guidelines.

2.7.7        FLOODPLAIN AND WETLANDS DEVELOPMENT
            Development, modification, or occupancy of floodplains and wetlands should be avoided, particularly
            when practical alternatives exist. To the extent possible, EPA shall meet the requirements of
            Executive Orders 11988 and 11990. EPA shall:

            •   Avoid, to the extent possible, the long-term and short-term adverse impacts associated with the
                destruction of wetlands and the occupancy and modification of floodplains and wetlands, and
                avoid direct and indirect support of floodplain and wetlands development wherever there is a
                practicable alternative for new development.
                                                  2-25

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                     Section 2-Site Work

            •   Incorporate floodplain management goals and wetland protection considerations into its planning,
                regulation, and decision making.

            •   Carefully consider the potential impacts of any EPA action in a floodplain and the impacts of any
                new EPA construction in wetlands not located in a floodplain.

            •   Identify, consider, and, as appropriate, implement alternative actions to avoid or mitigate adverse
                impacts on floodplains and wetlands.

            •   Provide opportunity for early public review of any plans or proposals for actions in floodplains or
                new construction in wetlands.

            •   Ensure that construction within floodplains or wetlands complies with 10 CFR Part 1022 and
                NEPA and implementing regulations.

2.7.8        COASTAL DEVELOPMENT
            The development of site boating, docking, and seawall facilities shall conform to all federal, state, and
            local requirements. Development should not allow any dredging and fill dumping at waters edge.


2.8        Utilities and Support Services

2.8.1        WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
            This subsection applies to water distribution systems for domestic (potable) and industrial (nonpotable)
            uses.  The use of dual water systems (i.e., domestic and industrial or irrigation) is subject to the
            approval of the appropriate EPA facilities engineering  group. Where use of dual water systems is
            approved, the location and alignment of such systems must be clearly identified by location markers
            placed throughout the site at intervals specified by the appropriate EPA facilities engineering group.
            Both systems must also be clearly identified on the record drawings.

            •   Cross connections between domestic and industrial or irrigation systems are prohibited. Domestic
                water conveyed within distribution systems that serve EPA facilities shall comply with the
                applicable Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) requirements; 40 CFR Parts 141-142; and all other
                applicable state, regional, and local requirements.  The quality of domestic water within such
                distribution systems shall be protected from degradation by installation of reduced-pressure
                principal assembly backflow preventers to prevent backflow of contaminants or pollutants into the
                system.

            •   Drinking water in newly constructed facilities must be tested to ascertain compliance with the
                National Primary Drinking Water Regulations and be tested for lead and copper to insure they do
                not exceed drinking water action levels.  See Chapter 3 of Volume 4 of the EPA Facilities
                Manual, Environmental Management Guidelines.

            •   Backflow prevention devices shall be installed in accordance with the National Plumbing Code.
                Only devices approved by the Foundation for Cross-Connection Control  and Hydraulic Research
                shall be used. (Refer toManual of Cross-Connection Control  [9th Edition].)

2.8.1.1      PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
            The following considerations shall be incorporated into the project planning.

            •   During route selection and initial planning for water distribution systems, the following conditions
                and requirements shall be considered:

                                                 2-26

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 2-Site Work
                    Projections concerning future population and development
                    Anticipated average daily flow for fully developed conditions
                    Anticipated peak flows for domestic, industrial, fire, and special water usage
                    Hydraulic design criteria
                    Health and safety requirements
                    Physical constraints (e.g., utility corridors and topographic features)
                    Energy conservation and environmental constraints.

            •   Distribution system layouts shall be as simple and direct as possible. Where feasible, initial
                planning efforts shall optimize system layouts (e.g., system loop lines) in order to:

                    Facilitate future system expansion
                    Strengthen fire protection capabilities
                    Minimize conflicts with other utilities
                    Reduce maintenance requirements.

            •   Water distribution systems shall be included within the utility master plan.

2.8.1.2      SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
            Domestic water distribution mains shall be sized to accommodate the greatest anticipated demand
            (e.g., fire  demand, special requirements, or the peak domestic demand).  Domestic water distribution
            systems shall be designed to deliver a peak domestic flow of 21A times the average daily demand, plus
            any special demands, at a minimumresidual pressure of 20 pounds per square inch (psi)  at ground
            elevation  (or higher pressure residual pressure if special conditions warrant).

            •   Domestic water distribution systems that also serve fire protection requirements shall be designed
                to satisfy fire flow requirements plus 50 percent of the average domestic requirements plus any
                industrial or process demands that cannot be reduced during a fire.

            •   Each fire hydrant within the distribution system must be capable of delivering 1,000 gallons per
                minute (gpm) at a minimum residual pressure of 20 psi. Where domestic water distribution
                systems must serve internal fire protection systems (i.e., sprinklers or foamite systems), adequate
                residual pressures shall be maintained for proper operation of these systems. Fire hydrant
                branches (from main to hydrant) shall be not less than 6 inches in diameter and shall be no  longer
                than 300 feet. A gate valve shall be installed within each fire hydrant branch to facilitate
                maintenance. Fire hydrants shall be installed at maximum intervals of 400 feet and shall not be
                located more than 300 feet from the buildings to be protected. Each building shall be protected by
                at least two hydrants. All water mains supplying fire protection systems and fire hydrants shall be
                treated as fire mains and installed in accordance with NFPA 24.

            Water mains shall have a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi.  Water distribution systems shall be
            designed to maintain normal operating pressures of 40 psi to 100 psi (at ground level) in mains  and
            building service lines.  Where the gradient across the service area is such that multiple pressure zones
            are necessary to maintain the normal operating pressures, pressure-reducing valves shall be used to
            separate each pressure zone. Use of pressure relief and surge relief valves shall be considered,  as
            necessary, to preclude system damage from water hammer.

            •   Air release and vacuum breaker valves shall be installed, as required, at high points within  the
                distribution system and in long supply mains.

            •   Distribution system mains shall have a minimum depth of cover of 3 feet.  In cold climates, at
                roadway crossings in high traffic areas, and at railroad crossings, additional cover shall be

                                                   2-27

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                      Section 2-Site Work

                provided to prevent freezing. Building service lines shall be at least 1 inch in diameter.  Service
                lines that are less than 2 inches in diameter shall be connected to the distribution main by a
                corporation stop and a copper gooseneck, with a service stop below frost line. Service lines that
                are more than 2 inches in diameter shall be connected to the distribution main by a rigid
                connection and shall have a gate valve located below frost line. Risers from frost line to floorlines
                of buildings shall be adequately insulated. Water storage facilities shall  comply with NFPA 22.

            •   Soil and groundwater conditions (e.g., soil corrosivity) on the site shall be considered in the
                selection of pipe materials. Where ferrous pipe is installed within the distribution system,
                insulating couplings shall be installed to prevent galvanic corrosion.

2.8.1.3      WELLHEAD DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS FOR RESEARCH PURPOSES
            Where and when water must be provided for fish culture, on-site drilled wells shall be capable of
            producing a minimum of 20 gallons of water (of consistent quality) per minute unless otherwise
            required by the EPA project officer. The water must be of a suitable quality  for rearing and
            maintaining fish cultures. It must not be contaminated with pesticides, heavy metals, sulfides, silica, or
            chlorides. The anions should be those found in natural lakes or streams. Water quality parameters
            should be as follows:

            •   Dissolved oxygen:       > 6.0 milligrams per liter (mg/L)
            •   pH:                     7.2-8.5
            •   Hardness:                40-200 mg/L (as CaCO3)
            •   Alkalinity:              Slightly less than hardness
            •   Iron:                    < 1.0 mg/L
            •   Chlorides:               < 250 mg/L as chlorides and sulfates
            •   Sulfides:                < 2.0 micrograms per liter (ng/L) as undissociatedH^S.

            The well and pump shall be protected from the elements. Two 500-gallon water tanks shall be
            installed as reservoirs for water prior to distribution.

2.8.2        WASTEWATER COLLECTION SYSTEMS
            This subsection applies to sanitary wastewater collection systems (i.e., lift stations, force mains,
            collector sewers and interceptor sewers, and building sewers 5 feet beyond the  building foundation).
            The following elements shall be considered during wastewater system design:

            •   Grey water systems should be considered as an environmental design strategy

            •   Industrial wastewater and pollutants above the minimum concentrations specified by EPA shall be
                excluded from sanitary wastewater collection systems.

            •   Pretreatment systems (such as acid neutralization) shall be installed where required and shall meet
                EPA specifications and/or requirements of the publicly owned treatment works (POTW) and
                NPDES as applicable.

            •   Hydraulic design of wastewater collection systems shall comply with TM  5-814-1,  Sanitary and
                Industrial Wastewater Collection; Gravity Sewers and Appurtenances (March 1985), TM 5-814-2,
                Sanitary and Industrial Wastewater Collection - Pumping Stations and Force Mains (March 1985)
                and American Society of Civil  Engineers (ASCE) 37.  All wastewater collection systems shall be
                designed for gravity flow unless such systems are not economically feasible. Sewage lift stations
                and force mains shall not be used unless  approved by AEAMB.  Feasibility analyses and
                economic evaluations of the costs of lift stations and force mains for  construction, operation, and
                maintenance shall be prepared  and submitted to AEAMB for approval.  Sewers and force mains

                                                  2-28

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 2-Site Work

                shall be sized to accommodate the estimated daily maximum and minimum flow for the initial and
                final years of the design period.  These maximum and minimum flows shall be specified by the
                appropriate EPA authority in accordance with ASCE 37.

                    Velocities in gravity sewers and force mains shall not exceed 10 feet per second.
                    Gravity sewers shall be designed for a minimum velocity of 2 feet per second.
                    Force mains shall be designed for a minimum velocity of 3'/2 feet per second.
                    The minimum size pipe for a sanitary sewer between manholes is 8".
                    The minimum size pipe for the sanitary building connection is 6".
                    The minimum slopes for a 6"  sanitary sewer is 0.6%.
                    The minimum slope for an 8"  sanitary sewer is 0.4%.

            •   For the preliminary design, domestic water consumption rates shall be used to approximate
                wastewater flows.  For the final design, where possible, actual flow data from an adjacent service
                area similar to the service area under consideration shall be used to estimate wastewater
                discharges. In the absence of such data, metered water use, less the consumptive use (i.e., water
                withdrawal rate), can be used.

            •   Sewers and force mains shall have a minimum depth of cover of 2 feet. Additional cover shall be
                provided to prevent freezing in cold climates and at roadway crossings.  Sewer and force main
                trench widths shall be minimized; however, excavations, trenching, and shoring shall comply with
                29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart P. Pipe bedding specified by the pipe manufacturer shall be in place
                before sewers and force mains are installed.

            •   Sewers or force mains shall not be routed within 100 feet of any well or reservoir that serves as a
                potable water supply. In all instances where such horizontal separation cannot be maintained, the
                sewer or force main shall be ductile iron pipe. Where groundwater is near the surface, special
                precautions shall be taken to prevent sewer infiltration or exfiltration.

            •   The horizontal distance between the water pipe and a sewer or force main shall not be less than 10
                feet except where the bottom of the water line will be at least 12 inches above the top of the sewer
                pipe or force main, in which case the water pipe shall be laid at  least 6 feet (horizontally) from the
                sewer or force main.  Where water pipes cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe shall
                be fully encased in concrete for at least 10 feet each side of the crossing or, for this same distance,
                shall be made of pressure pipe, with no joint located within 3 feet horizontally of the crossing.
                Water lines shall, in all cases, cross above sewage force mains or inverted siphons and shall be at
                least 2 feet above the sewer main.  Joints in the sewer main that are within 3 feet (horizontally) of
                the crossing shall be encased in concrete.

            •   Where feasible, sewers and force mains shall not be routed under buildings or other permanent
                structures. Sewers and force mains shall be adjacent and parallel to paved roadways. Sewers and
                force mains shall not pass beneath paved roadways except at roadway crossings. Where feasible,
                utility cuts within existing roadways shall be perpendicular to the roadway centerline to minimize
                trench length. Diagonal roadway cuts shall be avoided whenever possible.  Consideration should
                be given to boring and j acking pipe or directional drilling for roadway crossings.

            •   The selection of sewer and force main material shall be based on wastewater characteristics and
                soil conditions.  Inverted siphons using high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe shall be used for
                sanitary sewer stream crossings. HDPE pipe placed below the stream bed shall be used for force
                main stream crossings. Ductile iron shall also be used for sewers placed at shallow depths (3' or
                less) under paved surfaces subject to vehicular traffic. Infiltration-exfiltration test requirements
                shall be specified within the contract documents.


                                                  2-29

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                    Section 2-Site Work

2.8.3        NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION S\STEMS
            Gas distribution shall comply with local codes and requirements. Fuel gas systems shall comply with
            NFPA 54.  Liquefied petroleum gas systems shall comply with NFPA 58.

2.8.4        ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
            Site power and lighting shall be coordinated as detailed in Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this
            Manual. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy
            consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See
            section 1.0 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient lighting.

2.8.5        TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
            Site communications shall be coordinated as detailed in Section 16.14 of this Manual.

2.8.6        SOLID WASTE COLLECTION SYSTEMS
            Management of hazardous waste shall comply with Subtitle C of RCRA (see EPA Facilities Manual,
            Volume 4).  Management of nonhazardous solid waste shall comply with Subtitle D of RCRA. In
            addition, each building should accommodate a nonhazardous waste recycling program, with areas for
            collection/separation convenient to each work area as well as a central recycling space for building-
            wide collection, separation, and storage. The recycling program should be planned for recycling paper,
            glass, plastics, metals, and toner cartridges.  Recycling bins conforming to EPA's standards shall be
            planned for and provided for relevant support spaces as indicate in Section 1  of this Manual.

            Building corridors, elevators, trash rooms, and/or loading docks shall accommodate collection hampers
            and containers for aggregating, moving, and temporarily storing recyclable materials. The loading
            dock shall accommodate the installation and operation of a compactor for mixed office paper and/or
            corrugated cardboard.


END OF SECTION 2
                                                 2-30

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                         July 2006
Section 3-Concrete

                                    Section  3 - Concrete

3.1     General Requirements

3.1.1    DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
        This section covers the design and construction of plain, reinforced, and prestressed concrete structures,
        whether of cast-in-place or precast concrete construction. The use of recycled materials in cast-in-place
        and precast applications is encouraged, to the extent permitted by state codes.  The requirements of this
        section shall be used in conjunction with the structural design sections.

3.1.2    CODES
        Concrete materials, design, and construction for buildings and other structures shall comply with American
        Concrete Institute (ACI) 318 and local building codes, as applicable.

3.1.3    USE  OF RECOVERED MATERIALS IN CONCRETE
        Use of coal fly ash, or any additives, in concrete shall be governed by  state building codes. Additives in
        floor slabs should be minimized to avoid interaction with adhesives or sealants. [Note: Testing for toxic
        contaminants should not be necessary if using materials covered under the CPG.]


3.2     Concrete Formwork
        Formwork for concrete construction shall comply with ACI 347R, ACI SP-4, and state building codes, as
        applicable.


3.3     Concrete Reinforcement

3.3.1    REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS
        Reinforcement materials for buildings and other incidental structures shall comply with state building
        codes and ACI 318, as applicable.

3.3.2    REINFORCEMENT DETAILS
        Reinforcement details shall comply with ACI SP-66, ACI 318, and state building codes, as applicable.


3.4     Cast-In-Place Concrete

3.4.1    GENERAL
        This subsection covers the selection of materials; proportioning of mixes; and mixing, placing, testing, and
        quality control of cast-in-place concrete.

3.4.2    MATERIALS, TESTING, AND QUALITY CONTROL
        Materials, testing, and quality control shall comply with ACI 318 and state building codes. Recycled non-
        hazardous materials and recovered materials as designed in the CPG shall be used in concrete mixes to the
        extent permitted by state building code.

3.4.3    TOLERANCES
        Tolerances shall be as recommended in ACI 347R, ACI  117, and state building code.
                                                 3-1

-------
July 2006                                                          Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                   Section 3 - Concrete

3.4.4    SELECTING PROPORTIONS FOR CONCRETE MIXES
        The proportions for concrete mixes of normal-weight concrete shall comply with state building code and
        ACI 211.1.  The proportions for structural lightweight concrete shall comply with state building code and
        ACI211.2.

3.4.5    MIXING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING
        Mixing, transporting, and placing shall comply with the recommendations of state building code and ACI
        304R.

3.4.6    CLIMATIC CONSIDERATIONS
        Hot-weather concreting shall comply with the recommendations of state building code and ACI 305R.
        Cold-weather concreting shall comply with the recommendations of state building code and ACI 306R.

3.4.7    POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
        In addition to the standards and resources referenced in other subsections, the Post-Tensioning Institute
        (PTI) Post-Tensioning Manual may be used for the design and construction of post-tensioned concrete
        structures.
3.5     Precast/Prestressed Concrete

3.5.1    STRUCTURAL
        This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of precast, precast and prestressed, and precast
        and post-tensioned structures. In addition to meeting the requirements of other subsections, precast
        concrete shall comply with the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Manual (PCI MNL)-116. PCI MNL-
        120 and the PTI Post-Tensioning Manual may also be used as guides for the design and construction of
        precast concrete structures.

3.5.2    ARCHITECTURAL
        This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of architectural precast, and architectural
        precast and prestressed, concrete members.  In addition to meeting the requirements of other subsections,
        architectural precast members shall comply with the PCI MNL-117 and PCI MNL-122.


3.6     Cementitious Decks for Buildings

3.6.1    GENERAL
        This subsection covers materials, design, and construction of cementitious decks for building structures and
        prefabricated floor and roof systems such as:

        •   Lightweight precast reinforced concrete planks
        •   Lightweight precast reinforced concrete channel slabs
        •   Reinforced gypsum planks
        •   Structural cement-fiber roof deck systems
        •   Reinforced poured-gypsum-over-formboard roof systems.

3.6.2    MATERIALS, DESIGN, AND CONSTRUCTION
        The materials, design, and construction of cementitious decks for buildings shall comply with the
        requirements of local building codes, manufacturer's recommendations, and CPG guidelines for recovered
        material content.  In the event of a conflict between the local building code and the manufacturer's
        recommendations, the more stringent shall apply.


                                                 3-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                         July 2006
Section 3-Concrete


3.7     Repair and Restoration of Concrete Structures
        This subsection covers the evaluation of damage or deterioration, selection of repair methods, surface
        preparation, and repair and restoration of concrete structures. The materials covered are Portland cement
        mortars and concretes, latex-modified Portland cement mortar, epoxy mortars, epoxy concrete, and methyl
        methacrylate concrete. Methods, procedures, and materials for the repair and restoration of concrete
        structures shall conply with the state building code and guidelines ACI 503.4 and ACI 546.1R.


3.8     Concrete Inspection and Testing
        Inspection and testing shall comply with the requirements of the state building code and ACI  318.


END OF SECTION 3
                                                 3-3

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 4- Masonry

                                     Section 4 - Masonry

4.1     General Requirements

4.1.1    DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
        This section covers the design and construction of masonry structures.  It shall apply to unit masonry
        construction; reinforced and un-reinforced masonry structures; structures using cement, clay, and stone
        products; and those including brick, block, and tile structures. The requirements of this subsection shall be
        used in conjunction with those in other sections and subsections.

4.1.2    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Materials, design, and construction of masonry structures shall comply with the requirements of the state
        building code.  Recycled non-hazardous materials shall be used to the extent practical and allowed by state
        building code.  Local sources shall be used to the extent practical. The following sources shall also be used
        as guides for the design of masonry structures: The publications are referred to in the text by basic
        designation only.

        •   American Concrete Institute (ACI) 53 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
        •   ACI  530.1 Specifications for Masonry Structures


4.2     Mortar and Grout

4.2.1    GENERAL
        Requirements for materials, mixing, strength, and specifications for mortar and grout used in masonry
        structures shall comply with state building codes.

4.2.2    MORTAR
        Mortar shall be designed to comply with:

        •   ASTM C  270 Mortar for Unit Masonry

4.2.2    MORTAR
        Mortar shall be designed per requirements of state code to perform the  following functions:

        •   Join masonry units into an integral structure.
        •   Create tight seals between masonry units to prevent the entry of air and moisture.
        •   Bond with steel joint reinforcement,  metal ties and anchor bolts, where used, so that they act
            integrally  with the masonry.
        •   Give exposed masonry surfaces a desired architectural quality through color contrasts or shadow line
            from various joint-tooling procedures.
        •   Compensate for size variations in the units by providing a bed to accommodate the different unit sizes.
        •   Portland cement mortar should be used for all structural brickwork.

4.2.3    GROUT
        Grout shall be used in reinforced load-bearing masonry construction to bond the masonry units and the
        reinforcing steel so that they act together to resist the imposed loads. It may also be used in un-reinforced
        load-bearing masonry construction to give it added strength.  Grout shall comply with:

        •   State building code, as applicable
        •   ASTM C  476 Grout for Masonry


                                                  4-1

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                     Section 4-Masonry

4.3     Unit Masonry
        Materials, design, and construction of masonry units shall be in accordance with the requirements in
        subsection 4.1, General Requirements and the following:

        •   Solid Clay or Shale Brick - ASTM C 62, Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or
            Shale)

        •   Hollow Clay or Shale Brick - ASTM C 652, Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay or
            Shale)

        •   Concrete Brick - ASTM C 55, Concrete Brick

        •   Hollow and solid concrete masonry units - ASTM C 90, Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units

        •   Prefaced concrete masonry units - ASTM C 744, Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry
            Units, using masonry units conforming to ASTM C 90

        •   Ceramic glazed structural clay facing units - ASTM C 126, Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing
            Tile, Facing Brine, and Solid Masonry Units


4.4     Masonry  Accessories
        Joint reinforcement, anchors, and ties shall be zinc-coated and shall comply with the following:

        •   State building code and as applicable
        •   ACI 530.1.
4.5     Masonry Inspection and Testing
        Inspection and testing of unit masonry, grout, mortar reinforcing, and accessories shall comply with the
        following:

        •   State building code and as applicable
        •   ACI 530.1

4.5.1    SPECIAL INSPECTION
        When the masonry compressive strength (f m) used in design is more than 1500 psi, a qualified
        independent masonry inspector approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative shall perform
        inspection of the masonry work.  Minimum qualifications for the masonry inspector shall be 5 years of
        reinforced masonry inspection experience or acceptance by a State, municipality, or other governmental
        body having a program of examining and certifying inspectors for reinforced masonry construction.  The
        masonry inspector shall be present during preparation of masonry prisms, sampling and placing of masonry
        units, placement of reinforcement (including placement of dowels in footings and foundation walls),
        inspection of grout space, immediately prior to closing of cleanouts, and during grouting operations.  The
        masonry inspector shall assure Contractor compliance with the drawings and specifications.  The masonry
        inspector shall keep a complete record of all inspections and shall submit daily written reports to the
        Quality Control Supervisory Representative reporting the quality of masonry construction.


END OF SECTION 4
                                                  4-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                          July 2006
Section 5- Metals

                                      Section 5 - Metals
5.1     General Requirements
        This section covers the design and construction of steel and aluminum structures. The requirements of this
        section shall be used in conjunction with those of other sections.  Reused and/or recycled materials shall be
        used to the extent practical and permitted by code.


5.2     Structural Steel
        Structural steel for buildings and other incidental structures shall comply with the following:

        •   State building code as applicable
        •   American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., (AISC) ASD Manual of Steel Construction.
        •   AISC LRFD Manual of Steel Construction
5.3     Steel Joists

5.3.1    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Steel joists and joist girders shall comply with the following:

        •   State building code as applicable
        •   Steel Joist Institute (SJI) Standard Specifications: Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and
            Joist Girders.

5.4.2    INTENDED US E
        Steel j oists shall not be used for wind bracing or other types of bracing. They shall be used only as
        horizontal load-carrying members supporting floor and roof decks.

5.4.3    SUPPORT OF VIBRATING EQUIPMENT
        Steel joists shall not be used to support air-conditioning, air-handling, or any type of vibrating equipment.
        Steel j oists serving as floor j oists and roof purlins shall not have bracing members attached to them that
        would transmit vibrations from vibrating equipment into the steel joists and/or structural diaphragms.


5.4     Steel Decks
        Steel decks shall comply with the following:

        •   State building code as applicable
        •   Steel Deck Institute (SDI) Diaphragm Design Manual
        •   SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks


5.5     Miscellaneous  Metals

5.5.1    DEFINITION
        Miscellaneous metals are all ferrous and nonferrous metals other than structural steel as defined in the
        AISC Code of Standard Practice.
                                                 5-1

-------
July 2006                                                         Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                    Section 5 -Metals

5.5.2    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Miscellaneous metals shall comply with the requirements of local orders and with all applicable industry
        standards for the specific type of metal and use, as listed elsewhere in this section.


5.6     Cold-Formed Steel
        Cold-formed steel shall comply with the following:

        •    State building code as applicable
        •    American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
            Members.
        •    AISI Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
5.7     Pre-engineered Metal Buildings

5.7.1    CODES AND SPECIFICATIONS
        Pre-engineered metal buildings shall comply with:

        •    State building code as applicable
        •    The Metal Building Manufacturers Association's Metal Building Systems Manual.

5.7.2    LOADS
        Design loads shall conform to requirements of state building code.


5.8     Structural Steel Inspection and Testing
        Structural steel inspection shall be required and performed in conformance with requirements of:

        •    State building code as applicable
        •    AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
END OF SECTION 5
                                                5-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 6-Wood and Plastics

                              Section 6 - Wood  and Plastics
6.1     General Requirements
        This section covers the use of wood and plastic materials in construction.  The use of recycled materials
        should be maximized, as applicable, in accordance with the requirements of RCRA and designated
        products published in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG).  The use of recovered
        materials should conform to requirements of industry practices, standards, and state codes, as applicable.
        Other environmental design considerations include:

        •   Composite woods, plywood, particleboard containing no urea-formaldehyde
        •   Wood products certified by the Forest Stewardship Council to be from managed sources


6.2     Partitions
        Standardization of interior partitions is desirable. Partitions within administrative areas should be easily
        removable. Sound isolation and laboratory partitions between modules shall be designed to be removable
        in order to accommodate future reconfiguration of spaces. Partitions requiring fire-resistance ratings shall
        be constructed of noncombustible/limited combustible (NC/LC) materials  and either listed by Underwriters
        Laboratories Inc. (UL) or approved by Factory Mutual and listed in its approval guide. Refer to the
        description of off-gassing in Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual for more information on indoor material
        requirements. See also www.cpg/gov for shower and restroom dividers/partition containing recovered
        materials.

6.2.1    SUBDIVIDING PARTITIONS
        Office subdividing partitions shall comply with the applicable local building code and/or National Fire
        Protection Association (NFPA) 101 requirements. These partitions must be provided at a ratio of 1 linear
        foot per 10 square feet of space, as applicable.  Partitioning over interior office doors is included in the
        measurement. Partitions must extend from the finished floor to the finished ceiling and have a flame
        spread rating of 25  or less, a smoke development rating of 450 or less (American Society for Testing and
        Materials [ASTM]  E-84 Test), and a minimum sound transmission loss (STL) rating of 40.

6.2.2    PERMANENT PARTITIONS
        Permanent partitions must be provided, as necessary, to surround stairs, corridors, elevator shafts, toilets,
        janitor closets, meeting and conference rooms, and mechanical rooms.  They shall have a flame spread and
        smoke developed criteria per NFPA 101, Table A. 10.2.2 and/or aflame spread rating of 25 or less and a
        smoke development rating of 450 or less (ASTM E-84 Test), whichever is more stringent.  Stairs, elevators,
        and other floor openings shall be enclosed by partition(s) and have the fire resistance required  by applicable
        codes. These partitions shall extend from the floor to the underside of the structure above,  shall effectively
        isolate sound and vibration, and shall meet  all fire separation requirements.

6.2.3    WOOD STUD PARTITIONS
        Wood studs shall not be installed as part of new construction or as part of a major alteration or space
        adjustment in other types of construction.

6.2.4    LESS-THAN-CEILING-HIGH PARTITIONS
        Bank type partitions, acoustical screens, freestanding space dividers, and other partitions that do not reach
        the ceiling shall conform to the requirements for movable partitions set forth by the General Services
        Administration (GSA) in PBS-PI 00.  In addition, the placement of partitions relative to sprinklers shall
        comply with NFPA 13, and adequate passageway width and identification of means of egress shall comply
        with NFPA 101. Another factor limiting the height and location of partitions is that tall or massive
        partition systems may interfere with the even distribution of conditioned air and natural light.

                                                  6-1

-------
July 2006                                                          Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                            Section 6-Wood and Plastics

        Consideration should be given to the location of supply diffusers and return registers; the location of
        thermostats; and the clearance above, below, and around the partitions to allow adequate air circulation.


6.3     Use of Wood and Plastic
        Selection of wood, adhesives, and plastic materials should conform to requirements of flame spread and
        smoke developed criteria per NFPA 101, Table A. 10.2.2, 2000 edition; and should be of a low VOC-
        emitting or low ozone-depleting material.  Treated lumber should not be used for furnishings, especially for
        play equipment in day-care centers. Laboratory shelving and casework may be fabricated using wood
        (plywood) and plastic materials.  See subsection 10.5 of this Manual for requirements.


END OF SECTION 6
                                                  6-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                         July 2006
Section 7-Thermal and Moisture Requirements

                Section 7 -Thermal and Moisture Requirements


7.1     General Requirements
        In selecting building materials, careful consideration shall be given to all technical criteria.  Vapor and
        infiltration barriers to vapor flow through the walls and roofs shall be placed with the aim of preventing
        moisture accumulation and condensation within the building structure, reduction of thermal performance,
        and increased latent cooling load in the space. The use of recovered materials should be maximized, as
        applicable, in accordance with the requirements of RCRA and designated recycled content thermal
        insulation products published in EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines (CPG).  The use of
        recycled materials should conform to requirements of industry practices, standards, and state codes, as
        applicable. Additionally, selection of materials should conform to requirements of flame spread and smoke
        developed criteria per NFPA 101, Table A. 10.2.2, 2000 edition; and should be of a low VOC-emitting or
        low ozone-depleting type material.


7.2     Design Characteristics
        Design characteristics of exterior wall sections should be evaluated for functional and cost effectiveness in
        relation to the following:

           •   Moisture transport
           •   Thermal performance
           •   Weathertight design, including sealant profiles, material adjacencies, and flashing configuration
           •   Air flow and infiltration.
7.3     Thermal Resistance
        For information on the thermal characteristics of single materials or wall assemblies, refer to the American
        Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Handbook of Fundamentals
        or the manufacturer's certified technical information. Thermal resistance (R) values shall be identified for
        each element in the building shell. "U" factor calculations are prepared by following the recommended
        procedures as documented in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.


7.4     Moisture Transport
        Dew point calculations are prepared by following the recommended design procedures in the ASHRAE
        Handbook of Fundamentals.  The exterior envelope will be designed to prevent condensation within wall
        cavities, building spaces, etc.


7.5     Panel, Curtain, and  Spandrel Walls
        Openings between panel, curtain, and spandrel walls and the building structure or floor slabs around them,
        shall be fire stopped in accordance with the provisions outlined in Section 13, Special Construction, of this
        Manual. The requirements  in this subsection in no way reduce the requirements for protection of walls
        subject to an exterior fire exposure. See Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual for information on exposure
        protection.

7.5.1    PANEL AND CURTAIN WALLS
        All panel and curtain walls  shall conform to the requirements for nonbearing walls for the type of
        construction and model code involved and shall be securely anchored to the building in a manner that will
        prevent failure of the anchors in a fire or failure of the panel and its components in high wind.


                                                7-1

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                             Section 7-Thermal and Mositure Requirements

7.5.2    SPANDREL WALLS
        Except as noted below, spandrel walls shall be provided at each floor and shall have a height of at least 3
        feet above the finished floor and a fire resistance equivalent to the floor involved.

7.5.2.1      EXCEPTION NO. 1
            Exterior spandrel walls are not necessary and, if provided, are not required to have any fire resistance if
            the rooms located directly inside the exterior wall of the building and on the floor below contain low-
            hazard occupancies or occupancies that are sprinkler protected.

7.5.2.2      EXCEPTION NO. 2.
            Spandrel walls are not required at grade level.


END OF SECTION 7
                                                   7-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 8 - Doors and Windows

                             Section 8 - Doors and Windows


8.1     Doors

8.1.1    GENERAL
        Unless otherwise noted, all doors shall be 36 inches wide. Doors in designed egress ways shall swing in
        the direction of egress. Doors shall not swing into exit ways in a manner that reduces the effective exit
        width. Doors and windows shall conform to requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
        80, as applicable.

8.1.1.1      HARDWARE
            All doors shall be equipped with heavy-duty hardware. Each leaf (up to 80 inches high) shall be
            provided with minimum 11A pair butts (hinges) or 2 pair butts (hinges) on doors higher than 80 inches.
            All doors shall be provided with appropriate stops or wall bumpers. Exterior, egress, and laboratory
            doors shall be provided with appropriate closers.  All public -use doors must be equipped with push
            plates, pull bars or handles, and automatic door closers. Corridor and outside doors must be equipped
            with cylinder locks and door checks. All locks must be master-keyed.  The Government must be
            furnished with at least two master keys and two keys for each lock. Hardware for doors in the means
            of egress shall conform to NFPA standard 101  and American with Disabilities Act (ADA)

8.1.1.2      ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
            Doors, windows, and hardware exposed to highly corrosive conditions, as in marine or very humid
            environments, shall be nonferrous or provided with a protective, corrosion-resistant finish. Selection
            and location of door systems must include consideration of their designed protection against
            infiltration and the outdoor air pollutants that might pass through the openings.

8.1.2    EXTERIOR DOORS
        Exterior doors shall be weathertight and equipped with door closer, shall open outward, and shall have a
        drip rain diverter above the door as required. Doors shall comply with requirements of the Uniform
        Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS), Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), and NFPA 101, as
        applicable.  Exterior doors shall be alarmed for anti-intrusion.

8.1.3    INTERIOR DOORS
        Interior doors must have a minimum opening of 36 inches (width) by 80 inches (height) and shall comply
        with ADA and/or UFAS, as applicable. Hollow-core  wood doors are not acceptable. Hardware shall be
        ADA compliant.  Doors shall be operable by a single  effort and shall be provided with vision panels in
        accordance with all applicable code requirements. All requirements of ADA shall be incorporated.

8.1.3.1      LANDING AREAS
            The landing areas for doors that open onto walkways, ramps, corridors, and other pedestrian paths shall
            be clear and level with a slope of no greater than 1:50; they shall extend at least 5 feet from the swing
            side of the door, 4 feet from the opposite side, and at least 11A feet past the latch side (pull side) of the
            door and 1 foot past the latch side (push side).

8.1.4    FIRE DOORS
        Fire doors shall conform to NFPA 80.  Doors, hardware, and frames shall bear the label of Underwriters
        Laboratories, Factory Mutual, or another approved laboratory testing organization, in accordance with
        American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-152.

        Glazing material  shall not be allowed in fire doors with a 3-hour fire protection rating or in fire doors with
        a 1.5-hour fire protection rating that are used in locations with severe fire exposure potential (such as in a
        flammable-liquids storage room).  The maximum area of glazing in a 1-or  1.5-hour door shall be 100

                                                  8-1

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                            Section 8 -Doors and Windows

        square inches (0.065 square meters) unless the area has been tested and meets the requirements of NFPA
        80. The area of glazing in fire doors that have less than 1 -hour fire -resistance ratings shall be limited to the
        maximum area tested.  All glazing shall be wired glass or other glass approved for use in fire doors.

8.1.4.1      EXIT DOORS
            Fire doors in exits or means of egress shall also conform to the requirements contained in Chapter 2 of
            the Safety Manual. Fire doors in air-handling systems shall also conform to the requirements outlined
            in Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual.

8.1.5    LABORATORY DOORS
        Laboratory doors shall be 48 inches wide (36 inches wide for the active leaf and 12 inches wide for the
        inactive leaf) and 84 inches high to facilitate easy movement of equipment and carts. Laboratory doors
        shall swing in the direction of egress from the laboratory and should be inserted in alcoves regardless of the
        corridor width.  Open doors should not protrude more than 6 inches into exit corridors.  In general, large
        vision panels should be provided to allow easy and quick safety inspection of laboratory spaces. Hardware
        shall be ADA-compliant and shall provide various levels of access control as required; it will include both
        combination and key access locks. Areas where a high level of security will be required shall be provided
        with card-key access control.


8.2    Windows

8.2.1    GENERAL
        The use of natural but controlled day lighting should be maximized as part of a total energy conservation
        program.  EPA values natural light and perceives it as part of an exemplary working environment as well as
        a potential source of energy savings. The building organization and design concept shall bring adequate
        natural light into personnel spaces.  Window size, head-height, placement, umber, and location shall be
        determined on the basis of need for natural light and ventilation and of energy considerations. All exterior
        windows in heated  or air-conditioned spaces shall use double-glazed, insulated, low E glass and thermal
        break sashes. All windows in laboratory rooms that may contain explosive materials shall be glazed with
        safety glass. Selection and location of windows must include consideration of their designed protection
        against infiltration  and the outdoor air pollutants that might pass through the openings. Section 104 of the
        Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies
        procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 6.1 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's
        purchasing specifications for energy efficient residential windows.

8.2.2    FIXED WINDOW SYSTEMS
        Laboratory space shall have windows that are non-operable (except with a key, where windows must be
        opened for cleaning purposes) in order to maintain temperature and humidity control and room
        pressurization relationships.

8.2.3    SAFETY OF STOREFRONT AND  CURTAIN WALL SYSTEMS
        Windows extending to within 18 inches of the floor and located at least 4 feet above grade shall be
        provided  with a safely bar on the interior window approximately  3 feet above floor level.  Off-street,
        ground-level windows and those accessible from fire escapes and adjacent roofs must have anti-intrusion
        alarm systems to deter forcible entry.

8.2.4    WINDOW HEIGHT
        Wherever windows extend to within 36 inches of the finished floor and are at least 4 feet above grade, a
        suitable metal barrier shall be provided on the interior side, approximately 56 inches above floor level.
        (Perimeter heating  and cooling units may form this barrier.) If the glass construction can withstand a
        horizontal force of 200 pounds or more and meets the requirements of 29 CFR §1910.23, 16 CFR Part


                                                  8-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 8 - Doors and Windows

         1201, and the local building code, no barriers are required. For windows in walls that must have a fire-
        resistance rating, see NFPA 80A and Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual.

8.2.5    GLAZED PANELS IN INTERIOR PARTITIONS AND WALLS
        Interior glazed panels must comply with the Consumer Products Safety Commission Safety Standard for
        Architectural Glazing Materials (16 CFR Part  1201). When glazing panels and windows are used in fire
        barrierwalls, such use shall  also meet the criteria set forth in the Safety Manual.


8.3      Permanent Window Coverings

8.3.1    GENERAL
        The design professional shall be responsible for providing permanent window coverings for interior and
        exterior windows where required. Nonpermanent window coverings installed on the inside of windows are
        considered "interior finishes" and are discussed in subsection 9.6 of this Manual.

8.3.2    SUN SHADING
        The use of reflective glass shall be reviewed and considered for all exterior windows.  The two basic types
        of reflective glass available for consideration are solar-reflective and low-emissivity (Low-E). The major
        differences are visible light transmission, wavelengths of energy that are reflected, and the direction in
        which these wavelengths are usually reflected.  Solar-reflective glass has a mirror-like coating that is highly
        reflective of solar energy. Low-emissivity (Low-E) glass has a metal or metallic-oxide coating that is
        nearly invisible to the eye. Low-E glass reduces energy costs by creating a heat barrier that helps keep heat
        outside in the summer and inside in  the winter. Low-E glass is suitable for all climates and is available for
        use in double and triple insulating glass units.  Insulating units with an outer p anel of tinted or reflective
        glass can provide added energy cost efficiencies. Use a target of 70% visible  light transmission (VLT).
        Manufacturer's data sheets should be referred to in order to evaluate shading coefficient and relative heat
        gain. Use of reflective glass shall be considered even when not required by the data sheet, when solar glare
        and heat gain should be controlled.  Laboratory windows exposed to direct sunlight shall be shaded with
        permanent exterior shading devices that shade the window from direct sun. Section 104 of the Energy
        Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure
        either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 6.1 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's
        purchasing specifications for energy efficient residential windows.

8.3.3    SECURITY
        Windows at ground level shall be covered with Mylar to provide security.


END OF SECTION 8

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 9- Finishes

                                      Section 9 - Finishes
9.1     Interior Finishes
        The required finishes for each room are specified in the room data sheets included in Appendix C or finish
        schedules in PORs. The following requirements apply to interior finishing.

9.1.1    TRIM AND INCIDENTAL FINISHES
        Interior wall and ceiling finish that covers no more than 10 percent of the aggregate wall and ceiling area
        involved may be Class C material in accordance with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101,
        Chapter 6.

9.1.2    FINAL FINISHING MATERIAL
        Wallpaper, paint, veneer, and other thin finishing materials that are applied directly to the surface of walls
        and ceilings and are not more than 1/28-inch thick shall not be considered as interior finishes per NFPA
        101, Chapter 6.  To the extent practicable, consolidated and/or reprocessed latex paint consistent with CPG
        guidance should be used.

9.1.3    AIRSPACE
        Whenever an airspace is located behind combustible material, the space shall be blocked so that no void
        extends more than 10 feet in any direction. For example, wood paneling applied to wood furring strips will
        meet the requirement if the distance between the furring strips is no more than 10 feet in both a horizontal
        and a vertical direction.

9.1.4    COMBUSTIBLE SUBSTANCES
        Materials composed of basically combustible substances (e.g., wood, fiberboard) that have been treated
        with fire-retardant chemicals throughout the material (e.g., pressure impregnation), as opposed to surface
        treatment, may be used as interior finish subject to the following conditions:  (1) the treated material shall
        be installed in full accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and (2) the treated material shall not be
        installed in any location where conditions exist that may reduce the effectiveness of the fire -retardant
        treatment (e.g., high humidity). Surface treatments may be used to reduce the risks associated with existing
        conditions, in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101.  No material that will result in higher flame spread
        or smoke development ratings than those permitted in this Manual shall be used as an interior finish.
        Finishing materials should conform to flame spread and smoke developed criteria requirements per NFPA
        101, Table A. 10.2.2, 2000 edition.

9.1.5    ENVIRONMENTAL CRITERIA
        The selection of interior finishes shall consider indoor air quality (e.g., low VOC paints, adhesives, caulks,
        non-chlorine based wall base, wall covering, and flooring) and maximum recycled content for carpet,
        wallboard, wall base, concrete, steel, and ceiling tiles consistent with CPG requirements and
        recommendations.  Evaluation of materials also should consider the manufacturer's required preparation
        and cleaning products and the potential for use of low-toxicity cleaning products.


9.2     Wall Treatments

9.2.1    WALL MATERIALS
        Wall materials must be capable of withstanding washing with detergents and disinfectants. Materials
        selected shall be compatible with their intended use and shall emphasize durability  and low maintenance
        while creating a comfortable work environment. Recycled content laminated paperboard and/or structural
        fiberboard should be specified consistent with CPG guidance.
                                                   9-1

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Section 9- Finishes

        In general, walls shall be gypsum wallboard, with a painted finish, on metal studs.  Walls in laboratory
        areas will be required to support additional loads due to movable casework, mounting rails, upper cabinets
        or adjustable shelves, and equipment anchorage. Therefore, structural wall studs, backing plates, and
        lateral bracing sufficient to withstand heavy loads will be required.  Where concrete masonry unit (CMU)
        block or poured concrete walls are used to meet other design requirements or constraints, they shall be
        furred with gypsum wallboard or covered with another appropriate finish.

9.2.3    WALL FINISHES
        Wall finishes, and the process by which they are selected, must meet the requirements outlined in the
        following subsections.

9.2.3.1       GENERAL
             The required finishes must be designated for each room in the room data sheets. Actual material
             selection, color, and texture, is left to the design professionals who shall make selections in
             consultation with the users. Material safety data sheets (MSDS) are a good resource for environment
             evaluation. Paint shall be carefully selected so as not to affect laboratory operations. The design
             professional must also select finish materials for items and areas not specifically designated in the
             room data sheets. These selections shall be submitted to the Government representative for final
             approval.

9.2.3.2       FLAME SPREAD AND SMOKE LIMITATIONS
             Wall finishes on walls that are part of a means of egress must have an interior finish of Class A (flame
             spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450).  (Interior finish ratings are derived from American Society for
             Testing and Materials [ASTM] E-84 and NFPA 255.)  For any existing construction that is not
             protected throughout by a sprinkler system meeting the Government's approval, wall finishes must
             have an interior finish of Class A (flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450). All new construction
             for EPA  shall be protected throughout by a sprinkler system meeting the Government's approval; in
             construction that is so protected, wall finishes in all areas, except those that are a part of the means of
             egress, may have an interior finish of Class B (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450), unless
             otherwise restricted by an applicable code.  The most restrictive requirement shall govern. In
             sprinkler-protected exit accesses or passageways, the interior finish may be composed of materials
             with a Class B interior finish rating (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450).  (See NFPA 101
             and PBS-P100 as the sources of this requirement.)

9.2.3.3       WALL COVERINGS
             Wall covering made of materials that are considered "environmentally friendly" shall be provided in
             the administrative and other office areas when required (none shall be provided in the laboratory
             areas). Such wall covering shall meet the following criteria:

             •   Construction:  All material shall be of uniform color throughout.  Colors and patterns shall be
                chosen and approved by EPA from standard manufacturer lines offered by the design professional.
                Non-chlorine based materials are preferrable.

             •   Maintenance properties:  All wall covering shall be resistant to permanent stains and mildew and
                shall be capable of being cleaned with mild, nonabrasive cleaners.

             •   Fire hazard requirements: Each type of wall covering used will have a minimum interior finish of
                Class C (flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450) when tested in accordance with  ASTM E-
                84.

             •   Application: Application  of all wall covering shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
                recommendations. In the product selection process, consider the VOC impact of the
                manufacturer's recommended application.

                                                    9-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 9- Finishes

9.3    Finished Ceilings

9.3.1    GENERAL
        Ceilings shall be set at a minimum height of 9 feet 8 inches in laboratory zones both in general spaces and
        in laboratory spaces and at a minimum height of 8 feet in corridor and office spaces. Except in service
        areas, ceilings must have acoustical treatment acceptable to the contracting officer, a flame spread rating of
        25 or less, and a smoke development rating of 450 or less (ASTM E-84). Protrusion of fixtures into traffic
        ways is not allowed.  Refer to the Safety Manual for fire -resistance requirements for ceilings.

9.3.2    CEILINGS NOT ALONG EXIT PATH
        Ceilings and interior finishes in areas that are not part of the normal exit route may have an interior finish
        of Class C (flame spread 76-200, smoke developed 0-450), unless an applicable code is more restrictive.

9.3.3    CEILINGS ALONG EXIT PATH
        In sprinkler-protected exit ways or enclosed corridors leading to exits, ceilings and interior finishes may be
        composed of materials with an interior finish rating of Class B (flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-
        450), unless an applicable code is more restrictive. The most restrictive applicable code shall be used.

9.3.4    CEILING FINISHES
        Where ceiling finishes are required, they will, in general, be suspended acoustical tile.  Other ceiling
        finishes will be required in special rooms, as specified on the room data sheets.  These finishes will include
        hard ceilings with sealed openings for clean analytical laboratories.  Special consideration shall be given to
        the type of grid system and acoustical tile when the ceiling is in a moist area or in food service and other
        specialty areas.  Ceilings in extraction, preparation, glassware washing, microbiology, and similar wet
        laboratories shall be of water-resistant tile materials or painted gypsum wallboard.

9.3.5    OPEN CEILINGS
        All areas above open ceilings shall be sealed and painted. The necessary coordination shall occur for all
        requirements regarding painting of exposed areas, including engineered systems that require color-coded
        painting or stenciling and general code-required stenciling of nomenclature defining the rating of fire walls.


9.4    Floor Treatments

9.4.1    GENERAL
        Floor finishes shall be compatible with the  intended use of the room and shall emphasize durability and low
        maintenance. Floors and floor coverings may be of any material normal to the intended use. Materials
        may be either combustible or noncombustible, including wood, asphalt tile, carpet, rugs, linoleum,
        concrete, and terrazzo. When floor tiles or  carpet are used, preference should be given to such items
        designated in the CPG.  Interior floor finishes shall meet the interior finish require ments noted above.  (See
        subsection 9.1.1 for more information on interior finish requirements.) Materials must be smooth,
        nonabsorbent, skid-proof, and wear resistant. Laboratory flooring should resist  the adverse effects of acids,
        solvents, and detergents. When a seamless floor material is required, the base shall also be seamless and
        integrally coved. Materials must be monolithic or have a minimum number of joints. The base may be a 4-
        inch rubber base or an integral-coved base where sheet flooring is used.

9.4.1.1      FIRE SAFETY
            Interior floor finishes shall be in accordance with Chapter 6 of NFPA 101 and shall be tested in
            accordance with NFPA 253. Flooring materials used as wall sections or wall coverings shall comply
            with the fire safety characteristics described in Chapter 2 of the Safety Manual for flame spread and
            smoke development.  The flame spread and smoke development characteristics shall be determined
            through testing in the orientation in which the material is to be installed (NFPA 253 results shall not be
            used to evaluate  flooring tested in the vertical position).

                                                   9-3

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                       Section 9- Finishes
9.4.2    CARPET
        Carpet tiles shall cover all typical office floors and must meet the static buildup and flammability
        requirements that follow.

9.4.2.1      SPECIFICATIONS
            The following specifications must be met for all new carpet installation:

            •   Pile yarn content: Continuous, solution-dyed filament soil-hiding nylon or wool/nylon
                combinations.

            •   Carpet pile construction:  Level loop, textured loop, level cut pile, or level cut/uncut pile.

            •   Pile weight: Minimum of 28 ounces per square yard.

            •   Secondary back: Recycled content, synthetic fiber, or jute for glue-down installation. Backings
                with latex and 4PC should be avoided.

            •   Total weight:  Minimum of 64 ounces per square yard.

            •   Flammability: In all areas except exits, carpet must have a critical radiant flux (CRF) of 0.25 or
                greater, with a specific optical density not higher than 450.  Carpet in exits must have a CRF of at
                least 0.50.  Carpet passing the Consumer Products Safety Commission FFL-70 (Pill Test) is
                acceptable for office areas; it may  also be used in corridors that are protected by automatic
                sprinklers. Check applicable codes for any more restrictive requirements.  The most restrictive
                requirement shall apply.

            •   Static buildup: 3.5 kilovolts (kV) maximum with built-in static dissipation is recommended; static-
                controlled is acceptable. More restrictive levels shall be required in sensitive areas such as
                computer rooms; these levels shall be determined by calculations for any special equipment in use.

            •   Interior finish requirements:  As required by NFPA 101, Section 6-5.

            •   End of life/disposal: Required to be recyclable by manufacturer.

9.4.2.2      COLOR
            For new carpet, the Government shall be provided with at least three color samples.  The sample and
            color must be approved by EPA prior to installation. No substitutes may be made after sample
            selection.  Use of solution dyed yarn shall be considered to minimize color fading and reduce water
            pollution..

9.4.2.3      INSTALLATION
            Carpet must be installed in accordance  with the approved manufacturer's instructions.

            •   In leased space, carpet shall be replaced at least once every  7 years during Government
                occupancy, or whenever backing or underlayment is exposed and/or there are noticeable variations
                in surface color or texture, whichever occurs first.

            •   Consider alternative methods of installation where feasible, including gridded glue down in low-
                traffic and low-moisture areas, and adhesive backing.
                                                   9-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 9- Finishes

            Carpet replacement shall include the moving and returning-in-place of all furniture. Floor perimeters
            at partitions must have wood or carpet base. Any exceptions must be approved by the contracting
            officer.

            •   An additional 10 percent of the selected carpet tiles shall be provided by the contractor for the
                owner's own stock and replacement.  These carpet tiles are not to be used during the warranty
                period.

            •   The off-gassing requirements in Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual shall be followed.

9.4.3    RESILIENT TILE
        Unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in this document, all new resilient floor tile shall be 12 inch x 12 inch
        x 1/8-inch thick, shall have 35 percent to 40 percent reflectance, and shall be high density, meeting the
        requirements of Federal Specification SS-T-312, Type IV.  Adhesives used to set tiles shall be low in
        volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Colors and patterns will be selected from three or more samples by
        the contracting officer or his or her duly appointed representative.  If heavy duty, commercial grade floor
        tiles are specified, preference should be given to floor tiles made with recovered materials as designated in
        the CPG.

9.4.4    SEAMLESS VINYL FLOORING FOR LABORATORY FACILITIES
        Seamless vinyl flooring for laboratories shall be chemical-resistant as manufactured by Tarket or Mipolan
        or an approved equal, and shall be coved 4 inches up the wall using the same material.  Joints shall be
        chemically welded smooth without any grooves. Adhesive used to set the flooring shall be
        environmentally acceptable.

9.4.5    CERAMIC TILE FLOORING
        Ceramic tile flooring shall be sealed in all grout areas. At least five color samples shall be incorporated into
        the color boards for selection and approval by the contracting officer (or his or her duly appointed
        representative).

9.4.6    SPECIAL FLOORING
        Special floor-coating systems shall be troweled, jointless floor systems with slip-resistant top coatings
        which shall be waterproof and resistant to alkalies and acids. The special flooring system selected should
        be compatible with its intended use.

9.4.7    EXPOSED CONCRETE FLOORING
        Steel trowel finish shall be used on exposed concrete floors that will not receive other finish. Exposed
        interior concrete floors shall be sealed with a penetrating-type solvent base or water-emulsion base
        unpigmented sealer containing a suitable type resin and no wax.


9.5    Paint

9.5.1    GENERAL
        Before occupancy, all surfaces designated for painting must be newly painted with paint finish and colors
        acceptable to, and approved by, the contracting officer or that officer's duly appointed representative. The
        contracting officer or duly appointed representative shall be provided with color samples and color
        schemes, with their average surface reflectance value clearly identified, for selection. All paint must be
        low VOC latex (i.e., <3 grams/liter) unless specified otherwise. For interior and exterior latex paints,
        preference should be given to the use of reprocessed or consolidated latex paint, consistent with CPG
        guidance.
                                                   9-5

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                      Section 9- Finishes

9.5.2    REFLECTANCE VALUES
        Minimum average surface light reflectance values (LRV) that will be used as a base for the selection of
        interior colors are as follows:

            •   Ceiling:  80 percent.
            •   Walls: 70 percent.
            •   Floors:  30 percent.
            •   Furniture and equipment: 50 percent.
            •   Chalkboards: Not less than 15 percent nor more than 20 percent, as recommended inAmerican
                Standard Practice for School Lighting, AIANo. 32F28.

        Deviations from the above reflectance requirements are allowed for aesthetic treatment of such areas as
        conference rooms, lobbies, corridors, and executive offices.  Surfaces shall also have a matte finish to
        prevent excessive brightness ratios and to minimize specular reflections.

9.5.3    WALL AND CEILING COLORS
        Ceiling color can be extended from  1 to 3 feet down the walls, or to the level of the fixtures, to obtain up to
        20 percent increase in illumination.

9.5.4    ACCENT AREAS
        Up to 20 percent of wall surfaces may have reflectance values lower than those listed, for accent purposes,
        without being considered part of the average.

9.5.5    LEAD-BASED PAINT
        Lead-based paint shall not be used in EPA facilities. Refer to Chapter 6 of the Safety, Health, and
        Environmental Manual: Environmental Management Guidelines (Volume 4 of the EPA Facilities Manual)
        for restrictions on the use of lead-based paint.


9.6    Window Covering
        Permanent devices installed on the outside of buildings to control sunlight and provide security are
        discussed in subsection 8.3 of this Manual.

9.6.1    BLINDS
        Window blinds may be either vertical or horizontal; nonmetallic slats or rollershades are required in
        laboratories.   Color selection will  be made by the EPA representative.  The hardware and blind mechanisms
        in laboratories shall be made of acid-resistive materials.

9.6.2    BLACKOUT SHADES
        Rooms requiring blackout capability shall be equipped with blackout shades. Shades should be a pre-
        engineered unit with a fiberglass-coated fabric shadecloth. They must have a noncorroding, concealed-
        variable adjustment mechanism, adjustable from 100 percent friction (static mode) with finite positions to
        15 percent friction (dynamic mode)  with only preselected positions.

9.6.3    DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS
        All draperies, curtains, and similar hanging materials shall be of a noncombustible or flame-resistant fabric
        (chemically treated). Flame -resistant means that the fabric or films (e.g., thin plastic sheets or cellophane)
        must meet the performance criteria described in NFPA 701.  In addition, draperies, curtains, and other
        window finishes shall be formaldehyde and chlorine free and shall meet the off-gassing criteria set forth in
        Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual.

END OF SECTION 9

                                                   9-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 10-Specialties

                                  Section 10 - Specialties


10.1   Magnetic, Liquid Chalk, Dry-Marker Boards and Tack Boards
        Magnetic dry -marker boards (liquid chalk) shall be used except when the solvent markers used on these
        boards would affect operations undertaken in laboratories; chalk-type chalkboards shall not be used.
        Locations of magnetic dry -marker boards and tack boards shall be determined by the design professional in
        close coordination with the contracting officer's representative (COR).


10.2   Interior Signage Systems and Building Directory

10.2.1   GENERAL
        All signage, identification, room numbering, and building directories shall comply with the requirements of
        the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

10.2.2   DOOR IDENTIFICATION
        Door identification shall be installed in approved locations adjacent to office entrances. The form of door
        identification must be approved by the COR. Toilet, stairway, and corridor doors must be identified by the
        international symbol of accessibility at a height of 54 to 66 inches above the floor; wherever possible, such
        identification should be mounted on the wall at the latch side of the door.  Seldom-used doors to areas
        posing danger to the blind must have knurled or acceptable plastic-abrasive-coated handles. Tactile
        warning indicators shall not be used to identify exit stairs.

10.2.3   ROOM NUMBERING
        A room-numbering and room-naming system is required for the identification of all spaces in the facility.
        Plans shall be submitted to the COR for review and approval before construction documentation begins.

10.2.4   BUILDING DIRECTORY
        A wall-mounted, glass-enclosed directory with lock shall be provided at a conspicuous location in the
        lobby or entrance of the building. The directory shall be approximately 2 feet by 3 feet in size. The
        building directory shall be approved by the COR.

10.2.5   LABORATORY SIGNAGE
        The laboratory signage should contain the room number, roomname, occupants by name, hazardous
        chemicals within the laboratory, emergency telephone number, and special procedures in case of
        emergency.


10.3   Portable Fire Extinguishers
        Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided and located within recessed cabinets, in accordance with
        National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.  Portable fire
        extinguishers shall be provided on the basis of the classes of anticipated fires and the size and degree of
        hazard affecting the extinguishers' use. Portable fire extinguishers containing carbon tetrachloride or halon
        (chlorobromomethane) extinguishing  agents shall not be used. As per requirements of PB S-P100, section
        7.11, portable fire extinguishers and cabinets shall not be installed in common areas, general office or court
        space when the building is protected throughout with quick response sprinklers. Additionally, in office
        buildings protected throughout with quick response sprinklers, fire extinguishers shall only be installed in
        areas such as mechanical and elevator equipment areas, computer rooms, UPS rooms, generator rooms, and
        special hazard areas.

        Fire extinguishers shall be approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and labeled to identify
        the listing and labeling organization and the fire test and performance standard that the fire extinguisher
                                                 10-1

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                   Section 10-Specialities

        meets or exceeds. The minimum rating for a single Class A extinguisher shall be 2-A in low hazard or
        medium hazard areas and 4-A in high hazard areas. The minimum rating for a single Class B extinguisher
        shall be 10-B in low hazard area, 20-B in medium hazard areas and 80-B in high hazard areas.

10.3.1   FIRE EXTINGUISHER LOCATIONS
        Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in every laboratory room. It is good practice to also locate a
        fire extinguisher in the corridor outside the laboratory in  addition to those located within the laboratory. In
        the other areas of the building or in non-laboratory buildings, the minimum number of fire extinguishers
        needed for protection shall be determined in accordance with NFPA 10, Chapter 3, Distribution of
        Extinguishers.

        •   Class A and D extinguishers shall be located so that the travel distance to the respective Class A and D
            hazard areas does not exceed 75 feet.

        •   Class B extinguishers shall be located so that the travel distance to the Class B hazard areas does not
            exceed 50 feet.

        •   Extinguishers with Class C ratings shall be located on the basis of the anticipated Class A or B hazard.

        •   One extinguisher may be installed to provide protection for several hazard areas provided that travel
            distances are not exceeded.


10.4   Laboratory Casework

10.4.1   GENERAL
        Preferably, all laboratory casework and associated fume hoods required in the facility shall be the product
        of one manufacturer and shall be installed under the recommendations of that manufacturer. The laboratory
        casework shall meet the functional, aesthetic, flexibility,  and maintenance needs of each user. Performance
        set forth herein shall establish minimum standards for design, performance, and function. Products that fail
        to meet these standards will not be considered.

10.4.1.1     MATERIALS
            Unless noted otherwise,  all surfaces shall be of stainless steel or another nonporous, durable,
            corrosion-resistant material. For rooms that do not require casework of metal construction, the
            casework materials shall be wood or approved plastic.  Wood casework shall be from certified
            sustainable forests  or recycled material.  Hardware used for wood or plastic casework shall be epoxy
            coated.  Plastic laminate  or other similar facing materials, over wood or composite  material, are
            permitted only when the  laminate or surfacing material is certified by the manufacturer to be
            impervious to acids and other common laboratory  solvents.

10.4.1.2     QUALITY
            The laboratory casework that is subject to the above  requirements shall have components,
            configuration, materials, finish, and performance (including performance on chemical and physical
            performance tests)  comparable to cantilevered frame (C-frame) casework systems manufactured by
            Hamilton Industries and  Kewaunee Scientific Equipment Corporation. Equipment manufactured by
            others is acceptable if the products are of equal performance and have similar appearance and
            construction, but only after approval by the contracting officer.

10.4.1.3     MODULAR DESIGN
            Design of laboratory casework (cabinets, counters, fume hoods) should be coordinated and compatible.
            Basic laboratory casework systems shall be composed  of modular dimensioned units of modern design
            consisting of a self-supporting steel frame capable of containing service piping and drain lines and
                                                   10-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 10-Specialties

            permitting the attachment and/or support of various styles of countertops, sinks, cupsinks, and utility
            hoses and connections, independently from base cabinet assemblies.  Support systems shall provide the
            flexibility and unlimited horizontal interchangeability of any or all cabinet sizes without removal of the
            working top or  interference of immediate vertical legs, supports, brackets, or framing between
            cabinets. Fixed laboratory casework shall be similarly flexible.  The design of fixed casework shall be
            approved by the COR.

10.4.1.4     SUPPORT CAPABILITY
            The system shall support work surfaces and steel undercounter cabinets independent of one another.
            All components shall be self-supporting and essentially independent of the building structure. The
            system shall support sinks, service fittings, plumbing fixtures, and service and waste lines by utilizing
            pipe clamps.  The assembly shall be designed and manufactured in such a manner that each linear foot
            of span between supporting elements, is capable of supporting a live load of 200 pounds per linear foot
            plus a dead load of 50 pounds per linear foot. In addition, it should be possible to place a concentrated
            load of 250 pounds on the front edge of the assembly at any point (assuming legs spaced at 6 feet on
            center) without causing the system to fail in its suspension or tip or deflect more than3/16 of an inch.

10.4.2   CABINET ASSEMBLIES
        Cabinet assemblies shall be suspended from the support system with fastener devices mounted in front of
        the unit for attachment to the front rail and shall be designed so that removal of units can be easily
        accomplished by use of common hand tools. Such fastener devices shall be of forged or cast steel and shall
        be commercially cadmium plated. Filler panels shall be provided at exposed-to-view areas, between backs
        of cabinets and walls, between backs of cabinets at the end of the peninsula or island benches, and at knee
        openings, to allow for the maintenance of mechanical services.

10.4.3   BASE CABINETS
        Casework shall  be of a metal construction of slimline design and shall be built in accordance with the
        highest standards and practices of the metal casework industry.  Superior quality casework shall be
        established by use of proper machinery, tools, dies, fixtures, and skilled workmanship so that the fit of
        doors and drawers allows vertical and horizontal openings of minimum tolerance. All units shall be  of
        flush-front construction so that drawer and door faces are in the same plane as exterior case members.  All
        units shall include label holders on all drawers and doors. Each unit shall be a completely welded structure
        and should not require additional parts such as applied panels at ends, backs, or bottom. Six-inch drawers
        are standard in the base drawer units. Unless otherwise noted in specific room data sheets, knee spaces
        shall be 3 feet in length and 29 inches in height.

10.4.4   WALL CABINETS
        Upper wall cabinets shall be designed so that cabinets hang rigidly vertical without sag or tilt.  The design
        professional shall be responsible for  ensuring that proper reinforcement is installed at the walls to support
        the load of the cabinets and contents. Construction of wall cabinets shall be of similar to that of base
        cabinets; wall cabinets shall be modular in design and installation to permit immediate interchangeability of
        all wall cabinets and/or shelf units.

10.4.5   SHELVING
        The following subsections provide information on reagent and adjustable shelving.

10.4.5.1     REAGENT SHELVES
            Reagent shelves shall be 1-inch-thick plywood, faced on both sides with acid-resistant plastic laminate,
            with all exposed edges edge-banded in 3-millimeter (V8-inch) thick polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or
            similar performing material.

10.4.5.2     ADJUSTABLE SHELVING
            Adjustable  shelving shall be 16-gauge steel shelving with hat-section reinforcing and shall be
            interchangeable with wall-hung cabinets. Shelving standards shall be double-slotted, 30 inches  in
                                                  10-3

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                                   Section 10-Specialities

            length, mounted at a height of 54 inches above finished floor (measured to the bottom of the standard).
            Brackets shall be 16-gauge metal with three blade hooks and shall be screwed to each shelf.

10.4.6   VENTED STORAGE CABINETS
        Vented acid/base storage cabinets shall be 3-foot-wide metal cabinets. The inner surfaces of the cabinet
        shall be factory coated to resist acid/base fumes and spills.  One adjustable shelf shall be provided. Venting
        shall be as for vented chemical storage cabinets.

10.4.7   COTJNTERTOPS
        Countertop materials will vary depending on the intended use.  The design professional shall be responsible
        for evaluating the requirements of the laboratories to determine what countertop material is most suitable
        for each specific application. The material used for the countertop shall also be used for back-splashes,
        side-splashes, and services ledge covers.  Countertops adjacent to sinks shall have grooved drainboards.
        Casework along walls shall have a  4-inch-high backsplash.

10.4.7.1     PLASTIC LAMINATE
            Chemically resistant plastic laminate countertops may be used in many applications where the use of
            extremely corrosive chemicals or large amounts of water is not expected.

10.4.7.2     EPOXY RESIN
            Epoxy resin (water-based) countertops shall be utilized in laboratories or in areas where large
            quantities of water or extremely corrosive chemicals are being utilized on a routine basis. All joints
            shall be bonded with a highly chemical-resistant and corrosion-resistant cement having properties
            similar to those of the base material.

10.4.7.3     STAINLESS STEEL
            Stainless steel countertops shall be used in special applications where sterile conditions are required
            (e.g., glassware washing areas, autoclave rooms), where there are controlled environmental
            temperatures (e.g., cold rooms, growth chambers), and where radioisotopes are being used.

10.4.8   LABORATORY FUME HOODS
        Fume hoods shall be provided in all laboratories and laboratory support spaces where hazardous chemicals
        or other toxic materials are being utilized.  The purpose of the laboratory fume hood is to prevent or
        minimize the escape of contaminants from the hood into the laboratory. The fume hood work surface shall
        be of recessed design so that spills  can be effectively contained. The design professional shall be
        responsible for determining, with the users of the facility, types and sizes of fume hoods appropriate to
        their intended use.  After the mechanical/laboratory fume hood exhaust systems have been installed, the
        testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) has been completed, and the TAB Report has been approved by
        SHEMD, each laboratory fume hood shall be certified by the hood manufacturer or his qualified
        representative to be installed and functioning according to specifications.  See Section 15, Mechanical
        Requirements, of this Manual for more specific requirements.

10.4.8.1     FUME HOOD LOCATION
            Fume hoods must be located away from doors, pedestrian traffic, and duct work.  The location of the
            hood shall be at the end of a room or bay, but not less than 1 foot from the corner, where the operator
            is essentially the only one who enters the zone of influence. A 5-foot minimum aisle width shall be
            maintained in front of fume hoods. It is good design practice not to have "dead-end" circulation
            patterns that may trap an individual in case of a laboratory accident.  Further, hoods shall be placed in
            such a way that one hood cannot draw air from another hood.

10.4.9   ENVIRONMENTAL ROOMS
        Environmental rooms shall be of modular, insulated panel construction, providing temperature and
        humidity control with specified setpoint control. Temperature requirements for individual rooms shall be

                                                   10-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                          July 2006
Section 10-Specialties

        appropriate to the rooms' intended use.  Rooms shall be provided with emeigency auxiliary power backup
        to allow 24-hour operation. All rooms involving laboratory procedures shall be ventilated. Fume hoods
        shall not be allowed in environmental rooms.  The following should also be provided: remote air- or water-
        cooled dual-sequencing compressor, temperature and humidity recorders, high/low alarm, adjustable
        epoxy -coated wire shelving on wall supports or movable racks, and personnel emergency alarm.


END OF SECTION 10
                                                  10-5

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                         July 2006
Section 11 - Equipment

                                 Section 11 - Equipment


11.1    Design
        Planning for equipment shall be integrated with the planning of architectural, structural, mechanical, and
        electrical systems. Equipment shall be arranged and organized to provide circulation, workflow, and
        maintenance clearances.


11.2   Catalog Cut Sheets
        Appropriate catalog cut sheets shall be provided for all items of equipment. Each cut sheet shall have a
        logistical category and code. Each item shall be clearly identified if it has unique utility requirements,
        structural support needs, or space requirements.


11.3   Layout and Clearances
        Equipment should be arranged to provide service clearances and maintenance access so that service and
        maintenance can be executed with minimum disruption to workspaces. When expansion is anticipated in a
        project, the design professional should ensure that some additional equipment can be added without
        disruption or reconfiguration of workflow.


11.4   Floor Preparation
        Floor depressions shall be provided to accommodate items and design requirements, such as entrance walk-
        off grilles, cart washers, environmentally controlled room equipment, walk-in refrigerators, computer
        rooms, and any other appropriate  spaces or items, except in laboratory spaces where future flexibility is a
        requirement.


11.5   Structural  Support
        Wall-partitioning systems for wall-hung equipment, wall-hung workstation storage, and toilet accessories
        shall be adequately reinforced.  Ceiling support systems for service columns, hoist equipment, and other
        ceiling-mounted items shall be structurally braced.  All fixed equipment shall be mounted to resist seismic
        forces in accordance with seismic levels defined for each applicable project.


11.6   Special Ventilation  Requirements for Equipment
        Control of ventilation for the employee working environment must be provided by the equipment supplier.
        All indoor air quality requirements shall be in accordance with Chapter 5 of the Safety Manual.


11.7   Equipment Specifications
        Equipment specifications shall be developed for all equipment that does not have current guide
        specifications. All equipment specifications should permit procurement of the most current model of
        equipment through General Services Administration (GSA) services where possible. All equipment
        specifications should be developed to accommodate reputable vendors. Equip ment specifications should
        discuss the scope of services to be provided by mechanical and electrical contractors installing
        Government-furnished equipment.
                                                11-1

-------
July 2006                                                      Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                           Section 11 - Equipment

11.8    High-Technology Equipment
        Project-specific guidance should be obtained on high-technology equipment. Design shall be in accordance
        with selection and guidance of the respective manufacturers.


11.9    Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
        Refer to Sections 15 (Mechanical Requirements) and 16 (Electrical Requirements) of this Manual for
        information on mechanical and electrical equipment, respectively.


11.10 Equipment Consultants
        Use of an equipment consultant is recommended for defining and specifying what research equipment must
        be procured.  Such consultants shall also provide information on equipment during the design and
        construction document phases to assist in planning and documentation.

11.11 Procurement of Energy Efficent Equipment
        Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all
        federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See Addendum 1 to view
        FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient products.


END OF SECTION 11
                                              11-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                          July 2006
Section 12-Furnishings

                                 Section  12 - Furnishings

12.1   Furnishings

        EPA requires that environmental evaluation be added to the criteria for furniture selection, considering
        topics such as VOC emissions, manufacturing practices, materials origination, recycled content and
        packing/shipping considerations. This enhanced consideration is a core value in EPA's Environmentally
        Preferable Purchasing program.

        All major furniture items should consider the use of an environmental assessment of the manufacturing
        process  and chamber-testing of the furniture emissions, following a strict protocol. The testing protocol,
        chain-of-custody requirements, packing and shipping instructions, and the manufacturng assessment
        instrument used for the EPA Headquarters project are available on EPA's web site, at
        www. ep a. go v/greenin gep a.

        Furnishings are discussed in Chapter 6 of the Space Planning and Acquisition Guidelines (volume 1 of the
        EPA Facilities Manual).  Additional information on "Green" specifications for furniture can be obtained
        from the Sustainable Facilities Practices Branch (SFPB). Sample copies of Green Rider provisions are
        available to assist in determining Green furnishings.


END OF SECTION 12
                                                  12-1

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 13-Special Construction

                           Section  13 - Special Construction


13.1   Noise Control
        Noise levels in the different rooms of the facility should be in accordance with the American Society of
        Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) handbook, HVAC Systems and
        Applications, Chapter 52 (Sound and Vibration Control).  Proper schematic planning should isolate noise-
        sensitive areas from noise sources by separation with a nonsensitive buffer area. In addition, dedicated
        laboratory support spaces should be provided to isolate noise-producing equipment, such as centrifuges and
        vacuum pumps, from laboratories.  In any instrument or laboratory space in which one or more fume hoods
        are used, the noise level should be 55 or less decibels of sound measured on an A-scale (dBA) but shall not
        exceed 70 dBA at the working position in front of the hood.

        The combined noise resulting from several pieces of equipment shall not exceed 65 dBA when measured 3
        feet from any piece of equipment. Noise generated from vibration by heating, ventilation, and air-
        conditioning (HVAC) systems may be minimized by several means: judicious equipment selection;
        limitation of fluid flow velocities; isolation of key mechanical, piping, and ducting systems; and other
        prudent engineering and architectural means.

13.1.1   VIBRATION ISOLATION
        Vibration isolation systems should be provided on rotating mechanical equipment of greater than 1A
        horsepower (hp) (for equipment located within a critical area), greater than 5 hp (for other areas in the
        building), and greater than 10 hp (outside and within 200 feet of the building).  Reciprocating equipment
        (other than emergency equipment) shall not be used.  Vibrating equipment shall not be placed on top of
        buildings, unless no other locations are feasible. Vibrating equipment that must be mounted on the roof
        shall be placed directly over columns and on pads and springs to totally isolate the vibration from the
        building structure.

        •   Concrete inertia bases will be used with rotating mechanical equipment handling liquids (e.g., pumps)
            and with compressors. Steel frames will be used for air-handling equipment.

        •   Flexible pipe connectors (e.g., twin-sphere connectors) will be used on piping connecting to isolated
            equipment and where piping and ducting exit the mechanical room(s).

        •   Flexible duct connectors will be used in a manner similar to flexible piping connectors.

13.1.2   PIPING AND DUCTING S YSTEMS
        Passive piping and ducting systems are defined as those that are at a great distance from their energy source
        and have low flow rates and/or infrequent use (examples of such systems are city water, gases, and waste
        water). Conversely, active piping systems are defined as those that are close to energy sources and can
        constitute a major vibration problem requiring isolation.

            •   Active piping and ducting shall be  sized for economical flow velocities.

            •   Ducts that are less than 24 inches in diameter do not require isolation, provided that the flow
                velocities do not exceed 1,200 feet per minute. Ducting that does not meet this requirement shall
                be isolated.

            •   Active piping associated with HVAC (chilled water, condenser water, hot water,  steam, and
                refrigerant piping) within mechanical rooms, or at least 50 feet (whichever distance is greater)
                from connected vibration-isolated equipment (e.g., chillers, pumps, air handlers) or from the
                ground, shall be isolated from the building structure; resilient penetration sleeves shall be used
                where this piping penetrates walls. Flexible piping connectors shall be used where the piping
                                                  13-1

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

                leaves the mechanical room.  All active piping in the critical area having a diameter of 4 inches or
                less shall be isolated.

13.1.3   SOUND DAMPENING
        Sound dampening features (acoustical treatment), preferably of rigid materials, shall be provided in
        instrument rooms so that the noise level does not exceed 55 dBa.  If a hood is required in these rooms, the
        noise level shall not exceed 70 dBa at the face of the hood.
13.2   Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls
        Fire walls must be structurally independent and have sufficient structural stability under fire conditions to
        allow collapse of construction on either side of the firewall without collapse of the fire wall itself. The wall
        is also required to allow collapse of the structure on one side without compromising the integrity of the
        structure on the opposite side of the fire wall.  Fire walls differ from fire barrier walls, which do not require
        structural stability.  Fire barrier walls may rely on the building structure for support. Refer to National Fire
        Protection Association (NFPA) 221 for specific criteria related to fire walls and fire barrier walls.

13.2.1   FIRE WALLS
        Every fire wall shall be made of noncombustible material with the fire -resistance rating required by local
        codes for segregating the building into separate buildings or fire  areas.  Openings in fire walls shall be
        protected as noted in subsection 13.2.3 below.  Unprotected windows are not allowed in fire walls.

13.2.2   FIRE BARRIER WALLS
        Unless other fire-resistive construction is provided to create a complete enclosure on all sides, all fire
        barrier walls must extend from floor slab to floor slab or to roof deck. Openings in fire barrier walls shall
        be protected as noted in subsection 13.2.3 below.

13.2.3   OPENINGS
        Openings in fire walls and fire barrier walls shall be protected with fire -rated components capable of
        maintaining the fire -resistive integrity of the wall.  The minimum fire-resistance requirement for protection
        of openings in fire walls and fire barrier walls shall be the more restrictive of Chapter 8  of NFPA 101 (2000
        edition) and the state building code. Greater fire resistance may  be required by code requirements for
        specialized occupancies such as computer rooms and laboratories.  Fire window assemblies are allowed in
        fire barrier walls with a 1 -hour or lower fire -resistance rating.  The maximum allowed glazing area in
        windows shall be the maximum  area tested and shall be in accordance with NFPA 80. Refer to Chapter 2
        of the Safety Manual for restrictions on utilities penetrating required fireproofing.


13.3   Vertical Openings and  Shafts
        Fire-resistance ratings for enclosures of vertical openings and shafts shall conform to the requirements in
        NFPA 101, Chapter 8. Openings into vertical openings and shafts  shall be protected by  fire doors or fire
        dampers as outlined in subsection 13.3.2 and in Chapter 2, Fire Life Safety, of the Safety Manual.

13.3.1   ATRIUMS
        Atriums and other openings, where permitted by NFPA 101, NFPA 92, and the local building code, shall be
        protected in accordance with Chapter 8 of NFPA 101. In addition, exits shall be separately enclosed from
        the atrium. Access to exits is permitted to be within the atrium space.

13.3.2   SHAFTS
        When telephone  rooms, electrical closets, and similar spaces are located one above the other, the enclosure
        walls are considered to form a shaft, and protection shall be provided in accordance with the requirements
        of NFPA 101  and the local building code. Shafts shall not be installed between a structural member and
        the fireproofing for that member. If allowed by the local building code, all floor penetrations within

                                                   13-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 13-Special Construction

        telephone and electric closets can be sealed or otherwise grouted, in lieu of creating a shaft, to maintain the
        fire resistance of the floor assembly.

        Structural members passing through a shaft shall be fireproofed separately from the shaft enclosure so that
        the entire structural member is protected as required by the model building codes.  The fireproofing shall be
        of concrete, plaster, or other hard material that is resistant to mechanical damage and not subject to rusting
        or corrosion.

13.3.3   MONUMENTAL STAIRS
        Large, open stairs shall be protected by one of three methods.  If the stairs are not involved in the building
        exit requirements, they may extend one floor above and one floor below the main entrance lobby, provided
        that fire partitions and self-closing fire doors are installed at the upper and lower levels.  Alternatively, they
        may be protected as a vertical  opening in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 8 of NFPA 101
        (2000 edition).  If the stairs  are part of the exit system, they must be protected as outlined in Chapter 7 of
        NFPA 101 (2000 edition).

13.3.4   ESCALATORS
        Escalators shall be treated in the same manner as monumental stairs with the additional option of using
        curtain boards and  sprinkler protection as detailed in NFPA 13.

13.3.5   PENETRATIONS
        Openings around penetrations in vertical openings and shafts shall be fire-stopped  as described in
        subsection 13.3.2 above.
13.4   Fire Protection

13.4.1   GENERAL
        The decision to install sprinkler protection in the facility shall be based on NFPA 101, NFPA 45, the Safety
        Manual, state and local codes, and the project criteria, whichever is most stringent. All sprinkler systems
        shall comply with NFPA 13 and be approved by Factory Mutual or another nationally recognized insurance
        company.  Special protection systems may be used to extinguish or control fire in easily ignited, fast-
        burning substances such as flammable liquids,  some gases, and some chemicals. Such protection systems
        shall also be used to protect ordinary combustibles in certain high-value occupancies that are especially
        susceptible to damage.  Special protection systems supplement automatic sprinklers as described by NFPA
        and shall not be used as a substitute for them except where water is not available for sprinkler protection.
        Hal on systems shall not be used unless directed by the project criteria.

13.4.2   WATER SUPPLIES
        Except as noted below, every building shall be provided, at a minimum, with a water supply that is
        available for use by fire department mobile pumping apparatus. The water supply shall normally be
        provided by fire hydrants suitable for firefighting apparatus and located within 5 feet of paved roadways.
        The hydrants shall be supplied from a dependable  public or private water main system. Alternative water
        supplies shall be developed in accordance with NFPA 1142.  Other water supplies shall be available to
        buildings where fire protection requires them.  Fire protection water does not have to meet drinking water
        standards.

        The water supply system shall provide ample water for each of the three types of fire protection water use:
        outside fire department hose streams from hydrants, small and large hose streams from inside-building
        standpipe or hose connections,  and automatic sprinkler systems. The minimum requirements for each type
        of water use shall not be cumulative or additive and are determined as described below.
                                                   13-3

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

13.4.2.1     FIRE DEPARTMENT HOSE STREAMS
            The hose stream required shall be determined by using the needed fire flow calculation method
            outlined in Section 300 of the Fire Suppression Rating Schedule of the Insurance Service Office. The
            needed fire flow shall be based on the fire areas of the building, not on the entire area of the building.
            The fire flow for the fire area requiring the greatest water flow shall be the needed fire flow for the
            building.

13.4.2.2     STANDPIPE HOSE STREAM
            When standpipe systems are provided or required, the minimum water supply shall be in accordance
            with NFPA 14 and the local building code and shall be based on the number of standpipe risers
            provided in the building or in each fire  area.

13.4.2.3     AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS
            The minimum flow required to meet the needs of the automatic sprinkler system shall be determined
            by hydraulic calculations as required for sprinkler system designs. The water supply requirements
            shall include all sprinkler flow and required hose stream allowances outlined in NFPA 13.

13.4.3       SIZE AND ZONING
            The sprinkler system main shall be sized to meet the fire flow and pressure requirements set by the
            local authority.  Fire pump(s) shall be provided, if needed, and shall be installed in a separate room
            along with the  sprinkler system main valves.  Sprinkler system protection zones shall have the  same
            boundaries as the fire alarm system fire zones. Each sprinkler system protection zone shall be
            equipped with electrically supervised control valves and water flow alarm switches connected  to the
            fire alarm system.

13.4.4       SYSTEMS
            Fire protection systems must meet the following requirements.

13.4.4.1     AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER PROTECTION
            Automatic sprinkler protection shall be provided in all new EPA facilities. All sprinkler systems shall
            be hydraulically calculated in accordance with NFPA 13.  All design documents, including the
            hydraulic calculations, must be maintained at the building to facilitate future modifications of the
            sprinkler system An analysis shall be performed to justify new facilities with no sprinkler protection.
            The provision of sprinkler protection (when not required by another code  or standard) shall not be used
            as a basis for reducing other levels of protection provided for that facility. However, where a code or
            standard allows alternatives based on the provision of sprinklers, as in NFPA 101, the alternatives
            allowed for sprinklered space may be applied.

            Existing facilities shall be provided with sprinkler protection under the following circumstances:

            •   In major modifications to existing laboratories that use chemicals, flammable liquids, or explosive
                materials.

            •   Throughout all floors of any building where EPA occupancy is 75 feet high or higher. The height
                shall be measured from the lowest  point of fire department access to the floor level of the highest
                occupiable story.

            •   Throughout occupancies exceeding the area or height limitations allowed by the local building
                code.

            •   In all areas below grade that meet the definition of "windowless" in local code.
                                                   13-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 13-Special Construction

            •   In all areas that contain a high-severity occupancy as defined by the General Services
                Administration (GSA).

            •   Throughout windowless buildings, windowless floors of buildings, and windowless areas that
                exceed the allowable limits of the local building code.

            •   In cooling towers of combustible construction under the conditions described in subsection 15.5.5.

            •   In any location where the maximum fire potential of the occupancy exceeds the fire -resistance
                capabilities of exposed live-load-bearing structural elements (e.g., when a flammable -liquids
                operation is moved into a former office area).

            •   Throughout open-plan office space that has a fuel load in excess of 6 pounds per square foot.

            •   Throughout electronic equipment operation areas, including data storage areas. On/off type
                sprinkler heads and sprinkler guards may be used to minimize water damage in these areas.

13.4.4.2     WET PIPE
            Sprinkler systems shall normally be wet pipe. Hydraulic designs shall be performed for all systems.

13.4.4.3     DRY PIPE
            In unheated areas or other areas subject to freezing temperatures, dry-pipe systems shall be provided.
            Because of the time delays associated with the release of the air in the system, water demands for dry-
            pipe systems shall be computed on the  basis of areas 30 percent greater than those used to computer
            demands for comparable wet-pipe systems. Where the unheated area is small, it may be cost-effective
            to install  an antifreeze system or a small dry-pipe system supplied from the wet-pipe system in the
            main heated area.

13.4.4.4     PREACTION
            A preaction system shall be used where it is particularly important to prevent the accidental discharge
            of water.  Each laboratory room must be provided with a preaction system with an individual isolation
            valve. The need for a preaction system shall be determined on the basis of review by, and
            recommendation of, a AEAMB professional fire protection engineer. The detection system chosen to
            activate the preaction valve shall have a high reliability and shall be equipment with a separate
            alarm/supervisory signal to indicate status.  The detection system must be designed to be  more
            sensitive than the closed sprinklers in the preaction system but should not be so sensitive as to cause
            false alarms and unnecessary actuation of the preaction valve.

13.4.4.5     DELUGE
            For extra hazard areas and specific hard-to-extinguish fuels such as explosives and pyrophoric metals,
            a deluge  system with open sprinkler heads may be used to wet down the entire protected area
            simultaneously. Deluge systems shall comply with NFPA 13.  If quick response is required, deluge
            system piping may be primed with water. The nozzles must be provided with blow-off caps for water-
            filled deluge systems.

13.4.4.6     SELF-RESTORING
            Self-restoring sprinkler systems, such as the on/off multicycle system or systems using individual
            on/off sprinkler heads, shall be  considered where the water from sprinklers will become contaminated
            by contact with room contents,  where there is a concern about water damage, or where water supply or
            storage volume is marginal.
                                                   13-5

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

13.4.4.7     QUICK RESPONSE
            Quick-response sprinklers must be used in new installations except where prohibited.  Other
            specialized automatic sprinklers, such as large drop, early-suppression fast-response, or extended-
            coverage heads, are acceptable for use in sprinkler systems. The use of specialized sprinklers is
            appropriate when a higher level of protection is desired or an equivalent level of protection is
            necessary to compensate for failure to meet other code requirements. Use of specialized sprinkler
            heads should be limited to applications for which they have been specifically listed (e.g., UL, FM).

13.4.4.8     WATER SPRAY
            Installation of water spray systems shall comply with NFPA 15.

13.4.4.9     CARBON DIOXIDE
            Agent quantity requirements and installation procedures shall comply with NFPA 12.

13.4.4.10    DRY CHEMICAL
            Systems shall comply with NFPA  17.

            •   Design requirements.  Systems shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 17 and NFPA 96.
                Discharge of dry chemical shall actuate a pressure switch connected to an alarm in the building
                fire alarm system. Refer to Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for fire alarm
                requirements.

            •   Acceptance tests. After installation, all mechanical and electrical equipment shall be tested to
                ensure correct operation and function.  When all necessary corrections have been made, a full
                discharge test shall be conducted. Plastic or cotton bags shall be attached to each individual
                nozzle, and the system activated. Cooking appliance nozzles must discharge at least 2 pounds of
                the agent, and duct or plenum nozzles must discharge at least 5 pounds of the agent.
                Preengineered systems that fail to discharge these amounts will be considered unsatisfactory.

13.4.4.11    FOAM
            Foam systems shall comply with NFPA 11, NFPA 11A, NFPA 16, NFPA 16A, and NFPA 409.

13.4.4.12    STANDPIPES AND HOSE SYSTEMS
            NFPA 45 requires the installation of standpipe and hose systems in all laboratory buildings that are two
            or more stories above or below the grade level.  Installation of standpipe systems shall comply with
            NFPA 14.  If local building fire code requirements dictate the installation of hose systems, hose
            systems shall comply with NFPA 14 and shall be pressure tested annually in  accordance with the
            methods presented in NFPA  1962.

13.4.4.13    PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
            Portable fire extinguishers shall comply with NFPA 10 except that halon extinguishers shall not be
            placed in any EPA facility. See Section 10, Specialties, of this Manual for more information on
            portable fire extinguishers.

13.4.4.14    HALON-1301 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
            Fire protection systems that contain halon-1301 (CFsBr, a halogenated hydrocarbon) shall not be
            installed in new EPA facilities. Existing systems that use halon-1301 should be removed from service
            in accordance with Title VI of the  1990 Clean Air Act Amendments. The hardware may be left in
            place in anticipation of an environmentally acceptable replacement. This policy applies to both fixed
            and portable systems.  The halon recovered from systems should be made available through the Halon
            Recycling Corporation (1 -800-258-1283). Refer to the Environmental Management Guidelines for
            information on removal of halon systems from EPA-owned or -leased facilities. Refer also to the list


                                                  13-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 13-Special Construction

            of acceptable halon substitutes approved under the significant new alternatives policy (SNAP)
            (published by EPA's Office of Air and Radiation Stratospheric Protection Division).

13.4.4.15    GASEOUS FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
            While carbon dioxide systems are allowed in normally occupied spaces, it is recommended that their
            use as a total flooding agent be limited to areas that are usually not occupied. Any carbon dioxide
            automatic extinguishing system that is to be used in usually occupied spaces must be reviewed and
            approved by AEAMB and SHEMD and must meet the design requirements of NFPA 12 and 29 CFR
            §1910.162(b)(5).  A number of clean-agent, gaseous fire-extinguishing systems are becoming available
            as an alternative to halon and carbon dioxide systems, among these FM-200 and Inergen. Because of
            the unique nature and limited approvals for these new systems, any design and installation shall be
            certified by a licensed professional engineer in the state and approved by the authority having
            jurisdiction. The certification must include a detailed analysis of the hazards to be protected against;
            any limitations on, or exclusions of, hazardous chemicals that may be protected against by the design;
            and documentation to support the design concentration of the agent.  The installation of such a system
            shall meet the requirements described  below.

            •   Design requirements. Systems shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 2001 and other
                applicable standards for the hazard to be protected against.  Discharge of a system shall actuate a
                pressure switch or other device connected to initiate an alarm in the building fire alarm system.
                Refer to Section 16, Electrical Requirements, of this Manual for fire alarm requirements.

            •   Acceptance tests.  After installation,  all mechanical and electrical equipment shall be tested to
                ensure correct operation and function. All approval or acceptance testing shall be performed in
                accordance with Section 4-7 of NFPA 2001.

13.4.4.16    WET CHEMICAL SYSTEMS
            Wet chemical systems are generally pre -engineered and are primarily used to protect exhaust  hoods,
            plenums, ducts and associated cooking equipment such as deep fat fryers and grills.  Refer to NFPA
            17A for technical requirements, applications, and specifications.

13.4.5       OPERATION
            Operation and maintenance instructions and system layouts shall be posted at the control equipment.
            All personnel who may be expected to inspect, test, maintain, or operate fire protection apparatus shall
            be thoroughly trained and kept trained in the functions they are expected to perform.

13.4.6       CODES
            In addition to meeting the code requirements mentioned in the above subsections, the design shall be
            approved by the local authority having jurisdiction over the project.


END OF SECTION 13
                                                   13-7

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 14 - Conveying Systems

                            Section 14 - Conveying Systems


14.1   General
        Elevators, dumbwaiters, escalators, and moving walks shall be in accordance with American National
        Standards Institute (ANSI) Standard A17.1.  Other requirements are described below.


14.2   Elevators

14.2.1   ELEVATOR RECALL
        All automatic elevators having a travel distance of 25 feet or more shall be recalled when any fire alarm-
        initiating device, such as elevator lobby smoke detectors, manual fire alarm stations, or sprinkler system
        waterflow switches, is activated. All elevators must be recalled when the recall system is activated. Smoke
        detectors other than those required by ANSI A17.1 shall not initiate automatic elevator recall.

14.2.2   SMOKE DETECTORS
        Smoke detectors shall be provided for every elevator lobby, including the main lobby. Smoke detectors
        that activate the automatic elevator recall are also required in the elevator machine rooms. Elevator lobby
        smoke detectors should not initiate the building fire alarm system but shall send an alarm to the fire
        department or central station service and shall activate the elevator recall system.

14.2.3   CAPTURE FLOOR
        An alternate capture floor shall be provided in accordance with Rule 211. 3b(2)  of ANSI A17.1. Activation
        of an alarm-initiating device on the main capture floor shall return the elevators to the alternate capture
        floor.

14.2.4   SIGNAGE
        Signs must be placed in the elevator lobbies next to all elevators to inform occupants not to use the
        elevators if there is  a fire.

14.2.5   CHEMICAL TRANSPORT  USE
        If elevators are used to transport chemicals, provisions shall be made to ensure that nonlaboratory
        personnel and space (administrative or business occupancies) are not exposed to or contaminated by
        chemical substances. For example, chemicals must be packaged in accordance with U.S. Department of
        Transportation (DOT) specifications,  or an alternative route of transport must be provided. This alternative
        route may include an elevator opening into a vestibule separate from administrative or business
        occupancies, a multiple-door elevator entering into a laboratory, separate dumbwaiters, or alternate
        corridors or routes.  A combination of these options can be used to achieve this  goal.


14.3   Escalators
        Escalators shall be treated in the same manner as monumental stairs with an additional option of providing
        curtain boards and sprinkler protection as detailed in National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 13.


END OF SECTION 14
                                                  14-1

-------

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                         July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

                       Section  15 - Mechanical Requirements


15.1    General
        The design professional shall be responsible for ensuring that all mechanical systems conform to the
        requirements of this section and that all systems are installed and operating in accordance with all
        governing codes, ordinances, and regulations; the most current edition of applicable publications; and as set
        forth below. The design professional is responsible for the design of all mains, lines, meters, and other
        mechanical components required for utility services.  The building mechanical systems shall provide a safe
        and suitable environment both for occupants and for functional operation of the facility, and shall meet
        EPA's energy conservation and atmospheric emissions goals.


15.2   References
        All work discussed in this section shall comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local codes,
        regulations, ordinances, publications, and manuals. When codes or publications conflict, the most stringent
        standard shall govern.  Unless otherwise specified in this Manual or approved by the Architecture,
        Engineering and Asset Management Branch (AEAMB) and the Safely, Health and Environmental
        Management Division (SHEMD), all mechanical system installations shall conform to the standards listed
        below:

            •   Installation of Oil Burning Equipment (NFPA 31)
            •   Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines (NFPA 37)
            •   Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals  (NFPA 45)
            •   National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA 54)
            •   Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (NFPA 58)
            •   Storage and Handling of Liquefied Natural Gas (NFPA 59A)
            •   Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment (NFPA 75)
            •   Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A)
            •   Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials (NFPA 91)
            •   Smoke Control Systems (NFPA 92A)
            •   Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial  Cooking Operations (NFPA 96)
            •   Water Cooling Towers (NFPA 214)
            •   Elevators, Dumbwaiters, Escalators, and Moving Walks (ANSI A17.1)
            •   Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI/ASHRAE 62)
            •   Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment (ANSI Z358.1)
            •   Fundamentals Governing the Design and Operation of Local Exhaust Systems (ANSI/American
               Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) Z9.2)
            •   Laboratory Ventilation (ANSI/ASHRAE Z9.5)
            •   Protecting Building Environment from Airborne Chemical, Biological, or Radiological Attacks
               (OHHS/NIOSH Publication 2002-139)
            •   Procedures for Certifying Laboratory Fume Hoods To Meet EPA Standards
            •   Safety  Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (ANSI/ASHRAE 15)
            •   Method for Testing Performance of L aboratory Fume Hoods (ANSI/ASHRAE 110)
            •   Building Air Quality: EPA  Guide for Building Owners  and Facility Managers, EPA/400/1-91/033
               or December 1991
            •   Industrial Ventilation: A Manual of Recommended Practice, American Conference of Government
               Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH)
            •   Prudent Practices in the Laboratory:  Handling and Disposal of Chemicals, National Research
               Council, 1995
            •   National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) standard 49 for Biohazard Safety Cabinets.

                                                 15-1

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                    Section 15- Mechanical Requirements
            •   NSF standard 61 Drinking Water System Components.
            •   Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005.
15.3       Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning Design Criteria
            A heating, ventilation and air-conditioning (HVAC) system that will satisfy the requirements indicated
            in this document shall be provided.

15.3.1       GENERAL
            Building HVAC systems and subsystems shall be evaluated, and major HVAC equipment components
            shall be selected, on the basis of a consideration of health and safety requirements, occupant comfort,
            attributed atmospheric emissions, initial costs, operating costs, and maintenance costs. A life cycle
            cost analysis (LCCA) shall be performed using the National Institute of Standards and Technology
            (NIST) Handbook 135 "Life -Cycle Costing Manual for the Federal Energy Management Program" to
            select the most cost-effective HVAC system. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires
            that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or
            FEMP-designated products. See sections 2.0 (Commercial and Industrial Equipment) and 4.0
            (Appliances) of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient heating,
            ventilation, and air-conditioning systems.

15.3.2       VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
            Indoor space shall meet the EPA National Ambient Air Quality Standards and the ventilation rates
            established in ASHRAE 62-2001. Design air quantities and transport velocities shall be calculated
            according to the methods prescribed in the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment, the
            ASHRAE Applications Handbook, and the ACGIHIndustrial Ventilation manual.

15.3.2.1     LABORATORY VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
            Laboratories must comply with unique ventilation requirements in accordance with the latest version
            of ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 and NFPA 45. The HVAC system for the sections of the laboratory building
            (including corridors) where the laboratory and laboratory support rooms are located shall be designed
            with  100 percent outside air ventilation systems with exhaust through hoods where hoods are used.
            These sections of the laboratory building, as well as the hazardous chemical storage building, shall
            have an independent air handling unit(s). Under no circumstances will the air supplied to any
            laboratory space be recirculated to any other space. HVAC systems should be continuously
            operational 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, summer and winter.  Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act
            of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal  agencies procure either
            Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See sections 2.0 (Commercial and Industrial Equipment)
            and 4.0 (Appliances) of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient
            heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning systems.  The general exhaust and special instrument canopy
            hoods in these sections and in the hazardous chemical storage building shall be constant volume at all
            times; the only exceptions are to accommodate variable air volume (VAV) systems or two-flow (night
            setback) systems.

            Minimum airflow requirement to be maintained in a  laboratory is 25 cfm per square foot of laboratory
            fume hood (LFH) work surface with the sash closed or four air changes per hour for an unoccupied
            laboratory during night time, weekend or holiday setback, or calculated to prevent concentration of
            volatile vapors at or above 25 percent of their lower flammable/explosive limit (LEL) within the hood;
            and not less than eight air changes per hour during occupied hours. Specifications for controls and
            monitoring devices for exhaust and air-handling units should be consistent with these minimum
            airflow requirements. The exhaust requirements of LFHs and other exhaust devices, as well as the
            temperature and humidity requirements, shall  override  laboratory minimum air changes per hour.
                                                  15-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            Laboratory spaces shall be designed to maintain a pressurization level relative to other common spaces
            that is appropriate for the type of work performed in each laboratory and is negative to the laboratory
            corridor and non-laboratory spaces.  Levels of pressurization shall be project specific.

15.3.2.2     ADDITIONAL SPECIAL VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS
            All processes, operations, or other situations that present the possibility of hazardous accumulation of
            combustible or explosive vapors, dust, fumes, or other airborne substances shall be provided with
            ventilation in accordance with NFPA 91 and NFPA 45 and shall be 100 percent exhausted to
            atmosphere outside the building. To avoid re -entrainment, design for exhaust systems shall conform to
            ASHRAE 52-76 and ACGIH'sIndustrial Ventilation. Project criteria shall indicate other areas of
            nonrecirculation. Air from adjacent spaces can be used as the ventilation supply air for the 100 percent
            exhausted spaces, as long as:

            •   Ventilation by this method does not violate  any requirements of ANSI Z9.5, NFPA 45, NFPA
                90A, or NFPA 101 or special space pressurization requirements.

            •   The air supplied is not potentially more hazardous than the air from the space being exhausted.

            •   Adjacent spaces are not laboratory or specialty spaces requiring once-through ventilation.

            In addition, the following spaces have special ventilation considerations:

            •   Restrooms, janitor closets, garbage rooms, and other malodorous spaces shall be exhausted to
                atmosphere outside the building at a rate of not less than 50 cfm per toilet or urinal, and as
                specified in ASHRAE 62 or in local building codes, whichever is more stringent, regardless of any
                other calculated ventilation requirements.

            •   Commercial cooking equipment used in processes that produce smoke or grease shall be designed
                and protected in accordance with NFPA 96.  Any insulation shall be of noncombustible materials.
                If other utilities are included in a vertical shaft with the grease duct, they shall not be  insulated or
                lined with combustible materials.

            •   Mechanical and electrical equipment rooms shall be exhausted so that room temperature does not
                exceed National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) equipment ratings. The project
                criteria shall establish the space temperature limits. Where mechanical ventilation cannot
                maintain a satisfactory environment, evaporative cooling systems (indirect evaporative cooling for
                electrical rooms) or other mechanical cooling systems shall be provided. Exhaust air openings
                should be located  adjacent to heat-producing equipment to minimize ambient thermal loads.
                Thermostatic controls shall be used to operate the ventilation and exhaust systems.

            •   Equipment rooms containing refrigeration equipment  shall be ventilated in accordance with
                ASHRAE standard 15. For all equipment rooms with fuel-burning appliances or equipment,
                combustion air for these appliances and this equipment shall be drawn d irectly from the outside, in
                accordance with the International  Building Code, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
                codes, and the ASHRAE Guide and Data Books.

15.3.3       EQUIPMENT DESIGN TEMPERATURES

15.3.3.1     INSIDE DESIGN TEMPERATURES
            Environmental design temperatures and relative  humidity for special space uses other than those listed
            here shall be designated in the project  criteria. The design temperatures shall be 5 degrees Fahrenheit
            (°F) lower for cooling, and 5°F higher for heating, than the required operating temperature.


                                                   15-3

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            When space cooling is required, the inside design temperature for maintaining personnel comfort shall
            be 70°F, dry bulb (db), unless otherwise indicated in project criteria.  The relative humidity shall be 50
            percent. Summer humidification shall not be provided for personnel comfort. Cooling systems shall
            be designed to maintain the relative humidity conditions of space through the normal cooling process
            and should not have controls that limit the maximum relative humidity unless system type or project-
            specific criteria dictate.

            The inside design wintertime temperature for personnel comfort shall be 72°F db unless otherwise
            indicated here or directed by other project-specific criteria. All storage areas shall have a minimum
            temperature of 40°F to prevent freezing. Except where it can be substantiated from records or
            engineering computations that the inside relative humidity will be less than 30 percent, winter
            humidification for personnel comfort and health shall not be provided. Where such a condition has
            been substantiated, a design relative humidity of 30 percent shall be used in establishing minimum
            requirements for humidification equipment.

15.3.3.2     OUTSIDE DESIGN TEMPERATURES
            The HVAC system equipment shall be designed by using the outside design temperatures shown in
            Table 15.3.3.2, Outside Design Conditions, for the particular application. The percentages of dry bulb
            (db) and wet bulb (wb) temperatures are derived from the sources of tabulated weather data described
            below. When data for a particular location are not listed, design conditions shall be estimated from
            data available at nearby weather stations or by interpolation between values from stations, taking into
            account elevation and other local conditions affecting design data.  Weather data for use in  sizing
            HVAC equipment shall be obtained from the local weather station and/or the ASHRAE Handbook of
            Fundamentals.
Table 15.3.3.2  Outside Design Conditions	
        Winter                      Summer                                 Application
99% to 99.6% db      1% to 0.4% db and mean coincident wb  Process, laboratory, and other uses where close
                                                           temperature and humidity control is required by
                                                           project criteria
97.5 to 99% db         2.5 to 1.0% db and mean coincident wb  Personnel comfort systems
                      1% wb                                Cooling towers* and research, technical-type
                                                           systems
	1 % db plus 5EF	Air-cooled condensers*	
*Temperature should be verified by reviewing actual site conditions.
15.3.3.3     EVAPORATIVE/ADIABATIC COOLING
            In locations where a wide variation exists between the dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures for extended
            periods of time, evaporative/adiabatic cooling shall be considered for the applications listed below.
            Selection of cooler types shall depend on system configuration, user experience, and LCCA. All
            evaporative coolers shall maintain a positive water-bleed and water-makeup system for control of
            mineral buildup.

            Applications for which evaporating adiabatic cooling are considered include warehouses, shops that do
            not require close (within 5°F plus or minus) temperature control, nonresidential-size kitchens, makeup
            air ventilation units, and mechanical equipment spaces.
                                                   15-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            Air duct design, number and location of coolers, and relief of the higher rate of air supply to the
            atmosphere shall be considered as means of ensuring a satisfactory operating system. Multistage
            evaporative cooling systems shall also be considered.

            Indoor design dry bulb temperatures for spaces that are air-conditioned by adiabatic cooling systems
            shall be as specified in project-specific criteria. Design operating efficiency of adiabatic cooling
            equipment shall be at least 70 percent. System-installed capacity shall be based on the peak design
            cooling load for the air-conditioned space.  An arbitrary air-change rate shall not be used for design
            airflow. Adiabatic cooler specifications shall be stated in terms of the air capacity, the entering
            ambient dry  and wet bulb temperatures, and the leaving dry bulb temperature.

15.3.4       EQUIPMENT SIZING
            HVAC equipment shall be sized to satisfy the  building and cooling load requirements and to meet all
            equipment design and selection criteria contained in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and
            Equipment, HVAC Applications, and Refrigeration handbooks. The capacity of central heating,
            refrigeration, and ventilation equipment shall be set for the peak block building or the maximum
            simultaneous zone  heating and cooling design loads and in accordance with the ASHRAE Handbook of
            Fundamentals. The equipment shall not be sized for future additional capacity or to provide
            redundancy unless  indicated in project-specific criteria.  Individual zone equipment shall be sized
            according to the peak zone load.

15.3.5       LOAD CALCULATIONS
            Load calculations shall be based on data and procedures outlined in the ASHRAE handbooks and shall
            be in accordance with the conditions specified in this Manual. Load calculations may be performed
            manually or by a nationally recognized computer-based load program.  Specialty programs that are not
            recognized must be approved by the contracting officer prior to use. If a separate auxiliary air system
            is provided, the auxiliary air must be heated and cooled to within the room dry bulb temperature.
            Auxiliary air shall not exceed 70 percent of total fume hood exhaust requirements.

15.3.6       WASTE HEAT RECOVERY
            Energy conservation and waste heat recovery systems shall be considered and designed according to
            the procedures outlined in specific chapters of the ASHRAE Fundamentals, Systems and Equipment,
            Applications, and Refrigeration handbooks, and the Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors
            National Association  (SMACNA) Energy Recovery Equipment and Systems Manual. The following
            types of heat-recovery methods and systems shall be considered for incorporation into the building
            HVAC system design where appropriate.

                •   Use of heat pipe or coil runaround systems for heating and air-conditioning air-handling
                    systems. Use of rotary heat wheel heat exchange is not permitted in laboratory fume hood,
                    laboratory, or laboratory support area exhaust systems. Rotary heat wheels may be used in
                    administrative area exhaust systems.

                •   Recovery  of rejected heat from the condenser systems of central station cooling equipment for
                    use in heating the remainder of the building (when the central station cooling equipment must
                    operate during the heating season to cool computer rooms or high internal gain areas or to
                    meet process requirements).

                •   Use of exhaust heat from the condenser systems of continuously operated refrigeration
                    equipment for space heating or domestic hot-water heating.

                •   Use of a free cooling system that uses cooling tower water (water-side economizer) when air-
                    side economizer systems are not feasible.
                                                  15-5

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

                •   Use of a heat pump run-around loop.

15.3.7       ENERGY EFFICIENCY
            After a careful study of the facility' s requirements as well as of the day-to-day operation of its various
            departments has been made, systems shall be designed that meet the operating requirements in an
            energy-efficient manner. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act  of 2005 requires that, when procuring
            energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated
            products. See sections 2.0 (Commercial and Industrial Equipment) and 4.0 (Appliances) of Addendum
            1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient heating, ventilation, and air-
            conditioning systems.  The local utility companies shall be contacted to evaluate the attributed
            atmospheric emissions and the system dollar credits for load shifting to off-peak times. The health and
            safety aspects of the operation must be given first priority, and they cannot be relaxed or traded off for
            greater efficiency.


15.4       Automatic Control Systems

15.4.1       GENERAL
            This subsection covers automatic temperature and humidity controls, space pressurization controls,
            safety controls, and energy monitoring and central supervisory control systems. A complete automatic
            control system shall be designed by an HVAC controls design engineer with experience in designing
            systems of this type and complexity. A commissioning plan shall be submitted to and approved by
            EPA prior to the commissioning of the control system.

            The final product shall be a complete, reliable, fully functional,  maintainable, fully integrated,
            addressable, control system that has been properly designed, installed, and commissioned.  In existing
            facilities, the design shall be integrated and interfaced into the existing control system so that the new
            equipment and conditions can be controlled and monitored similar to the existing controlled
            equipment.

            Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring  energy consuming
            products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See sections
            2.0 (Commercial and Industrial Equipment) and 4.0 (Appliances) of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's
            purchasing specifications for energy efficient heating, ventilation,  and air-conditioning systems.

15.4.1.1     TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
            The control system shall be a direct digital control (DDC) system reflecting  the latest technology that
            has been widely accepted by the control industry. DDC systems shall be electric/electronic only.
            Pneumatics shall not be allowed except in instances when the existing controls absolutely require that
            the new controls be pneumatic. The system shall be complete and suitable for the HVAC systems to
            be installed.  The DDC system shall be compatible with any existing systems in the facility or shall be
            able to completely and seamlessly interface with the existing central control  and monitoring system
            (CCMS) network. All control points, including the VAV controllers, shall be fully compatible with the
            CCMS, allowing complete monitoring, control, and setpoint adjustment of all points and VAV
            terminal unit controllers from the CCMS host. Outside air quantity to each air handling unit shall be
            automatically controlled at a volume to meet the requirements of ASHRAE  Standard 62-2001.
            Typical points to be monitored and controlled include:

            •   Air Handling Units
                        •   Leaving air temperature
                        •   Entering air temperature
                        •   Entering chilled water temperature
                        •   Leaving chilled water temperature

                                                  15-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

                        •   Entering hot water temperature
                        •   Leaving hot water temperature
                        •   Temperature and humidity in each xme
                        •   Fan speed indication
                        •   Filter differential pressure
                        •   Supply air quantity
                        •   Outside air quantity

            •   Central Plant
                        •   Chiller on-off (each chiller)
                        •   Chilled water temperature in and out
                        •   Chiller status
                        •   Boiler on-off (each boiler)
                        •   Hot water temperature in and out
                        •   Boiler status
                        •   Steam-HW heat exchanger, water temperature in and out
                        •   Pump on-off indication, each pump
                        •   Cooling Tower fan speed
                        •   Condenser water temperature in and out
                        •   Steam pressure and temperature

            •   Variable Air Volume Zones (through VAV unit controller)
                        •   Zone temperature
                        •   Zone primary air flowrate (supply and exhaust volumes, CFM)
                        •   Zone temperature setpoint

            •   Alarm Print Outs
                        •   Chiller failure to start
                        •   Air handling unit fan failure
                        •   Zone space temperature rise to 5 degrees (F) above set point
                        •   Chilled water rise 5 degrees  above set point
                        •   Hot water fall 5 degrees below set point
                        •   Zone RH 5% above set point
                        •   Pump failure.
                        •   Water on Floor of Mechanical Room
                        •   Laboratory fume hood sash position and hood alarm condition

            •   Points to be Controlled:
                        •   Start/stop chillers/chilled water pumps
                        •   Reset chilled water temperature
                        •   Start/stop boilers/hot water pumps
                        •   Reset hot water temperature
                        •   Start/stop air handling units
                        •   Start/stop exhaust and supply fans
                        •   Setpoint adjust - all controllers with setpoints
                        •   Enable/disable economizer cycles
                        •   Setpoint adjust - all VAV zone

15.4.1.2     CODES AND STANDARDS
            The following codes and standards shall be referenced as applicable:
            •   ASHRAE 135-1995:  BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and
                Control Networks. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers,
                Inc.  1995 including Addendums A through E

                                                  15-7

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            •   UL 916, Energy Management Systems
            •   NEMA 250, Enclosure for Electrical Equipment
            •   NEMA ICS 1:  General Standards for Industrial Controls
            •   NFPA 45, Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
            •   NFPA 90A, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (where
                applicable to controls and control sequences)
            •   NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

15.4.1.3     CONTROL SYSTEM SUBMISSION
            The design submission shall include complete control system drawings, complete technical
            specifications, and commissioning procedures for each control system.  As a minimum, the following
            documentation shall be required for review by proper EPA officials:

            HVAC Control System Drawings: Each control system element on a drawing shall have a unique
            identifier. The HVAC control system drawings shall be delivered together as a complete submittal.

            HVAC control system drawings shall include the following: drawing index, HVAC control system
            legend, valve schedule, damper schedule, control system schematic and equipment schedule, sequence
            of operation and data terminal strip layout, control loop wiring diagrams, motor starter and relay
            wiring diagram, communication network and block diagram, DDC panel installation and block
            diagram.

            •   The HVAC control system drawing index shall show the name and number of the building, state
                or other similar designation, and country. The HVAC control system legend shall show generic
                symbols and the name of devices shown on the HVAC control system drawings.

            •   The valve schedule shall include each valve's unique identifier, size, flow coefficient Cv, pressure
                drop at specified flow rate, spring range, actuator size, close-off pressure data, dimensions, and
                access and clearance requirements data.

            •   The damper schedule shall contain each damper's and each actuator's identifier, nominal and
                actual sizes, orientation of axis and frame, direction of blade rotation, locations of actuators and
                damper end switches, arrangement of sections in multi-section dampers, and methods of
                connecting dampers, actuators, and linkages.  The damper schedule shall include the maximum
                leakage rate at the operating static-pressure differential.  The damper schedule shall contain
                actuator selection data supported by calculations of the torque required to move and seal the
                dampers, access and clearance requirements.

            •   The HVAC control system schematics shall show all control and mechanical devices associated
                with the HVAC system. A system schematic drawing shall be submitted for each HVAC system.

            •   The HVAC control system equipment schedule shall be in the form shown.  All devices shown on
                the drawings having unique identifiers shall be referenced in the equipment schedule.  An
                equipment schedule shall be submitted for each HVAC system.

            •   Sequences of operation shall be submitted for each HVAC control system including each type of
                terminal unit control system.  A complete sequence of operation shall be included on the drawings
                along with a schematic control diagram for each typical system.  The sequence of operation and
                schematic control diagrams shall specifically cover the following items and others as the project
                requires.

                1)  Refrigeration compressor control
                2)  Refrigeration system protective devices
                                                  15-8

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

                3)  Chilled, DX and hot water control
                4)  Water coil or evaporator control, temperature and/or humidity as required
                5)  Cooling tor or air-cooled condenser control
                6)  Air handling unit control with protective devices
                7)  Individual unit control
                8)  Motor interlocks with system, starting and stopping instruction
                9)  All thermostat, humidistat, and protective device control settings

            •   The HVAC control system wiring diagrams shall be functional wiring diagrams which show the
                interconnection of conductors and cables to HVAC control panel terminal blocks and to the
                identified terminals of devices, starters and package equipment. The wiring diagrams shall show
                necessary jumpers and ground connections.  The wiring diagrams shall show the labels of all
                conductors.  Sources of power required for HVAC control systems and for packaged equipment
                control systems shall be identified back to the panel board circuit breaker number, HVAC system
                control panel, magnetic starter, or packaged equipment control circuit.  Wiring diagrams shall be
                submitted for each HVAC control system.

            Service Organizations: A list of service organizations qualified to service the HVAC control system
            shall be provided.  The list shall include the service organization name, address, technical point of
            contact and telephone number, and contractual point of contact and telephone number.

            Equipment Compliance Booklet:  The HVAC Control System Equipment Compliance Booklet (ECB)
            shall be provided.  It shall consist of, but not be limited to, data sheets and catalog cuts which
            document compliance of all devices and components with the specifications. The ECB shall include a
            Bill of Materials for each HVAC control system. The Bill of Materials shall function as the table of
            contents for the ECB and shall include the device's unique identifier, device function, manufacturer,
            and model/part/catalog number used for ordering.

            Performance Verification Test Procedures:  The performance verification test procedures shall refer to
            the devices by their unique identifiers, and shall explain, step-by-step, the actions and expected results
            that will demonstrate that the HVAC control and LFH exhaust systems performs in accordance with
            the sequences of operation, and other  contract documents.

            Training:  An outline for the HVAC control system training course with a proposed time schedule.
            Approval of the planned training schedule shall be obtained from the Government at least 60 days prior
            to the start of the training.  Three copies of HVAC control system training course material 30 days
            prior to the scheduled start of the training course. The training course material shall include the
            operation manual, maintenance and repair manual, and paper copies of overheads used in the course.

            Operation Manual. Maintenance and Repair Manual:  The HVAC Control System Operation Manual
            and the HVAC Control System Maintenance and Repair Manual shall be provided for each HVAC
            control system.

15.4.2   HUMIDITY CONTROL
        Summer and winter space or zone humidity control shall be provided only on a space-by-space or zone-by-
        zone basis and not for the entire central ventilation system unless required for project-specific humidity
        requirements as stated in the project criteria. No controls shall be provided for dehumidifying spaces to
        below 50 percent relative space humidity or for humidifying spaces to greater than 30 percent relative
        space humidity unless required by project-specific criteria.

15.4.3   SIMULTANEOUS HEATING AND COOLING
        Simultaneous heating and cooling, which controls comfort conditions within a space by reheating or
        recooling supply air or by concurrently operating independent heating and cooling systems to serve a
        common zone, shall not be used except under the following conditions:
                                                   15-9

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements
        •    Renewable energy sources are used to control temperature or humidity.

        •    Project-specific temperature, humidity, or ventilation conditions require simultaneous heating and
             cooling to prevent space relative humidity fromrising above special-space relative humidity
             requirements.

        •    Project-specific building construction constraints, as established in the project criteria, prohibit
             installation of other types of HVAC systems.

15.4.4   MECHANICAL VENTILATION CONTROL
        All supply, return, and exhaust ventilation systems shall be equipped with automatic and manual control of
        fan operation to shut off the fan when ventilation is not required. To prevent introduction of outside air
        when ventilation is not required, these systems shall also be provided with manual gravity-operated or
        automatic control of dampers for outside air intake and exhaust or relief. Systems that circulate air shall be
        provided with minimum outdoor air damper position control to ensure that the minimum amount of outdoor
        air is being introduced into the system. Unless otherwise required by life safely or the specific project
        criteria, automatic dampers should fail open for return air and fail to a minimum setting for outside air.

15.4.5   ENERGY CONSERVATION CONTROL SCHEMES
        HVAC systems will be provided with automatic controls which will allow systems to be operated to
        conserve energy. The following energy  saving controls will be considered, if applicable to the system:

            •   Enthalpy controlled economizer cycle
            •   Controls to close outside air supply when the facility is unoccupied (for non-laboratory areas only)
            •   Night setback controls where appropriate
            •   Master outdoor temperature sensing unit that resets the supply hot water temperature in
                accordance with outdoor ambient temperature. This sensing unit shall automatically shut off the
                heating system and the circulating pumps when the outdoor temperature reaches 65 degrees F
                (unless needed for research)
            •   Controls to shut off exhaust fans, where appropriate
            •   Reset controls for hot and cold  decks on air conditioning systems having hot and cold decks.

        Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all
        federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See sections 2.0 (Commercial
        and Industrial Equipment) and 4.0 (Appliances) of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications
        for energy efficient heating, ventilation,  and air-conditioning systems.

15.4.6   AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS
        Automatic air control dampers must be of the low-leakage type with a maximum leakage of 6 cfm per
        square foot at a maximum system velocity of 1,500 feet per minute (fpm) and a 1 -inch pressure differential,
        as stipulated in Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) standard 500. The dampers shall be
        opposed-blade type for modulating control, but may be parallel-blade type for two-position control.  Pilot
        positioners and operators shall be out of the airstream.

15.4.7   VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEM FAN CONTROL
        Variable-air-volume (VAV) systems shall be designed with control devices that sense ductwork static air
        pressure and velocity air pressure, and control supply -fan airflow and static pressure output through
        modulation of variable inlet vanes, inlet/discharge dampers, scroll dampers, bypass dampers, variable pitch
        blades, or variable frequency electric drive controls, as described in ASHRAE HVAC Applications
        Handbook, Chapter 41, and ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems  and Equipment, Chapter 18. These
        control systems shall have a minimum of one static pressure sensor mounted in ductwork downstream of
        the fan and one static pressure controller to vary fan output through either the inlet vane, the damper, the
                                                  15-10

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        belt modulator, or the speed control. Exhaust fans, supply fans, and return or relief fans shall have devices
        that control the operation of the fans to monitor air volumes and maintain fixed minimum outdoor air
        ventilation requirements.

15.4.8   FIRE AND SMOKE DETECTION AND PROTECTION CONTROLS
        All air-handling systems shall be provided with the smoke and fire protection controls required by NFPA
        72. All supply, return, relief, and exhaust air ventilation systems shall have interlock controls that interface
        with the fire and smoke detection system controls. In the event of fire, these interlock controls shall either
        turn off or selectively operate fans and dampers to prevent the spread of smoke and fire through the
        building.  These controls shall comply with NFPA 90A.

        Special exhaust systems shall be designed to include fire and smoke safety controls as required by NFPA
        91. Kitchen exhaust ductwork systems shall be designed to include all fire and smoke safety controls as
        required by NFPA 96.

        Engineered smoke pressurization and evacuation systems shall comply with the following:
            •   NFPA 72
            •   NFPA 90A
            •   NFPA 92A
            •   ASHRAE manual, Design of Smoke Control Systems for Buildings
            •   ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC Systems and Equipment.

        Special hazard protection systems that initiate an alarm shall be in accordance with the provisions in
        Section 16,  Electrical Requirements, of this Manual.

15.4.9   GAS-FIRED AIR-HANDLING UNIT CONTROL
        Gas-fired air-handling units shall be equipped with operating limit, safety control, and combustion control
        systems.  Gas burner and combustion controls shall comply with Factory Mutual (FM) loss prevention data
        sheets and be  listed in the FM Approval Guide. Gas-fired air-handling units shall have controls that lock
        out the gas supply in the following conditions:

            •   Main or pilot flame failure
            •   Unsafe discharge temperature (high limit)
            •   High or low gas pressure
            •   No proof of airflow over heat exchanger
            •   Combustion air loss
            •   Loss of control system actuating energy.

15.4.10 COOLING  TOWER AND WATER-COOLED CONDENSER SYSTEM CONTROLS
        Controls for cooling towers shall conform to NFPA 214, Standard on Water-Cooling Towers.  Design of
        cooling tower fans shall consider use of variable -speed drives (if feasible) or two -speed motors (if feasible)
        and on/off controls to reduce power consumption and maintain condenser water temperature. Bypass valve
        control shall be provided, if required, to mix cooling tower water with condenser water in order to maintain
        the temperature of entering condenser water at the low limit. To decrease compressor energy use,
        condenser water temperature shall be allowed to float, as long as the temperature remains above the lower
        limit required by the chiller. The design shall provide basin temperature-sensing devices and, if the cooling
        tower is operated under freezing conditions, shall provide  additional heat and control system components to
        maintain cooling tower sump water temperatures above freezing.

        When appropriate, additional controls and sensors may be added to the condenser water system to provide
        condenser water to laboratory equipment that may require it. In addition, provisions for supplying
        emergency  condenser water to laboratory equipment may be required.


                                                 15-11

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

15.4.11 CENTRAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEMS
        The entire control system shall be connected to the central control and monitoring system (CCMS)
        network. The VAV controllers shall be fully compatible with the CCMS allowing complete monitoring,
        control, and setpoint adjustment of all VAV terminal unit controllers from the CCMS host. One personal
        computer must be provided for monitoring, controlling and resetting of any control device in the complex.
        This computer shall also serve as the connection through a modem to a CCMS. A minimum of one laptop
        computer shall also be provided for use as a field interface device to monitor, control, and reset any
        applicable point for any control device. The supplier of the control system shall provide three (3) copies of
        the operating software (one copy on the central control computer and 2 sets on CDs) and three (3) sets of
        technical manuals for the control system to the EPA. This system must be expandable to include the future
        phases.

15.4.12  ENERGY METERING
        All utilities including electric, gas, oil, and potable water utilities to be monitored shall be metered and
        tracked by the central control and monitoring system (CCMS). All meters shall be compatible with the
        installed control system, shall be provided with signaling devices and shall fully interface with building
        HVAC control panel.  Submetering of utilities to various buildings or equipment  shall be based on project
        criteria or, in the absence of these, on sound engineering judgment.  Sub-metering of lighting systems
        should also be considered.

15.4.13  DDC HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
        Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. Each major component of
        equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a
        conspicuous place. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly
        engaged in the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and workmanship.
        The standard products shall have been in a satisfactory commercial or industrial use for two years prior to
        use on a project.  The two years' use shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
        circumstances and of similar size.  The two years' experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product
        which has been sold or is offered for sale on the commercial market through advertisements,
        manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures. Products having less than a two-year field service record will be
        acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory, field operation, for not less than 6,000 hours exclusive of the
        manufacturer's factory tests, can be shown. The equipment items shall be supported by a service
        organization.  Items of the same type and purpose shall be identical, including equipment, assemblies, parts
        and components.

        Portable Workstation/Tester: A portable workstation/tester shall be a Dell Inspiron 2600 or equivalent. It
        shall include carrying case, extra battery, charger and a compatible network adapter.  The workstation/tester
        shall:

            •   Run DDC diagnostics.
            •   Load all DDC memory resident programs and information, including parameters and constraints.
            •   Display any point in engineering units for analog points or status for digital points.
            •   Control any analog output (AO) or digital output (DO).
            •   Provide an operator interface, contingent on password level, allowing the operator to use full
                English language words and acronyms, or an object oriented graphical user interface.
            •   Display database parameters.
            •   Modify database parameters.
            •   Accept DDC software and information for subsequent loading into a specific DDC. Provide all
                necessary software and hardware required to support this function, including anEIA
                ANSI/EIA/TIA 232-F port.
            •   Disable/enable each DDC.
            •   Perform all workstation functions as specified.

                                                  15-12

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        Central Workstation/Tester:  A central workstation/tester shall be tester shall be a Dell Dimension 4500 or
        equivalent. The central workstation/tester shall:

            •   Run DDC diagnostics.
            •   Load all DDC memory resident programs and information, including parameters and constraints.
            •   Display any point in engineering units for analog points or status for digital points.
            •   Control any AO or DO.
            •   Provide an operator interface, contingent on password level, allowing the operator to use full
                English language words and acronyms, or an object oriented graphical user interface.
            •   Display database parameters.
            •   Modify database parameters.
            •   Accept DDC software and information for subsequent loading into a specific DDC.  Provide all
                necessary software and hardware required to support this function, including anEIA
                ANSI/EIA/TIA 232-F port.
            •   Disable/enable each DDC.
            •   Perform all workstation functions as specified.

15.4.13.1    INCORPORATION OF WIRELESS SENSOR  TECHNOLOGY
            Installation of wireless sensor technology should be considered for control, metering, and monitoring
            devices. The primary components of a wireless sensor data acquisition system include: sensors; signal
            conditioners; transmitters; repeaters (optional); at least one receiver; a computer (if data processing is
            planned); and connections for external communications to users (e.g., building operators).

            Depending on the specific application of wireless sensors, the following table shall be referred to:
            Typical Characteristics of Selected Commercially Available Wireless Technology*
Frequency
Band
(MHz)


433







900






900



Topology and
Communications

Point -to -multi-
point;
proprietary
protocols


Point-to-multi-
point; serial
FHSS






Point-to-point
and point -to-
multi-point;
serial


Applications

Rarely used for
building sensing




Building temperature
sensing; electric power
metering; building
security





Remote monitoring
with long-distance
communication.
Building to building
communication.
Remote facility
Maximum
Range
Distance
Approximat
ely 200 ft




2,500 ft
open field;
several
hundred feet
indoors




15 to 35
miles line of
sight



Power Source

Transmitter: 24
VAC
Receiver: DC
power supply
connected to 1 20
VAC
Temperature
sensors: battery
powered
Receiver: Line
powered with 24
VAC power supply
Repeaters: Line
powered with
battery backup
ll-25VDCfrom
power supply
connected to line
power


Average Cost

Transmitters:
$300
Receiver: $600



Transmitter with
air temperature
sensor: $70
Repeater: $250
Receiver: $300




Transmitter:
$1400 -$1800
Point-to-point
bridge: $1000-
$2000
Point-to-multi-
                                                   15-13

-------
July 2006
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section  15- Mechanical Requirements
Frequency
Band
(MHz)

2,400
900 and
2,400
Cellular
network
bands
Topology and
Communications

point-to-point;
serial
Mesh network
Point to point
and point to
Internet
Applications
monitoring
Temperature, humidity
and other parameter
monitoring
Temperature, humidity,
occupancy and other
building parameters
Monitoring of electric
power use and other
critical parameters
Maximum
Range
Distance

150 ft line
of sight
100 to
300ft
No practical
limit in
areas with
service
Power Source

10-30 VDC from
power supply
connected to line
power
Batteries or line
powered
Battery or line
powered
Average Cost
point: $2000
Transmitter:
$800
Receiver: $800
Varies. Contact
vendors for
information
$400 and up
*Based on the following source: Kintner-Meyer, M., M. Brambley, T Carlon, N Bauman. Wireless Sensors:
Technology and Cost-Savings for Commercial Buildings. Pacific Northwest National Laboratory.
.

For each project, the implementation of wireless sensor technology will depend on the determination of economic
cost-effectivenss of the wireless data acquisition system.

            Practical considerations for wireless sensor applications

            Other practical factors should be considered in deciding when to use wireless sensing in buildings.
            These considerations are as follows*:

            •   Need for and availability of integration components or gateways to connect wireless sensor
                networks to BASs, other local area networks, or the Internet

            •   Availability of battery -operated wireless devices

            •   Battery life and factors that affect it

            •   Low-battery indicators for battery -powered devices

            •   Frequency of data collection and its relationship to battery life (where applicable)

            •   Battery backup for line powered devices

            •   Proper packaging and technical specifications for the environment where devices will be located

            •   Availability of software for viewing or processing the data for the intended purpose

            •   Compatibility among products from different vendors—this is rare today but will improve with
                manufacturer adoption of new standards [e.g. IEEE 802.15.4, orZigbee]

            •   Tools for configuring, commissioning, repairing, and adding nodes to the sensor network

                                                  15-14

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements


            •   Software to monitor network performance

            •   Availability of technical support

* Source: Capehart B., Capehart L. 2005. Web Based Energy Information and Control Systems. Case Studies and
Applications.  Chapter 27: "Wireless Sensor Applications for Building Operation and Management." Fairmont Press,
Lilbum, GA

15.4.14 DDC SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
        All DDC software described in this specification shall be furnished as part of the complete DDC system.
        Updates to the software shall be provided for system, operating and application software, and operation in
        the system shall be verified. Updates shall be incorporated into operations and maintenance manuals, and
        software documentation. There shall be at least one scheduled update near the end of the first years'
        warranty period, at which time the latest released version of the Contractor's software shall be installed and
        validated.


15.5   Heating, Ventilation, and Air-Conditioning  Systems

15.5.1   GENERAL
        Selection of central station cooling systems shall be based on the LCCA procedures. Size, selection, and
        design shall be based on guidelines in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and Equipment, and
        HVAC Applications handbooks. Refrigeration equipment shall comply with Air-Conditioning and
        Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 520, ARI 550, and ARI 590. To ensure the most economical operation, the
        number and size of central station cooling units shall be based on the annual estimated partial-load
        operation of the plant. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy
        consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or  FEMP-designated products. See
        sections 2.0 (Commercial and Industrial Equipment) and 4.0 (Appliances) of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's
        purchasing specifications for energy efficient heating, ventilation, and air-conditioning systems.

        •   The project design criteria shall provide direction on installed standby chiller capacity.  Wherever
            possible, the central station chilled-water equipment shall be designed into the chilled-water
            distribution systems as part of a primary -secondary loop system maintaining the chilled-water inlet
            temperature below a maximum predetermined value; ideally, the central station cooling equipment will
            be the secondary portion of the loop. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act  of 2005 requires that, when
            procuring energy consuming products, all federal  agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-
            designated products. See sectionss 2.2 and 2.3 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing
            specifications for energy efficient air-cooled chillers and water-cooled chillers.

        •   Temperature -critical areas (such as laboratories and computer centers), as determined by project
            criteria, shall be provided with independent refrigeration systems with backup systems if the areas are
            involved with vital programs. Use of off-peak cooling systems shall be considered in areas that have
            high electric peak demand charges.

15.5.2   AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
        The air-conditioning and refrigeration equipment for the mechanical systems shall use refrigerants
        acceptable under EPA's Significant  New Alternatives Program (SNAP) under 40 CFR Part 82, Protection
        of Stratospheric Ozone. Chlorofluorocarbon  (CFC) refrigerants shall be avoided. The  use of
        hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC) will be permitted only if the equipment required cannot be replaced with
        equipment that uses a non-ozone-depleting refrigerant. Existing chillers should  be retrofitted or replaced to
        meet the requirements of 40 CFR Part 82.  Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that,
        when procuring energy consuming products,  all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-

                                                 15-15

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        designated products. See sections 2.2 and 2.3 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for
        energy efficient air-cooled chillers and water-cooled chillers.  The refrigerant in air-conditioning systems
        should be recycled during servicing, as required under Section 608 of the Clean Air Act.  Except as set
        forth herein, all air-conditioning and ventilating systems for the handling of air that is not contaminated
        with flammables or explosive vapors or dust shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B.

15.5.3   WATER CHILLERS
        The selection of centrifugal, reciprocating, helical, rotary-screw,  absorption, or steam-powered chillers
        shall be based on coefficients of performance under full-load and partial-load conditions; these coefficients
        are used in analysis done by LCCA methods. LCCA shall also consider the pumping-energy burdens on
        the chilled-water and condenser water system as part of the evaluation.  Compression refrigeration
        machines shall be designed with the safely controls, relief valves, and rupture disks noted below, and
        design shall be in compliance with the procedures prescribed by ASHRAE 15 and Underwriters
        Laboratories  (UL) 207. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy
        consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See
        sections 2.2 and 2.3 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing  specifications for energy efficient air-
        cooled chillers and water-cooled chillers.

        •     Controls shall include, at  a minimum:
                - High-discharge refrigerant pressure cutout switch
                 Low-evaporator refrigerant pressure  or temperature cutout switch
                - High and low oil pressure switches
                - Chilled-water flow interlock switch
                - Condenser water flow interlock switch (on water-cooled equipment)
                - Chilled-water low-temperature cutout switch.

        •   Centrifugal compressors shall be designed to operate with inlet control or variable -speed control for
            capacity modulation. Units shall be capable of modulating to 10 percent of design capacity without
            surge. Reciprocating compressors shall be designed for capacity control by cylinder unloading.
            Designs using hot-gas bypass control of compressors for capacity modulation shall not be used except
            when capacity modulation  is required at conditions below 10 percent of the rated load.  Compressor
            motors for refrigeration equipment shall be selected in  compliance with all requirements of the
            National Electrical Code (NEC).

        •   Absorption refrigeration machines shall be provided with the following safety controls, at a minimum:

                - Condenser water flow switch
                - Chilled-water flow switch
                - Evaporation refrigerant level switch
                - Generator high-temperature limit switch (gas-fired units)
                - Generator shell bursting disc (high-temperature water or steam)
                - Concentration limit controls.

        •   Liquid coolers (evaporators) shall be designed to meet  the design pressure, material, welding, testing,
            and relief requirements of ASHRAE standard 15 and the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
            (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII.  Evaporators shall be selected according to the
            requirements of ASHRAE  standard 24-78.

15.5.4   CONDENSERS/CONDENSING UNITS
        Water-cooled condensers shall  comply with ASHRAE standard 15  and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
        Code, Section VIII. Water-cooled condenser shells and tubes shall have removable heads, if available, to
        allow tube cleaning. The use of marine water boxes on the  condenser shall be considered for ease of tube
        cleaning.

                                                   15-16

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements


        Air-cooled condensers and condensing units shall meet the standard rating and testing requirements of ARI
        460 and ASHRAE standard 20. Air-cooled condenser intakes shall be located away from any obstructions
        that will restrict airflow. Air-cooled equipment shall be located away from noise-sensitive areas, and air-
        cooled condensers shall have refrigerant low-head-pressure control to maintain satisfactory operation
        during light loading.

15.5.5   COOLING TOWERS
        Cooling towers shall be located and placed to avoid problems with water drift and deposition of water
        treatment chemicals.  Cooling towers shall have ample clearance from any obstructions that would restrict
        airflow, cause recirculation of discharge air, or inhibit maintenance.  Cooling tower location should
        consider noise for building and neighboring occupants.

15.5.5.1     Cooling tower acceptance and factory rating tests shall be conducted in accordance with Cooling
            Tower Institute (CTI) Bulletin ATC-105.

15.5.5.2     Cooling towers shall have a conductivity meter installed to monitor water chemistry  and automatically
            control cooling tower blowdown and water treatment chemical addition. The conductivity meter shall
            be regularly calibrated and maintained. Cooling tower water treatment vendors shall be instructed that
            water conservation is a key operating consideration. Vendors shall be selected based on past
            performance, cost to treat 1,000 gallons of make-up water, and highest recommended water cycle of
            concentration.

15.5.5.3     Cooling towers shall have sump water heating systems if they will operate during freezing weather.

15.5.5.4     Combustible casings are acceptable in cooling towers, provided that the fill and drift eliminators are
            noncombustible.  (Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and fire -retardant-treated, fiberglass-reinforced plastic are
            classified as combustible.)  In determining cooling tower requirements, the definitions of combustible
            and noncombustible in NFPA 214 shall be used.  Cooling towers with more than 2,000 cubic feet of a
            combustible fill shall be provided with an automatic sprinkler system, designed in accordance with
            NFPA 214, when any of the following conditions exist:

            •   The continued operation of the cooling tower is essential to the operations in the area it services.
            •   The building is totally sprinkler protected.
            •   A fire in the cooling tower could cause structural damage or other severe fire exposure to the
                building.
            •   The value of the cooling tower is five or more times the cost of installing the sprinkler protection.
                The cost of the sprinkler protection shall include all factors involved, such as the sprinkler piping
                distribution system, the heat-sensing system, the control valve, and any special water supplies or
                extension of water supplies required.

15.5.5.5     Cooling towers with airstreams that pass through water shall have the water treated with an EPA-
            approved biocide to control etiological organisms or any chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,
            herbicides, or other chemicals that may be present because of local conditions. A maintenance
            program must be established to ensure continued, effective operation of these treatment systems.

15.5.5.6     Cooling towers shall have meters that measure water input (cooling tower make-up water) and
            output (blowdown water).

15.5.6   BUILDING HEATING SYSTEMS
        This subsection applies to heat-generating equipment or heat-transfer equipment and accessories located in
        individual buildings.  The project criteria shall provide direction on factors to be considered in the selection
        of heating system capacity; such factors include redundancy, future expansion or building modification,

                                                  15-17

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        thermal storage or solar assistance, and other project-specific considerations.  If maintaining the building
        design temperature is critical, a stand-alone heating system shall be designed with backup capability and
        with no dependence on other facility systems.

15.5.6.1     Where buildings are connected to the central plant heat generation/distribution system, one of the
            following shall be provided:

            •   Steam-to-building hot water heat exchanger
            •   High-temperature water (HTW)-to-building hot water heat exchanger
            •   Steam-pressure reducing station.

15.5.6.2     For space heating by hot water, conversion of the central heating plant steam or HTW  shall provide a
            maximum heating-water supply temperature of 200 °F for building terminal units.  For space heating
            by steam, the building steam supply pressure shall be reduced to 15 pounds per square inch gauge
            (psig) unless a higher supply pressure is needed for process requirements. For process-related or other
            high temperature requirements, the project criteria shall indicate the capacities and the temperature and
            pressure requirements.  For facilities with a central plant condensate return system, a condensate
            receiver with duplex pumps shall be specified. Steam-to-hot-water or HTW-to-building heating water
            converters shall be selected on the basis of design criteria contained in the ASHRAE Handbook of
            HVAC Systems and Equipment and ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook.

15.5.6.3     The use of direct and indirect gas-fired units, electric heating, heat pumps (air-cooled and water-
            cooled), low-temperature gas infrared heating, and hot-water radiant heating and hot-water distribution
            to terminal units, shall be considered, with selection based on the building type, the facility preference,
            and LCCA.  Office buildings, and particularly buildings with occupants sitting near fenestration, shall
            be designed with perimeter finned-tube radiation heating systems or other perimeter heating systems.

            Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming
            products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 2.0
            (Commercial and Industrial Equipment) of Addendum 1  to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for
            energy efficient heat pumps.

            If the selected heating fuel is fuel oil, storage tanks, installed in accordance with national, state, and
            local regulations, shall provide 30 days of full heating capacity.  Each tank shall be fully trimmed for
            safety and operating conditions and shall include a remote level gauge and full monitoring. Tanks
            shall comply with NFPA 30 requirements.

15.5.7   HEATING EQUIPMENT
        Furnaces and boilers for central heating systems shall be enclosed in a room with 2-hour fire-rated walls,
        floors, and ceilings, and with openings protected by automatic or self-closing 1 '/2-hour fire doors. For
        small units consisting of a single furnace operating a hot air system or a boiler not exceeding 15 psi
        pressure or a rating of 10 bhp, a 1-hour fire -rated enclosure is permissible. Section 104 of the Energy
        Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure
        either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products.  See section 2.6 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's
        purchasing specifications for energy efficient boilers.

15.5.7.1     STANDARDS
            Heating equipment will comply with the following standards, except where noted otherwise:

            •   Oil-fired-NFPA31
            •   Gas-fired-NFPA 54
            •   Liquefied petroleum gas-fired - NFPA 58
            •   Liquefied natural gas-fired- NFPA 59A
                                                   15-18

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            •   Boiler and Combustion Systems Hazard Code - NFPA 85.

15.5.7.2     FUEL STORAGE
            Where liquid fuel is used, a recessed floor or curb shall be provided, with ramps at the openings. The
            height of the recess or curb shall be sufficient to contain all the fuel in case the tank or container
            ruptures. For requirements, refer to NFPA 30, NFPA 45, NFPA 90A, and Chapter 5 of the
            Environmental Management Guidelines (Volume 4).

15.5.7.3     SHOP OPERATIONS
            Shop, storage, and other operations that involve flammable or combustible materials and are not
            directly related to the operations in the furnace or boiler rooms shall be located elsewhere unless the
            furnace or boiler room is sprinkler protected. Incidental operations that do not utilize significant
            amounts of flammable materials are allowed in furnace or boiler rooms if proper separations are
            maintained between combustible materials and ignition sources (e.g.,  boiler equipment).

15.5.7.4     BURNERS
            Regardless of size, burners on suspended oil-fired heaters shall be provided with flame supervision that
            will ensure shutdown in not more than 4 seconds if flame failure occurs or trial for ignition does not
            establish a flame.

15.5.7.5     GAS PIPING
            Gas piping entry into the building shall be protected against breakage due to settling, vibration, or,
            where appropriate, seismic activity. Where practical, piping shall be brought in above grade and
            provided with a swing joint before it enters the building.  Where it is necessary for gas piping to enter a
            building below ground, the physical arrangement shall be such that a break in the  gas line due to
            settling or other causes at or near the point of entry cannot result in the free flow of gas into the
            building. Gas piping shall not be run in any space between a structural member and its fireproofing.
            Pipelines shall be labeled in accordance with OSHA's hazard communication standard. Local gas
            utility and code requirements shall be followed.

15.5.7.6     GAS METER REGULATORS
            To avoid placing any strain on the gas piping, any meters, regulators,  or similar attachments shall be
            adequately supported. Any vents or rupture discs on the equipment shall be vented to the outside of
            the building.

15.5.7.7     VALVES
            Earthquake-sensitive shutoff valves shall be provided for each gas entry, where required by local code.

15.5.7.8     GAS METER ROOMS
            Gas meter rooms shall be vented in a way that removes any leaked gas without transporting it through
            the structure.

15.5.7.9     FIRE-RESISTANT SHAFTS  OR CONDUIT
            For large-capacity gas services (piping greater than 3-inch diameter at 4 inches of water pressure head
            or any other size with equivalent or greater delivery capabilities) within a building, the piping shall be
            enclosed in fire -resistive shafts and vented directly to the outside at top and bottom.  Any horizontal
            runs of the gas pipe shall be enclosed in a conduit or chase, also directly vented at each end to the
            exterior or to the vented vertical shaft. Automatic gas detection and automatic shutoff shall be
            provided.

15.5.8   TWO-PIPE COMBINATION HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEMS
        Under normal circumstances, two-pipe combination heating  and cooling systems shall not be considered.

15.5.9   WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
                                                  15-19

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        Economical pipe sizes shall be selected for chilled water, hot water, condenser water, boiler feed, and
        condensate return systems based on the allowable pressure drop, flow rate, and pump selection criteria
        prescribed in the ASHRAE Fundamentals, HVAC Systems and Equipment, andHVAC Applications
        handbooks. Insulation shall be provided on all water distribution piping and system components. Strainers
        shall be provided at the suction side of each pump and of each control valve. Flexible connectors shall be
        specified for installation on the suction and discharge piping of base-mounted end-suction type pumps and
        on electronically driven chillers.

        •   Check valves and balancing valves, or combination check-shutoff-balance valves, shall be installed in
            the discharge piping of all pumps operating in parallel pumping systems. Balancing valves shall be
            installed in the discharge piping of all pump systems.

        •   Service valves  shall be installed in the suction and discharge piping of all major pieces of equipment.
            Balancing valves shall be provided in the discharge piping of all coils and in central station cooling
            equipment.

        •   An air elimination pressure control, venting, and automatic filling system (with backflow prevention)
            shall be provided for each hot-water and chilled-water distribution system; water treatment injection
            should also be provided, if required.

        •   Air chambers and/or surge tanks should be installed to safeguard system against water hammer.

        •   Expansion or compression tanks and fill piping connections shall be located on the suction side of the
            distribution system pump or pumps. Expansion tanks and air separation devices shall be sized
            according to the methods in the ASHRAE Handbook of HVAC and Equipment, and specified in
            accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.1.  Gauge glasses, drain valves, and vent valves shall
            be provided for all expansion tank systems.

        •   Water treatment design information for chilled water, hot water, and boiler feed water systems shall be
            based on project criteria (tested water condition).

15.5.10 PUMPS AND PUMPING SYSTEMS
        Pumps for chilled-water, hot-water, condenser water, boiler feed water, and condensate systems shall be
        centrifugal-type pumps and shall be selected on the basis of the criteria in the ASHRAE handbooks.
        Materials, types of seals, bearings, wear rings, shafts, and other features shall be selected on the basis of
        specific system requirements. Use of primary-secondary type pumping systems and high-efficiency motors
        shall be considered for pumps for all hot-water and chilled-water distribution systems.

        •   For systems where system pumping horsepower requirements are greater than 20 bhp, use of variable -
            speed drives or parallel-pumping arrangement shall be considered.

        •   Standby pumps shall be provided for all systems, unless dictated by project-specific criteria.

        •   Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming
            products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 2.9
            of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient centrifugal pumping
            systems.

15.5.11 STEAM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
        All steam piping shall comply with ASME B31.1  and shall be at least Schedule 40 black steel. Fittings,
        valves, and accessories shall be selected on the basis of pipe size and temperature and pressure conditions.

15.5.11.1    STEAM CONDENSATE RECOVERY
                                                  15-20

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            Steam systems shall incorporate condensate recovery. The condensate recovery system shall be
            routinely inspected and maintained to maximize the recovery of condensate.

15.5.12 AIR-HANDLING AND AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
        Air-handling equipment and air distribution systems shall be sized to optimize performance, initial cost,
        and operating and maintenance costs over the life of the system. Systems should be sized for 25% future
        expansion in fume hoods, other ventilated equipment, and to accommodate future modernization
        requirements.

15.5.12.1    SETBACK MECHANISM
            The setback mechanism shall provide a low-speed operations setting for the fan motors of air-handling
            unit(s) and fume hoods in a particular zone.  Fan motors can be simultaneously activated. The setback
            mechanism shall be designed to provide four air changes per hour or 25 cfm per square foot of LFH
            work surface. The setback mechanism shall also provide room temperatures of approximately 55 °F in
            the winter and approximately 85 °F in the summer unless other, overriding temperature requirements
            are specifically stated.  The exhaust requirements of LFHs and other exhaust devices, as well as the
            temperature and humidity requirements, shall override laboratory minimum air changes per hour.

            The HVAC system(s) nighttime setback shall be controlled by a timer connected to the energy
            management control system of the building. The fume hood face velocity reduction of 25 percent of
            full open-flow air volume (80 fpm hood face velocity at 100% sash opening) and the general exhaust
            and special canopy hood operation at 100 percent airflow are to be balanced by an appropriate
            reduction in supply air  (air-handling unit) fan speed in order to maintain negative pressure in the
            laboratory and laboratory support rooms with respect to the hallways.

15.5.12.2    NOISE LEVELS
            All air-handling system equipment (e.g., fans, terminal units, air-handling units) shall be provided with
            vibration isolators and  flexible ductwork connectors to minimize transmission of vibration and noise.
            Systems shall satisfy the noise criteria (NC) levels recommended for various types of spaces and the
            vibration criteria listed in the ASHRAE handbooks. The combined noise level generated by
            mechanical and electrical building equipment and fume hoods should not exceed 70 decibels dBa at
            the face of the hoods (with the systems operating) or 55 dBa elsewhere.  Where air-handling
            equipment and air distribution systems cannot meet these requirements, sound, and vibration-
            attenuation devices shall be installed in the air-handling systems.

15.5.12.3    VAV MECHANICAL VENTILATION
            Use of a VAV mechanical ventilation system is permitted if the following design and installation
            criteria are achieved.

            •   VAV system must maintain a minimal flow of air within the laboratory fume hood and ductwork
                to purge gases, vapors, and other substances; avoid condensation, impaction, and deposition in the
                ductwork; and achieve sufficient exhaust stack velocity so that the contaminated air stream clears
                the building and does not reenter the building along with supply air.  Refer to subsection 15.3.2 for
                minimum airflow  requirements.

            •   The system must be able to consistently provide 100 fpm average face velocity for restricted
                bypass laboratory  fume hoods at 80% face opening and all face openings below 100% until the
                minimum exhaust volume of 25 CFM per square foot of LFH work  surface is reached.

            •   The supply and exhaust motors in the VAV system must be able to respond with no unacceptable
                delays to changes  in the sash height. This will prevent the backflow of contaminants into the
                workspace and the temporary loss of negative pressure in the laboratory space relative to corridors
                and other adjacent spaces.

                                                  15-21

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15- Mechanical Requirements
15.5.12.4    AIR HANDLER CONDENSATE
            Reuse of air handler condensate shall be considered, particularly in geographic locations with extended
            periods of warm, humid climate conditions. In applications where air handler condensate reuse is cost
            effective, it should be implemented. Condensate should ideally be used as cooling tower make-up, or
            for other appropriate applications.

15.5.13     FANS/MOTORS
            Fans shall be designed and specified to ensure stable, nonpulsing aerodynamic operation in the range
            of operation, over varying speeds.  Fans with motors of 20 horsepower (hp) or less shall be designed
            with adjustable mo tor pulley sheaves to assist in air balancing of systems. Fans with motors of greater
            than 20 hp shall use fixed (nonadjustable) drives that can be adjusted by using fixed motor pulley
            sheaves of different diameters. Supply air-handling units and return air fans in VAV systems shall
            control capacity through the use of variable-speed drives, inlet vanes, or scroll bypass dampers. All
            fans shall comply with AMCA standard 210, ASHRAE standard 51, the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC
            Systems and Equipment, and ACGIH Industrial Ventilation.

    •   Fans shall be located within the ductwork system, in accordance with the requirements of AMC A
        Publication 201. Motors shall be sized according to properly calculated bhp fan requirements and shall not
        use oversized fans and motors to meet future capacity needs unless so directed by  the project criteria.  Fan
        construction materials shall be selected on the basis of corrosion resistance and cost.  Spark-resistant
        construction shall be used where required by NFPA. All fans and accessories shall be designed and
        specified to meet all smoke and flame spread requirements of NFPA 255. Fans used in exhaust systems of
        fume hoods shall also be of the noiseless type and shall be corrosion-resistant to the fumes generated in the
        hood.

    •   Smoke detectors for automatic control in air distribution systems shall  be located in accordance with the
        requirements of NFPA 90A, Chapter 4.

15.5.14 COILS
        Heating and cooling coils shall comply with ARI 410. Heating and cooling coil selection shall comply
        with the guidelines in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals and the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC
        Systems and Equipment. Coil manufacturers shall certify coil performance by ARI certification or provide
        written certification from a nationally recognized independent testing firm that coil performance is in
        accordance with ARI 410.

        •   Heating and cooling coils shall be composed of materials appropriate for the corrosive atmosphere in
            which they operate.  Cooling coils shall be designed with a maximum face velocity of 550 fpm.  Coils
            designed with face velocities exceeding 500 fpm shall have features that prevent condensate carryover
            or use moisture eliminators. Coils shall have a drain feature.

        •   Recirculating air systems designed for outside-air winter temperatures below  freezing shall have a
            preheat coil located either in the outside air intake or in the mixed-air stream upstream of the cooling
            coil, unless the theoretical mixed-air temperature is calculated to be above 35°F. In this case, the
            preheat coils may be omitted if adequate baffling is provided to guarantee positive mixing of the return
            and outdoor air. Preheat coils shall be designed to maintain discharge air temperature without
            modulation of the steam or hot-water flow through use of modulating face dampers and bypass
            dampers. In moderate climates where the method has been proved to be reliable and there is no
            concern about coil freeze-up, steam modulation may be used for control of steam coils.

15.5.15 WALK-IN ENVIRONMENTAL AND COLD STORAGE ROOMS
        Walk-in environmental rooms are rooms in which temperature and/or humidity is  controlled at a single set
        condition within specified tolerances regardless of activity in the room. In determining the appropriate

                                                  15-22

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        room temperature, uniformity, and gradient, the design professional should discuss heat loads (in terms of
        process loads and ventilation requirements) with the end user. Walk-in environmental rooms shall be
        capable of maintaining a 4°C room temperature with a uniformity of 0.5° C and a maximum gradient of 1°C,
        unless otherwise specified in the program requirements.  A walk-in cold storage room shall be capable of
        maintaining a minus 20°C room temperature with a uniformity of 1°C and a maximum gradient of 3°C,
        unless otherwise specified. Rooms shall feature temperature displays visible from a contiguous hallway
        and shall be capable of producing a continuous record of temperature. Alarm systems with manual
        override capability shall be provided to advise room operators of fault conditions.  Ventilation shall be
        provided if work activity is performed inside chambers/rooms.  Doors to rooms shall be provided with a
        locking mechanism capable of release at all times from the room interior whether or not the door is locked.
        Walk-in environmental and cold storage spaces shall include shelving. Walk-in coolers are considered
        enclosed spaces and require automatic fire sprinkler protection inside them. Walk-in cold storage rooms
        shall have O  sensors and alarms to ensure that oxygen has not been displaced.

        A separate refrigeration system shall be provided for these rooms.  If refrigeration is provided by the main
        building's chilled-water system, a backup self-contained system shall also be provided.

15.5.16 CENTRAL PLANT HEAT GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION
        The following criteria shall be applied in the planning and design of steam and HTW generation and
        distribution systems and of cogeneration facilities.

15.5.16.1    FACILITY SIZING
            The design professional shall consider creating a plant design that can be easily expanded to meet
            potential future loads in addition to meeting confirmed near-term loads.  Load computations to
            establish boiler capacity shall be based on the building design heating load, as determined in
            conformance with the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, plus process heating loads (if any) and
            an allowance for piping plants. The process heat losses shall be investigated during the design stage to
            determine whether heat can be recovered, thereby reducing the boiler load.

            Multiple boiler installations shall be considered for all applications in order to maintain high operating
            plant efficiency throughout the year. The number and size of the boilers shall be based on the number
            of operable hours at full and partial load operation, the turn-down ratio of the boiler being considered,
            efficiency at partial loads, and year-round process or summer loads. Use of a base load boiler shall be
            considered when a year-round process demand exists. The system shall be designed to satisfy peak
            demand by operating over its maximum rating for short periods of time. The possibility of operating
            small local boilers rather than the central plant to satisfy summer loads shall also be considered.
            Sufficient capacity shall be furnished to allow one boiler to be down for inspection or maintenance or
            to be on standby while the remaining boiler(s) maintain normal operations.

            The generating facilities shall be so located as to allow efficient steam/hot-water distribution
            throughout the site and to allow for future expansion of the generating and distribution system.  The
            facility location shall also be chosen to take advantage of prevailing winds and to minimize problems
            associated with noise, dirt, air pollution, harmful effects  on adjacent property owners, and
            accommodation of fuel deliveries and storage.

            The option of installing one or more satellite boiler facilities rather than a single central boiler complex
            shall be evaluated when one or more of the following conditions exist:

            •   An extensive distribution system connecting several separate steam users is required.
            •   Requirements exist for several different steam pressures.
            •   Variable steam loadings exist with respect to time or quantity.
                                                  15-23

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            The use of a cogeneration plant as a possible alternative shall be considered in the planning of any
            large steam generation facility.  The feasibility of cogeneration with HTW or HTW boilers or HTW-to-
            steam generators shall be considered. In determining the feasibility of cogeneration, the following
            factors shall be considered:

            •   Energy demand and cost, peak load, average load, seasonal variations, and utility rate structures.
            •   Regulatory concerns: Public Utility Regulatory Policies Act (PURPA), relevant environmental
                regulations, and current local regulations.

            The applicability of cogeneration shall be thoroughly evaluated per EPA Cogeneration Partnership
            Program (www.epa. gov/chp/about_chp.htm').  Cogeneration plants shall be sized to accommodate
            existing loads.

15.5.16.2    STEAM AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE WATER GENERATION
            All boilers shall comply with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. In determining whether to
            select a steam or a high-temperature water (HTW) system, the following factors shall be considered:

            •   Whether the system will be operated intermittently or continuously
            •   Whether fast response to significant load variation is important
            •   Pumping costs
            •   Length, size, and configuration of required piping
            •   Possibility of using HTW to generate the steam at its point of use, in a facility where only a few
                processes require steam.

            Steam boilers shall be designed to provide dry, saturated steam unless the economics of electricity
            generation, meeting specific process requirements, or accommodating extensive distribution systems
            necessitates use of superheated steam. If required for process, the use of high-pressure satellite boilers
            located close to the process shall be considered in lieu of distribution of high-pressure steam.

            An HTW system is  a system that generates heating or process water with a temperature above 300°F.
            HTW boilers shall be of the controlled forced-circulation type, specifically designed for HTW service.
            Because of costs associated with high-pressure pipe, valves, and fittings, HTW systems should not be
            designed for higher temperatures and pressures than are absolutely necessary.

            In a gas-pressurized HTW system, an inert gas, such as nitrogen, shall be used and the pressurizing
            tank shall be installed vertically to reduce the area of contact between gas and water, thus reducing the
            absorption of gas into the liquid. Gas-pressurized systems should be maintained at a pressure that is
            well above the pressure at which the HTW will flash to steam. Pump pressurization is generally
            restricted to small process heating systems.  In larger HTW systems, pump pressurization can be
            combined with gas pressurization.

            Boilers shall be equipped with meters to measure total potable water used as boiler feed water.

            In addition, Section 104 of the  Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy
            consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products  . See
            section 2.6 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's  purchasing specifications for energy efficient boilers.

15.5.16.3    CIRCULATION PUMPS
            In selecting and installing circulation pumps, energy efficiency shall be emphasized. Consideration
            shall be given to the use of variable-speed circulation pumps. In steam-pressurized systems,
            circulating pumps shall be located in the supply lines to maintain pressure above the flashpoint of the
            hottest water in the distribution system. A mixing connection that allows some of the coil return water
            to pass into the supply line at the pump suction shall be provided to safeguard against flashing or
                                                   15-24

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            cavitation at the pump(s). In a gas-pressurized HTW system, the circulating pumps may be installed in
            either the supply lines or the return lines.

            Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming
            products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 2.9
            of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient centrifugal pumping
            systems.

15.5.16.4    FUEL STORAGE AND HANDLING SYSTEMS
            Control, containment, and treatment of rainwater runoff from coal storage yards shall comply with
            effluent guidelines and standards for steam-electric power-generating point sources (40 CFR Part 423).
            The relative economy of a central natural gasBfired plant compared with a gas distribution system
            serving the individual requirements of each building shall be considered.  The long-range availability
            of the gas supply and the possible need for a secondary fuel shall be established. The economics of
            interruptible versus uninterruptible gas service relative to availability of secondary fuel shall be
            considered.

            Fully automatic mechanical-firing equipment and mechanical draft equipment shall be  provided.
            Mechanical-firing equipment capable of developing 100 to 125 percent of the boiler capacity shall be
            specified.

            Ash-handling systems shall comply with Federal Construction Council Technical Report No. 51,
            Chapter III, Section 3.1.  Land availability for storage or disposal, water availability, nearness to
            residential areas, the possibility of selling the ash, as a means of disposal, and environmental
            regulations shall be considered.  Collection and treatment of ash-carrying liquid effluents shall comply
            with 40 CFR Part 423.

            Stationary internal combustion engines, such as gasoline- or diesel-powered generators or fire pumps,
            shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 37.

            The use of underground tanks shall be avoided.  Refer to Chapter 5 of the Environmental Management
            Guidelines (Volume 4) for storage tank requirements (aboveground and underground).

15.5.16.5    BOILER WATER TREATMENT
            Boiler water treatment shall be provided to prevent deposits on or corrosion of internal boiler surfaces
            and to prevent the carryover of boiler water solids into the steam.  A boiler water treatment specialist
            shall be consulted to determine appropriate treatment measures. Water quality measures for the steam
            plant and for other site process water users should be coordinated.  The design of the plant shall
            provide for daily sampling to determine internal water conditions. Provisions shall be made for
            introducing treatment chemicals into the feed water. The plant shall contain adequate  space and
            equipment for storing, handling, and mixing chemicals. Continuous versus intermittent blowdown
            operations shall be considered to determine which system will keep the concentration of total solids
            within acceptable limits. For continuous blowdown operations, the economics of installing a heat
            recovery system shall be considered. Blowdown rates and boiler water chemistry control shall be
            established in consultation with ASME's "Consensus Operating Practices for Control of
            Feedwater/Boiler Water Chemistry in Modern Industrial Boilers " (1994).

            A minimum of two boiler feed pumps, each sized to handle the peak load, shall be provided to allow
            one pump to be out of service without affecting facility operations. Pumps shall be equipped with
            automatic controls that regulate feed water flow to maintain the required water level  and with a relief
            valve. Relief valves shall be preset to lift at a lower pressure than the boiler safely valve setting plus
            static and friction heads.

15.5.16.6    BOILER ROOM CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION
                                                  15-25

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            Boiler plant instrumentation and control panels shall include devices for monitoring the combustion
            process and consoles in equipment in which such devices are mounted. Boiler room controls and
            instrumentation shall comply with NFPA 85.

15.5.16.7    PLANT INSULATION
            All hot surfaces within 7 feet of the plant floor, or on any catwalk, shall be insulated to prevent surface
            temperatures above 60 °C (where contact would be unintentional and unlikely) and above 49 °C (where
            contact is likely or necessary for equipment operation).  Insulation shall be in accordance with the
            manufacturer's recommendations and the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.

15.5.16.8    STEAM AND HIGH-TEMPERATURE WATER DISTRIBUTION
            Steam and HTW distributions systems shall be sized to accommodate, without extensive modification,
            any future expansion anticipated in the project criteria.

            •   When aboveground steam or HTW distribution systems are to be constructed, pipe shall be
                installed on concrete pedestals, on concrete/steel stanchions, or on poles. Where piping crosses
                over roadways,  a minimum of 14 feet of clearance shall be provided.

            •   Provisions shall be made for expansion and contraction in the piping system.  Expansion loops
                shall be provided where  space allows. Where space does not allow expansion loops, expansion
                joints may be used. Piping shall comply with ASME B31.1

            •   Unless economics dictates otherwise, steam shall be supplied to the distribution system at the
                lowest pressure that will adequately serve the connected load.  The economics of higher pressure
                distribution shall be considered. Processes requiring higher pressures shall be serviced, where
                practical, by a separate section of the distribution system to avoid operating the entire system at
                higher pressures than necessary.

            •   Warm-up bypass valves  shall be provided at all shutoff valves in steam distribution lines. Steam
                velocities shall be selected for the type of service being considered but shall not exceed 10,000
                fpm.

            •   Steam and condensate pipe shall, where possible, be graded at a minimum of 1 inch in 40 feet in
                the direction of flow.  Drip stations and steam traps shall be provided at all low points in steam
                lines.

            •   To ensure tightness of the steam system, all joints to valves and fittings that are larger than 1.25
                inches shall be welded, except in the boiler house, where flanges shall be used to facilitate
                maintenance of equipment, connections, and valves.

            •   HTW piping shall be  sized for an average velocity of 5 feet per second, a maximum velocity of 10
                feet per second, and a minimum velocity  of 2 feet per second.  To ensure tightness of the HTW
                system, all joints to valves and fittings that are larger than 1.25 inches shall be welded, except in
                the boiler house, where flanges shall be used to facilitate maintenance of equipment, connections,
                and valves.

            •   Unlike steam piping, HTW piping may follow the natural terrain; however, proper provisions shall
                be made for draining  and venting the piping.

15.5.16.9    PIPING INSULATION
            Insulation containing asbestos is prohibited. The possibility that water infiltration will cause physical
            damage to, or loss of thermal characteristics of, underground pipe insulation  shall be considered in the

                                                  15-26

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            selection of insulation. All insulation installed aboveground, in tunnels, and in manholes shall be
            provided with either a metal j acket, either factory or field installed, or a hard cement finish.

15.5.16.10  PIPING MARKING
            Pipes shall be marked in accordance with ASME AB. 1-1996 Scheme for Identification of Piping
            Systems, and shall conform with requirements of Chap. 5 of the GSA Facilities Standards for the
            Public Buildings Service, 2003 Edition (PBS P100); and NFPA 45, Chap. 8.2, Storage and Piping
            Systems for Compressed and Liquified Gases, 2000 Edition, as applicable


15.6   Ductwork

15.6.1   GENERAL
        Ductwork systems shall be designed for efficient distribution of air to and from the conditioned spaces;
        noise, available space, maintenance, air quality, air quantity, and optimum balance between expenditure of
        fan energy (annual operating cost) and duct size (initial investment) shall also be considered.

        Duct smoke detectors, as described under Section 16 Electrical Requirements, of this Manual, shall be
        installed in accordance with NFPA 90A requirements.

15.6.2   FABRICATION
        Ductwork for air supply, return air, and general exhaust shall be fabricated of galvanized sheet metal, or
        fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) that meets required fire ratings. Laboratory fume hood (LFH) and
        equipment exhaust shall be of PVC -coated galvanized sheet metal or of Type 316 welded stainless steel,
        depending on the specific laboratory function and type of process being exhausted. Polypropylene and
        glass duct material shall be considered for highly corrosive exhaust applications. LFH exhaust ductwork
        shall be of welded or flanged/bolted air tight construction in accordance with ANSI/AIHA Z9.2 and Z9.5

        Duct linings or coverings shall be of noncombustible construction. The total assembly of the duct lining,
        including adhesive and any coatings or additives involved, shall have an interior finish rating of Class A
        (flame spread 0-25, smoke developed 0-450). Use of porous  duct liners that can collect dirt and moisture
        should be avoided and shall not be considered for new construction.  Where such liners are already in use,
        and particularly in areas close to humidification or dehumidification (cooling) equipment, the lining  should
        be removed unless coated or sealed to prevent fiber loss.

15.6.2.1     COMPLIANCE
            Ductwork  systems shall be designed to meet the leakage rate requirements of the SMACNA HVAC Air
            Duct Leakage Test Manual. Ductwork, accessories, and support systems shall be designed to comply
            with the following:

            •   ACGIH Industrial Ventilation Manual
            •   ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals
            •   NFPA 45 Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals
            •   NFPA 90A Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
            •   NFPA 91 Installation of Exhaust Systems for Air Conveying of Materials
            •   NFPA 96 Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations
            •   SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
            •   SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards
            •   SMACNA Round Industrial  Duct Construction  Standards
            •   SMACNA HVAC Duct Design Manual.
            •   ANSI/ASHRAE 62
            •   ANSI/ASHRAE Z9.2
            •   ANSI/ASHRAE Z9.5
                                                 15-27

-------
July 2006                                                          Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15- Mechanical Requirements
15.6.2.2     SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
            Ductwork shall also meet the following requirements:

            •   Ductwork shall be designed to comply with NFPA 90A.  This includes specifications and
                installation of smoke and fire dampers at rated wall penetrations and smoke
                pressurization/containment dampers as required for smoke pressurization/evacuation systems.
                Fire dampers shall not be used on the exhaust system ducting if the system must maintain
                confinement of hazardous materials during and after a fire.

            •   Ductwork shall be designed to resist corrosive contaminants if any are present.  Exhaust ductwork
                from laboratory fume hoods shall not be of spiral construction and shall be sloped toward the fume
                hood for drainage of condensation, constructed with welded longitudinal seams, and welded
                transverse joints, or equivalent construction, in accordance with the requirements of Section 6,
                Ductwork, of American National Standard (ANSI/AIHA) Z9.5-1992. Laboratory ductwork shall
                be in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 45.

            •   Ductwork that handles moisture-laden air that is exhausted from areas such as shower rooms,
                dishwashing areas, and other areas where condensation may occur on the duct interior shall be of
                aluminum construction, have welded joints and  seams, and provide drainage at low points.

            •   Penetrations of ductwork through security barriers shall be minimized. Any such penetrations that
                are more than 96 square inches in area and 6 inches in smallest dimension must be provided with a
                penetration delay equal to that required for the security barrier.  The physical attributes, intended
                service of the ductwork, and the axial configuration of the barrier penetration shall be considered
                in the design of the penetration delay.

15.6.3   ACCESS PANELS
        All ductwork shall have an access panel that provides access to each operating part, including:
            •   Splitter dampers
            •   Manual volume dampers
            •   Motorized volume damper
            •   Fire dampers.
15.6.4   INSULATION
        All supply air ductwork shall be insulated with a vapor barrier unless otherwise dictated by the project
        criteria. Supply air ductwork installed below ceilings and in conditioned spaces may not require insulation
        if the surrounding air has a low dew point and condensation will not occur. Return and exhaust air
        ductwork may be insulated where condensation may occur when air is routed through unconditioned areas.

15.6.5   FIRE DAMPERS
        Fire dampers shall be provided in accordance with codes, except in the exhaust systems of laboratory areas.


15.7   Laboratory Fume Hoods
        EPA laboratory fume hoods, as constructed, manufactured, installed, and used, shall conform to current
        EPA requirements.  The design professional, in consultation with the users of the facility, shall be
        responsible for selecting fume hood types and sizes that are appropriate to the hoods' intended use.  The
        requirements of this subsection and of Chapter 4 of the Safety Manual shall be followed. Laboratory fume
        hoods shall be considered an integral part of the overall building HVAC system and shall be part of the
        laboratory mechanical system testing and balancing prior to building acceptance.

                                                 15-28

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

15.7.1   LABORATORY CONTROL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
        Major projects will require the services and review of a qualified engineer with experience of controls
        design for laboratory fume hood.  The following consideration shall be implemented during new and
        existing design process:

        •   Identify any user-specific needs for fume hood lab environmental monitoring.
        •   Identify any specific containment requirements.
        •   Determine the type of fume hood needed to perform operation
        •   Identify if constant (full bypass) or VAV (partial bypass) fume hood controls are to be used.
        •   Confirm satisfactory ASHRAE 110 performance testing of potential fume-hood/control-system
            configurations.
        •   Analyze expected laboratory  space air flow dynamics to evaluate whether air flow tracking, active
            pressurization control or a combination of both is required.
        •   Carefully select the location and type of supply air diffusers. Supply diffusers shall be Titus, Radia
            Tec, dome faced radial perforated diffusers or equal.
        •   Determine the failure mode of all terminal  boxes to  ensure that the lab pressurization criteria  are met
            under all condition.
        •   Confirm that laboratory temperature control does not override the minimum fume hood driven
            ventilation requirements.
        •   Identify all temperature control zones within the lab, and provide sufficient sensors to control each
            zone.
        •   Confirm that potential control suppliers have adequate presence and technical  depth at the project
            location to support the project installation, testing and operation

        Additional consideration for existing facilities design process:
        •   Analyze total system - air flows, pressures and temperatures.
        •   Select fume hood control type and size.
        •   Alter or re-balance the HVAC system and reset controls to maintain proper air flows and temperatures.

15.7.2   HOOD REQUIREMENTS
        EPA fume hoods shall have an ASHRAE performance rating, as manufactured, of 4.0 AM 0.05 and shall
        conform to current EPA requirements.  Before EPA purchases any hood model, the laboratory fume hood
        manufacturer, at a test facility provided by the manufacturer, and at no cost to the Government, shall certify
        the proper performance of the fume hood in accordance with the Procedures for Certifying Laboratory
        Fume Hoods to Meet EPA Standards. After the new hoods are installed, EPA requires the manufacturer to
        evaluate and certify in a written report that the installation and performance of the hoods complies with
        EPA specifications prior to acceptance and use by EPA. This shall occur after the testing and balancing
        (TAB) report is approved by AEAMB and SHEMD.

        SHEMD  is responsible for approving the certification of fume hoods. SHEMD will document the approval
        of all newly installed fume hoods for AEAMB. A list of approved or certified hoods is available from
        SHEMD.

        Materials used in the construction of fume hoods and of exhaust blowers shall meet corrosion-resistance
        standards for the chemicals used and generated in the hood, as described in the hood uses; blowers should
        be rated or otherwise approved for use; and plumbing fixtures and electrical outlets should meet existing
        codes. In addition, fume hoods shall meet the following requirements:

        •   Ceiling and wall supply s for the distribution of supply air in the laboratory shall be designed for a
            maximum air velocity of 25 fpm at 6 feet above the finished floor at the face of the hood. HVAC
            diffusers shall be located so that they do not "short circuit" the airflow to a hood. Supply diffusers
            shall be similar or equal to the Titus, Radia Tec,  dome faced radial perforated diffuser.
                                                  15-29

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements
        •   Face Velocities:  In accordance with Procedures for Certifying Laboratory Fume Hoods To Meet EPA
            Standards, the fume hood must be designed for an average face velocity of 100 fpm ±10 fpm with
            sash 80% open with a uniform face velocity profile of ± 20% for point measurements in a traverse of
            the face opening.  SHEMD will consider requests to operate hoods at 80 fpm average face velocity
            with a sash opening of 80%.  Any request for a lower operating average face velocity should include
            information on the performance of the hood at lower operating velocities, the location of the hood and
            the type and location of ceiling supply air diffusers.  Under no circumstances can the control velocity
            be less than 80 fpm at any sash height.

        •   The sash shall be equipped with a control device to maintain it at the operating height (e.g., releasable
            sash stops).

        •   Fume hoods shall be equipped with a low exhaust flow safety alarm system designed to signal unsafe
            operating conditions whenever fume hood average face velocity falls below 70 fpm. The alarm system
            shall consist of an audible and visual alarm to indicate malfunction or unsafe operating conditions.
            Additional specific standard utility and service requirements shall be indicated for each specific
            laboratory facility project.

15.7.3   CONSTANT VOLUME BYPASS-TYPE FUME HOOD
        The laboratory fume hood is often an integral part of the building exhaust system.  The volume of air
        exhausted should be constant, achieved by an airflow bypass above the sash through which room air can
        pass as the sash is lowered. A horizontal bottom and a vertical side airfoil must be specified and used on
        all hoods,  and the face edges must be shaped to minimize entering air turbulence.  Vertical foils on the
        sides also result in a slight airflow improvement by minimizing the eddies caused as air enters the hood.
        The work surface should be recessed three-eighths of an inch or more so that spills can be effectively
        contained.  The front raised edge should extend just past the airfoil but not far enough to be used as a
        working surface near the face opening.

        The bypass sizing and design must be  such that the following conditions are met:

        •   The total airflow volume is essentially the same at all sash positions. As the sash is lowered, the face
            velocity increases to a rate that shall not exceed three times the design velocity for a fully open sash
            position.

        •   The bypass must provide a barrier between the hood work space and the room when the sash is
            lowered.

        •   The bypass opening is dependent only on the operation of the sash.  Selected sash configurations are
            listed and described below:

        •   The vertical-rising fume hood sash shall be full -view type providing a clear and unobstructed side-to-
            side view of the fume hood interior and the service fitting connections.  The sash shall be 7/32-inch
            laminated safety glass. The sash system shall utilize a single-weight pulley cable counterbalance
            system permitting one-finger operation along the length of the sash pull. The counterbalance system
            will hold the sash at any position without creep  and will prevent  sash drop in the event of malfunction
            or failure of a cable.

        •   The combination vertical-rising and horizontal-sliding fume hood sash  shall be similar in design to the
            vertical-rising sash configuration but with  multiple horizontal sliding sashes of 7/32-inch laminated
            safety glass panels on multiple tracks within the vertical rising sash frame.
                                                  15-30

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        While current EPA policy discourages the use of auxiliary air-type hoods in new construction, their use
        may be justified under special circumstances, such as in renovations where the existing ventilation system
        is inadequate and where expansion of system capacity may be mechanically unfeasible or too costly.
        Auxiliary air hoods are hoods that are provided with a source of air in addition to that taken from the room.
        It is essential that all air for these hoods be supplied from outside the hood face. Any model that introduces
        air behind the sash must not be used, because this arrangement reduces the control velocity at the face and
        could actually pressurize the work chamber if the exhaust flow is reduced (e.g., by foreign matter in fan, a
        broken belt, or normal wear and maintenance). Features described for the constant-volume bypass-type
        hood, including the bypass arrangement, are  applicable to the auxiliary air hood. Auxiliary air supplies
        must be turned off to test the face velocity of the hood; a readily accessible means of turning off auxiliary
        air electrical power will facilitate such testing.

15.7.3   VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME (VAV) HOODS
        VAV hoods shall be installed as approved by the manufacturer or per the manufacturer's recommendation.
        The hood manufacturer, in conjunction with  the control manufacturer, shall certify that the hood and
        laboratory system operation is as designed. Response times for reestablishing the proper face velocity after
        a maximum change in sash position shall not exceed 0.8 seconds.  The minimum airflow through a VAV
        hood must meet or exceed 25 cfm per square foot of LFH work surface with the sash closed with four room
        air changes per hour for an unoccupied laboratory, or must be calculated to limit the accumulation of
        volatile vapors within the fume hood to less than 25 percent of their lower flammable limit. The minimum
        airflow during occupied hours will be capable of eight room air changes per hour in the laboratory. As an
        alternative to relying on minimum airflows for preventing accumulation of vapors, fume hoods, whose
        interior may be classified as described in NEC Article 500, and appropriate electric devices and equipment
        within the fume hood enclosure may be used. However, the minimum flows still must be capable of
        maintaining the laboratories at a negative air pressure relative to adjacent corridors and non-laboratory
        spaces.  Refer to NFPA 45 for guidance on electrical classification of fume hood enclosures.

15.7.4   RADIOISOTOPE HOODS
        Radioisotope hoods shall meet all the requirements of the fume hood types described above, except that the
        interior liner material shall have panels at the sides, back, top, and plenum enclosure of 18-gauge Type 302
        stainless steel and structural members, reinforcements, and brackets of 16-gauge Type 302 stainless steel.
        The work surface should be 14-gauge Type 302  stainless steel. Joints should be fully sealed by welding or
        fine-line solder. The base structure should have a heavy angle frame reinforced to support 1 ton of lead
        brick  shielding. The work surface shall be reinforced from the underside with heavy steel grating to provide
        the necessary strength for holding lead brick  radiation-protection and/or shall be capable of supporting at
        least 200 pounds per square foot. To minimize radioactive emissions into the atmosphere, high-efficiency
        particulate aerosol (HEPA) filters should be  considered as a best available control technology for
        radioactive isotope hoods.  Guidance on the limitations, selection, and design of radioactive air-cleaning
        devices can be found in the Nuclear Air Cleaning Handbook, Energy Research and Development
        Administration (ERDA) 76-21, and in Nuclear Power Plant Air Cleaning Units and Components,
        ANSI/ASME N509.

15.7.5   PERCHLORIC ACID FUME HOODS
        In addition to the features described for fume hoods, perchloric acid hoods must use materials that are
        nonreactive, acid resistant, and relatively impervious. Type 316 stainless steel with welded joints should be
        specified, although certain other materials may be acceptable. Corners shall be rounded to facilitate
        cleaning. Work surfaces shall be watertight  with an integral trough at the rear for collection of wash-down
        water.

        •   Perchloric acid fume hoods shall be constant-volume bypass or VAV type with an average face
            velocity of 100 fpm +/-10 FPM with sash 80% open.

        •   A wash-down system must be provided  that has spray nozzles to adequately wash the entire assembly
            including the stack, blower, all  ductwork, and the interior of the hood, with an easily accessible strainer
                                                  15-31

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            to filter particulates in the water supply that might clog the nozzles.  The wash-down system shall be
            activated immediately after the hood has been used.

        •   All welded ductwork shall be installed with a minimal amount of horizontal runs and no sharp turns;
            ductwork also must not be shared with any other hood.

        •   Exhaust fans must be of an acid-resistant, non-sparking (AMCA Standard Type A) construction.
            Lubrication shall be with fluorocarbon grease only. Gaskets shall be of a tetrafluoroethylene polymer.

        •   Perchloric acid must never be used in hoods not specifically designed for its use. Organic materials,
            strong dehydrating or desiccating agents, and oxidizing or reducing materials must not be used in a
            hood used for perchloric acid.

15.7.6   SPECIAL PURPOSE HOODS
        Special purpose hoods are defined as any hood that does not conform to the specific types described above
        in this subsection. Special hoods may be used for operations for which other types are not suitable (e.g., as
        enclosures for analytical balances, gas vents from atomic absorption, or gas chromatography units). Other
        applications might present opportunities for achieving contamination control with less bench s pace or less
        exhaust volume (e.g., using the hoods as special mixing stations, sinks, evaporation racks, heat sources, and
        ventilated worktables).  Special purpose exhaust hoods shall be designed in accordance with ANSI A9.2
        and NFPA 45. Appropriate applications for specific types of special purpose hoods are described below.

        •   Canopy Exhaust (Capture) Hoods: These shall be provided as required for the removal of heat from
            specific laboratory apparatus, such as furnaces, ovens, and sterilizers, or as otherwise called for in the
            laboratory program. Refer to ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation for requirements and specifications for
            canopy hoods.

        •   Flexible Spot Exhausts (Snorkels): These shall be required to remove chemical fumes or heat from
            specific laboratory  instrumentation, such as high-performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), gas
            chromatography/mass spectrometry (GC/MS),  and atomic absorption (AA) units. Snorkels require an
            estimated exhaust rate of 100 to 200 cfm or a rate appropriate to the intended use.


        •   Gas Cabinets: Special exhaust cabinets will be required to house individual or pairs of
            toxic/pyrophoric gas cylinders. Leak detectors and low-exhaust flow alarms, as well as a gas  purge
            system, shall be considered to provide for safe exchange of cylinders.  Exhaust for these cabinets is
            estimated at 50 to 75  cfm each.

15.7.7   HORIZONTAL SASHES
        Horizontal sashes, as well as other nonstandard features (larger-than-usual opening in distillation hoods,
        vented sinks, hoods larger than 6 feet), may be used under the following conditions.  (It should be noted
        that horizontal sashes may put additional demands on VAV performance.)

        •   A conventional hood does not meet the specific requirements of the user (this should be reflected in the
            standard operating procedures).

        •   The hood is used as intended by the manufacturer (i.e., the hood is not altered after installation).

        •   The hood passes the pre -purchase performance test.

15.7.8   NOISE
        The noise exposure at the working position in front of the hood shall not exceed 70 dBa with the system
        operating and the sash open, nor shall it exceed 55 dBA at benchtop level elsewhere in the laboratory room.
                                                  15-32

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        Each new hood installation shall be certified as meeting this requirement before initial use and shall be
        recertified annually thereafter. Total room performance with respect to noise levels must not exceed the
        limits specified in 29 CFR '1910.95.

15.7.9   EXHAUST SYSTEM
        Individual exhaust systems should be provided for each fume hood when the mixing of effluents from the
        individual hoods is inadvisable or when the effluent must be filtered, scrubbed, washed down, or otherwise
        treated before discharge. Pressure in laboratories shall be maintained as negative with respect to adjacent
        areas. Blowers should be rated and should be installed at the end of each duct system so that all ducts
        within the occupied areas of a building are maintained under negative pressure.  Hood exhaust should be
        designed in accordance with the recommendations in ACGIH'sIndustrial Ventilation, ANSI Z9.5, and
        NFPA 45.

        Fume hoods and general laboratory exhaust shall be routed to a stack discharge point at the highest area of
        the building roof line and shall be positioned to prevent entrainment of fumes at fresh air intake points.
        Fume hood exhaust stacks shall be constructed without caps or heads. Exhaust stacks should extend a
        minimum of 10 feet  above the adjacent roof level and operate at a minimum of 3,000 fpm exhaust
        discharge velocity. The exhaust velocity may be lower than 3,000 fpm and the stack height lower than 10
        feet if proven to prevent entrainment through performance of site atmospheric air flow characteristics and
        exhaust stack dispersion performance analyses as recommended in 1999 ASHRAE Application Handbook.

15.7.9.1     MANIFOLDING OF FUME HOODS
            Manifolding of fume hood exhausts is allowed if a single discharge point is advantageous, and the air
            supply suitably controls comfort conditions while maintaining proper laboratory pressure. Manifolded
            exhaust systems should incorporate staged, multiple constant volume fans with control dampers to
            maintain a constant static pressure in the manifold in order to ensure quick response to changing hood
            conditions. Variable-speed fans are permitted if they are advantageous. In order for manifolded fume
            hoods to be safe, sufficient dilution of air within the ductwork must be maintained to avoid significant
            chemical reactions that may result in fire, corrosion, deposition, and/or increased toxicity.  Low
            airflows afforded by VAV may increase the potential for significant reaction. Manifolding of fume
            hoods shall meet the requirements of NFPA 45.

            Fume hoods, biological safety cabinets, and general laboratory exhaust may be combined in a
            commonly manifolded exhaust duct system for blocks of hoods; however, such combined systems
            require the prior approval of SHEMD. Provisions should be made for separate, dedicated duct and
            exhaust systems for special fume hood exhausts, including, but not limited to, perchloric acid hoods,
            high-energy radioisotope hoods, and exhausted biological safety cabinets, that cannot be combined in a
            commonly manifolded system. Hoods used for dissimilar purposes or hoods that are far apart from
            each other should not be manifolded.

15.7.10 EFFLUENT CLEANING
        When air-cleaning devices are required, the type is determined by the contaminant and the degree of
        cleaning necessary.  The type of air cleaner required can vary from a simple scrubber and filters to
        incinerators or specially designed units. All cleaning systems must be approved by AEAMB and SHEMD.
        In addition, Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming
        products, all federal  agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 4.8 of
        Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient room air cleaners.

        A typical cleaning system consists of a prefilter, followed by a solvent-resistant HEPA filter, followed by
        an activated-charcoal filter.  It is good practice to install a prefilter ahead of a HEPA filter to prolong the
        life of the HEPA filter.  In some situations, bag-in/bag-out filter housings should be used to minimize the
        spread of contaminants when the HEPA or prefilter is changed. It is recommended that a compensating
        damper be installed with a HEPA filter so that the airflow will remain constant over the life of the filter.
        The resistance  of HEPA filters to airflow, especially when airflow is loaded with contaminants, must be
                                                  15-33

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        considered in designing a system with HEPA filters. The pressure drop across HEPA and prefilters should
        be monitored and alarmed, and filters changed when necessary. The filter plenum should be located on the
        inlet side of the fan to allow the fan to be serviced from the clean side of a filter. It is good practice to
        allow a straight run of 4 duct lengths before and after the fan in order to obtain good fan performance as
        well as to allow for future installation of other air-cleaning equipment.


15.8   Other Ventilated Enclosures
        Ventilated enclosures are often required by a laboratory to help dissipate heat and ensure containment of
        chemical or biological airborne contaminants produced during certain work. These types of enclosures
        have special design requirements for their intended uses.  Ventilated devices used to control hazardous
        materials must be individually approved by SHEMD and AEAMB.  Ventilating devices used for removal
        of heat or nuisance odors must comply with the parameters set forth in ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation.

15.8.1   GLOVE BOXES
        Glove boxes are often required by laboratory personnel to ensure containment of chemical and biological
        airborne contaminants produced during the employee's work in the box and to prevent escape of those
        contaminants into the room. Such enclosures permit manual manipulations within the box by means of
        armholes provided with impervious gloves, which are sealed to the box at the armholes.  These types of
        enclosures shall comply with NSF Standard 49.

15.8.2   BIOLOGICAL SAFETY  CAB ENETS
        Laminar-flow biological safety cabinets  shall meet minimum standards for cabinet classifications in NSF
        49 for personnel, environmental, and product safety and shall be listed and identified by a distinctive NSF
        seal. Field recertification, performed by an NSF 49  listed competent technician and done according to the
        procedures outlined in NSF 49, will be required once the cabinet(s) is installed.  Cabinet classification shall
        be determined during laboratory programming, in consultation with the users of the facility. These types of
        cabinets have special design requirements depending on their intended use (such as protecting personnel
        from harmful agents inside the cabinet; protecting the work product, experiment, or procedure from
        contaminants outside the cabinet; or protecting the laboratory environment from contaminants inside the
        cabinet) established by the  end user and  listed in the design criteria/POR.

15.8.3   FLAMMABLE LIQUID STORAGE CABINETS
        Cabinets for the storage of Class I, Class II, and Class IIIA liquids shall be provided in accordance with the
        design, construction, and storage capacity requirements stated in NFPA 30, Chapter 4. Venting of storage
        cabinets is not required for fire protection purposes, but venting may be required to  comp ly with local
        codes or authorities having jurisdiction.  Nonvented cabinets shall be sealed with the bungs  supplied with
        the cabinet or with bungs specified by the manufacturer of the cabinet.

        If cabinet venting is required, the cabinet shall be mechanically vented to the outside in accordance with
        requirements of NFPA 30, Chap. 4 listed below:

        •     Both metal bungs must be  removed and replaced with flash arrester screens (normally provided with
              cabinets). The top opening will serve as the fresh air inlet.
        •     The bottom opening must be connected to an exhaust fan by a substantial metal tubing having an
              inside diameter no smaller than the vent.  The tubing should be rigid steel.
        •     The fan should have  a non-sparking fan blade and non-sparking shroud.
        •     The cabinet shall exhaust directly to the outside (the cabinet shall not be vented through the fume
              hood)
        •     The total run of exhaust duct should not exceed 25 ft (17.6 meters).
        •     The design velocity of the duct should not be less than 2,000 fpm per Table 3-2, Industrial
              Ventilation, 22nd Edition.
        •     The cabinets shall be marked in conspicuous lettering "Flammable - Keep Fire Away. "
                                                  15-34

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements
15.9   Air Filtration and Exhaust Systems

15.9.1   DRY FILTRATION
        Air filters for ductwork and equipment installation shall be easily removable, serviceable, and
        maintainable. Air filters shall have face velocities as recommended by the filter manufacturer in order to
        achieve the specified efficiency at the lowest possible pressure drop. Filters shall be constructed of
        noncombustible materials that meet the requirements of UL 900, Class I.  Air filters shall be located on the
        suction side of fans and coils and in other special locations as required for air treatment. Air-filter pressure
        drop gauges of the diaphragm-actuated dial type (preferred) or the inclined manometer type shall be located
        on all filter assemblies except small fan coils and fan-powered VAV terminal units.  The ASHRAE dust
        spot method shall be used in  specifying the efficiencies required for medium-efficiency filters. Filters shall
        be specified, and installed for use, as prefilters, medium-efficiency filters, or high-efficiency filters.

15.9.2   ABSOLUTE FILTRATION
        Absolute filtration, where required in fume hood exhaust systems, will have an efficiency of 99.97 percent,
        as determined by the dioctyl  phthalate (DOP) aerosol test for absolute filters and shall satisfy ASHRAE 52-
        76.

15.9.2.1     TEST ACCESS
            The test access location shall facilitate in-place testing of HEP A filters, with particular attention given
            to plenum hardware that allows the HEPA filter bank to be tested without requiring the testing
            personnel to enter the plenum. Utility services shall be extended to the plenum location (e.g., electrical
            receptacles and compressed air) to facilitate testing work. In-place testing design requirements shall
            meet all the recommendations of UL 586 and ASME N510. HEPA filtration systems shall be  designed
            with prefilters installed upstream of HEPA filters to extend the HEPA filter=s life. The installation of
            prefilters may be omitted if an analysis of filtration requirements and consideration of the filter
            assembly justify omission.

15.9.2.2     FIRE PROTECTION OF HEPA FILTER ASSEMBLIES
            In providing fire protection for the HEPA filters, the design shall sufficiently separate prefilters or fire
            screens equipped with water spray from the HEPA filters in order to restrict impingement of moisture
            on the HEPA filters.  Under conditions of limited separation, moisture eliminators or other means of
            reducing entrained moisture shall be provided.  Moisture eliminators may be omitted where system
            design provides sufficient filter redundancy to ensure continued effluent filtration in the event of fire
            within any portion of the system. The HEPA filter fire protection system shall be activated in a
            manner consistent with the fire protection system in the room or building in which the filters are
            located.

15.9.3   AIR-CLEANING DEVICES FOR SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
        Filters include dry -type dust collectors, wet collectors, centrifugal collectors, absorbers, oxidizers, and
        chemical treatment filters, which are used  primarily in industrial and process-type applications associated
        with air or gases that have heavy dust loadings in exhaust systems or stack gas effluents.  Filters shall be
        designed according to the requirements given in the project criteria, the ASHRAE Handbook ofHVAC
        Systems and Equipment and ACGIH's Industrial Ventilation.

15.9.4   OPERATION
        All building systems shall be designed for continuous operation, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, unless
        otherwise specified in the project criteria.  Additionally, night and weekend set backs are required.
                                                  15-35

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

15.9.5   MAINTENANCE ACCESS
        The air supply and exhaust plenums shall be designed so that such elements as motors, bearings, control
        valves, and steam traps are easily accessible for maintenance.

15.9.6   LOCATION OF AIR INTAKE
        The outside air intake(s) shall be located to provide the cleanest possible source of fresh air for the building
        and shall be so placed, relative to the building's exhausts and vent stacks, as to prevent entrainment of
        contaminated air from outside sources, including, but not limited to, fume hood exhaust, vehicle exhaust,
        exhaust from adjacent structures, and sources of potential microbial contamination, such as vegetation,
        organic matter, and bird and animal droppings.  Special care shall be exercised not to locate mechanical air
        intakes toward the loading dock area. Idling trucks located in loading dock areas may cause contamination
        of intake air. For security reasons, air intakes must be located in accordance with "Guidance for Protecting
        Building Environments from Airborne Chemical, Biological, or Radiological Attacks" DHHS (NIOSH)
        Publication 2002-139, May 2002.

15.9.7   AIR FLOW CHARACTERISTICS STUDY
        The location and design of the exhaust stacks as well as the fresh-air intakes to avoid adverse air quality
        impacts shall be based on criteria developed by a study of prevailing wind patterns utilizing recognized
        wind modeling technology, such as the EPA Industrial Source Complex Model (ISC3) utilizing Briggs
        plume rise equations, and the design criteria of Chapter 16 of the 2001 ASHRAE Handbook, and Chapter
        44 of the 2003 ASHRAE Handbook, as applicable. In addition, the study should take into consideration
        recommendations of Sect. 5.16, Exhaust Stack Outlets, including Figures 5-29 and 5-30, of Industrial
        Ventilation, 22nd Edition, as applicable.


15.10 Plumbing

15.10.1 GENERAL
        The criteria in this section apply to plumbing systems (fixtures, supply piping, drain, waste and vent piping,
        service water heating system, safety devices, and appurtenances) inside the building and up to 5 feet
        beyond the building exterior wall. Plumbing shall comply with the National Standard Plumbing Code
        (NSPC) or local plumbing code, the ASHRAE handbooks, and ASHRAE standard 90. Access panels shall
        be provided where maintenance or replacement of equipment, valves, or other devices is necessary.

15.10.2 WATER SUPPLY
        Type K copper tubing shall be used below grade.  Type L copper tubing shall be used above grade.
        Polybutylene (PB) plastic pipe and tubing may be used in lieu of copper tubing above grade where not
        subject to impact damage or otherwise prohibited by the project criteria. For new systems, domestic water
        shall be supplied by a separate service line and not by a combined fire protection and potable-water service
        or a combined process water and potable-water system within the building.

        •   Fittings for Type K tubing shall be flared brass, solder-type bronze or wrought copper. Fittings for
            Type L tubing shall be solder-type bronze or wrought copper.  Fittings for plastic pipe and tubing shall
            be sol vent-cemented or shall use Schedule 80 threaded. No lead solder shall be used for copper pipe in
            potable-water systems.

        •   Stop valves shall be provided at each fixture. Accessible shutoff valves shall be provided at branches
            serving floors, fixture batteries for isolation, or at risers serving multiple floors. Shutoff valves also
            shall be provided to isolate equipment, valves, and appurtenances for ease of maintenance.

        •   Accessible drain valves shall be provided to drain the entire system. Manual air vents shall be
            provided at high points in the system.


                                                 15-36

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        •   Provision for expansion shall be made where thermal expansion and contraction cause piping systems
            to move. This movement shall be accommodated by using the inherent flexibility of the piping system
            as laid out, by loops, by manufactured expansion joints, or by couplings.

        •   Accessible manufactured water hammer arresters shall be provided.  Dielectric connections shall be
            made between ferrous and nonferrous metallic pipe.

        •   Where domestic water or fire protection service lines enter buildings, suitable flexibility shall be
            provided to protect against differential settlement or  seismic activity, in accordance with the NSPC and
            NFPA 13, respectively.

15.10.2.1    METERING
            All incoming water to an EPA facility shall be directly metered so that the total facility water
            consumption is measured and known. Facility subsystems, such as cooling towers and reverse osmosis
            equipment, that may consume a significant (10 percent or more) portion of the facility water intake,
            based on engineering calculation or estimate, shall be equipped with flow-totalizing sub-meters.
            Meters and sub-meters shall be calibrated and maintained according to the manufacturer's
            specifications. Total metered and sub-metered water consumption shall be recorded and tracked at
            least monthly in a manner that allows facility operating personnel to identify and resolve any unusual
            or unexpected consumption.

15.10.2.2    LEAD IN POTABLE WATER
            Potable water systems components, such as piping, valves, fittings, drinking fountains, and fixtures,
            shall conform with requirements of the EPA National Primary Drinking Water Regulations (NPDWR)
            for lead and copper, 40 CFR Parts 141 and 143. Components shall not be incorporated unless bearing
            the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standard 61 mark signifying compliance with NPDWR
            requirements. Upon substantial completion of the building, the potable water system within the
            building as well as the potable water supply main shall be tested for lead content in accordance with
            EPA Publication entitled "Lead in Drinking Water in Schools and Residential Buildings," EPA 812-B-
            94-002, April 1994. Testing of the building potable  water system and the potable water supply main
            shall be coordinated with the local water company as well as the state environmental protection
            agency.

15.10.2.3    STERILIZATION
            New supply systems or existing supply systems that  have undergone rehabilitation will require
            sterilization in accordance with American Water Works Association (AWWA) C652, AWWA C5186,
            or the local governing plumbing code.

15.10.3 DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT LINES
        Underground lines that do not service laboratory areas shall be service-weight cast-iron soil pipe hub-type
        (with gasket); hubless cast-iron soil pipe may be used in locations where piping is accessible.
        Aboveground (above grade) lines that are 12 inches in diameter and larger shall be either hubless or hub-
        type (with gasket) service-weight cast-iron pipe. Lines that are 12 inches through 6 inches in diameter may
        be acrylonitrile -butadiene-styrene (ABS)  pipe where allowed by the project criteria.  Pipe and fittings shall
        be joined by solvent cement or elastomeric seals.  Lines that are less than 12 inches in diameter shall be
        either (1) Type L copper with solder-type bronze fittings  or wrought copper fittings or (2) galvanized steel
        with galvanized malleable iron recessed threaded and coupled fittings.  Cast-iron soil pipe fittings and
        connections shall comply with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) guidelines.  Provisions for expansion
        shall be included, as above.

        Underground lines servicing the laboratory area shall be acid-resistant  sewer pipe ANSI/ASTM D-2146-69;
        polyethylene plastic pipe and fittings, Schedule 80, ASTM D-1785; PVC plastic pipe, Schedule 80 and 120,
        ASTM D-2241; PVC plastic pipe (SDR-PR), ASTM D-2683; polypropylene fusion welded pipes, Schedule

                                                  15-37

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        80, and approved equal products; or socket-type polyethylene fittings for outside diameter-controlled
        polyethylene pipe.  They shall be welded together following ANSI/American Welding Society (AWS)
        Dl.l, structural welding code; ASTMD-2241; and ASTM D-2855.

15.10.3.1    TRAP SEAL PROTECTION

            A trap primer valve and floor/funnel drain with trap primer valve discharge connections shall be used
            where there is the possibility of loss of the seal in floor/funnel drain traps.

15.10.4  BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
        Backflow preventers of the reduced-pressure-zone type shall be provided on any domestic water and fire
        protection lines serving the building. All domestic water lines shall be provided with water hammer
        suppressors and vacuum breakers at high points of supply lines or at the fixture.

15.10.5  SAFETY DEVICES
        Tempering valves shall be of the fail-safe pressure-balance type. Hot-water generation equipment shall be
        provided with ASME code-stamped tanks, when of sufficient capacity, water temperature, or hot input rate
        to be within the jurisdiction of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Approved pressure-relief
        devices, such as combination temperature-pressure or separate units, depending on the application, shall be
        provided. Backflow preventers and air gaps shall be used to prevent cross-connection (contamination) of
        potable-water supplies. Vacuum breakers (to prevent back-siphonage) shall be used only in conjunction
        with administrative controls.

15.10.5.1    PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
            Pressure-reducing valves shall be provided where service pressure at fixtures or devices exceeds the
            normal operating range recommended by the manufacturer. Wherever a pressure-reducing valve's
            failure may cause equipment damage or unsafe conditions, a pressure-relief valve shall be provided
            downstream of the reducing valve.

15.10.6  LABORATORY SAFETY DEVICES
        Eye and face washing equipment and safely showers must be provided for every laboratory and laboratory
        support room where chemicals are being utilized, or stored, in accordance with the American National
        Standards Institute (ANSI)  Standard Z358.1.  The location and installation of emergency showers and
        eyewash equipment shall be in accordance with the Safety Manual.  Discharge from emergency showers or
        eyewashes should not impinge on powered electrical equipment. Safety equipment must meet ADA
        accessibility requirements.  Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring
        energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products.
        See section 5.2 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications  for energy efficient
        showerheads.

15.10.6.1    EMERGENCY EYEWASH UNITS
            Emergency eyewash units or combination eyewash/safety shower units shall be provided in all work
            areas where, during routine operations or during foreseeable emergencies, the eyes of an individual
            may come into contact with a substance that can cause corrosion, severe irritation, or permanent tissue
            damage, or that is toxic by absorption. At least one eyewash, initiated by a single action, shall be
            provided within every laboratory, or for every two laboratory modules. Eyewash units shall be
            designed to flush both eyes (double-headed unit) simultaneously and to provide hands-free operation.
            The eyewash units chosen should provide protection of the nozzle area with pop-off covers, and other
            protective features to prevent contamination of the flushing system. Design, operation, flow, water
            temperature, and similar characteristics shall meet the criteria in ANSI Z358.1-1998. Water for the
            units shall be supplied by the potable-water system.  The temperature of flushing  fluid for the
            emergency units shall be tepid, 60-95 °F. Emergency eyewash units shall be provided with sanitary
            drains.

                                                 15-38

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements


            Eyewash units shall be in accessible locations that require no more than 10 seconds to reach.  Their
            location in all laboratory spaces shall be standardized as much as possible. Units shall be placed in a
            location away from potential sources of hazard (e.g., fume hoods) and near the exit door. The location
            shall be well lighted and shall be clearly identified with a highly visible sign.  Final location shall be
            approved by the EPA project officer during the design phase.

15.10.6.2    EMERGENCY SAFETY SHOWERS
            Emergency safety shower units shall be provided in areas where, during routine operations or during
            foreseeable emergencies, areas of the body may come into contact with a substance that is corrosive,
            severely irritating to the skin, or toxic by skin absorption. Each safety shower unit shall be equipped
            with an installed flexible hand-held drench hose with a spray head like that used in hand-held eyewash
            units; this shall be mounted on a rack.  All piping for the emergency safety showers shall be above the
            ceiling except for the shower head and the pull bar connection. Design, operation, flow rates, and
            similar characteristics shall meet the criteria in ANSI Z358.1-1998.  Water for shower units shall be
            supplied by the potable water system.  The temperature of flushing fluid for the emergency units shall
            be tepid, 60-95 °F.  Rigid pull bars of stainless steel should be used to activate the shower and should
            extend to within 54 inches of the floor.  The floor area of the emergency safety shower shall be
            textured, well lighted, identified with a highly  visible sign, and maintained free of items that obstruct
            its use. A water flow alarm shall sound when the safety shower is activated. Section  104 of the Energy
            Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies
            procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 5.2 of Addendum 1 to view
            FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient showerheads.

            Location of safety showers shall be standardized as much as possible. Emergency safety showers in
            laboratories shall be located at the room entrance on the right-hand side of the exit door (hinge side);
            instrument laboratories and laboratory support spaces shall have showers located in the corridor at the
            pull side of the room door.  Safety showers shall be provided in accessible locations that require no
            more than 10 seconds to reach from hazard locations, preferably inside or just outside the door of each
            laboratory work area.  Safely showers should be no more than 50 feet travel distance from the hazard
            source. Refer to Chapter 4 of the Safety Manual for additional information.

15.10.7 LABORATORY SERVICE FITTINGS
        Laboratory service fittings for each laboratory space are specified in the room data sheets  and shall be
        compatible with their intended use. All service valves, fittings, and accessories shall be of cast brass with a
        minimum copper content of 85 percent, except for  items that are to be brass-forged or bar stock. All
        service valves, fittings, and accessories shall be especially designed for laboratory use. All laboratory
        service fittings shall have an acid-resisting and solvent-resisting clear plastic coating applied over a clean,
        polished, chrome-plated surface.  Service fittings at fume hoods shall have an acid-resistant and s olvent-
        resistant plastic coating applied over a fine sandblasted surface, properly cleaned.

15.10.8 GLASSWARE WASHING SINKS
        Sinks dedicated to the purpose  of washing laboratory glassware shall have a high or telescoping spigot  with
        a swing-type gooseneck to accommodate large pieces of glassware. Large sinks shall be provided with a
        hand-held sprayer whose weight is supported for ease of operation. All glassware washing sinks shall be
        ventilated at a rate of 280 to 300 cfm with an exhaust air duct connection at the top of the  sink below the
        bench top.

15.10.9 CENTRALIZED LABORATORY WATER SYSTEMS
        The following requirements apply to laboratory water systems.

15.10.9.1    DEIONIZED WATER (DI)  SYSTEM
            Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, the central deionized water system shall have a
            resistivity of greater than 10 megaohms at the tap in each laboratory. This system may be a centralized
                                                  15-39

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            system or several decentralized systems depending on the requirements of the specific laboratory
            facility. Water quality shall conform to ASTM Type I requirements for reagent-quality water and to
            American Pharmaceutical Association (APhA) requirements for water used in microbiological testing.
            Type I water is typically prepared by reverse osmosis, then polishing it with mixed-bed deionizers and
            passing it through a 0.2-micron membrane filter. Pipes and fittings for the DI system shall be
            polyvinylidine fluoride (PVDF) schedule 80 or unpigmented polypropylene. A bypass or drain legs
            shall be provided at the lowest points in the piping system to avoid stagnation of water at the branch
            pipes during extended periods of non-use.

15.10.9.2    HOT AND COLD WATER, POTABLE
            The laboratory potable-water supply shall be piped in Type K or Type L copper. Only potable water
            shall be used for emergency eyewash units and emergency showers.

15.10.9.3    INDUSTRIAL HOT AND COLD WATER, NONPOTABLE
            The laboratory nonpotable-water supply, identified as industrial hot/cold water, shall be piped in Type
            K or Type L copper. Approved backflow prevention devices shall isolate the laboratory nonpotable
            water system from the potable-water system. Hot-water supply shall be insulated, and hot water shall
            be recirculated to conserve energy.

15.10.9.4    CULTURE WATER SYSTEM
            Culture water system piping shall be of Schedule 80 unpigmented polypropylene and shall have no
            metal in contact with the water. The holding tank shall be lined with unpigmented polypropylene.
            Transfer pumps shall be of solid unpigmented polypropylene.

15.10.9.5    METERS
            Special centralized laboratory water supply  systems,  such as deionized water, reverse osmosis water,
            or culture water systems shall be equipped with flow totalizing meters that measure total water
            consumption.

15.10.9.6    SIZING
            Systems shall be sized to meet the needs of the facility.  Designs should accommodate anticipated
            future growth through the ability to add modular additional capacity, rather than by providing initial
            overcapacity.

15.10.10 DRINKING FOUNTAINS
        At least one drinking fountain  shall be provided  on each block of space so that no person will have to travel
        more than 150 feet to reach it.  Self-contained mechanically refrigerated coolers shall be provided wherever
        a need for drinking fountains exists. Ratings shall be based on ARI 1010. Electrical equipment shall be
        UL listed. The refrigeration coils shall not be assembled using lead solder, and all components must bear
        the marking NSF 61 indicating the components are free of lead. All drinking fountains and locations for
        drinking fountains shall comply with ADA.

15.10.11 TOILET FACILITIES
        Separate toilet facilities for men and women shall be provided. The facilities must be located so that
        employees will not have to travel more than 150 feet to reach them. The toilet rooms' hot water should be
        set at 105 °F, or as required by the project criteria.  Water closets and urinals shall not be visible when the
        toilet room entry door is open.  All public toilet rooms shall be located along an accessible path of travel;
        must have accessible fixtures,  accessories, and doors and adequate maneuvering clearances; and shall meet
        UFAS and ADA requirements. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring
        energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products.
        See sections 5.3 and 5.4 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient
        toilets and urinals.
                                                  15-40

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

15.10.11.1   TOILET SCHEDULE
            Unless otherwise specified by EPA, each toilet room shall have a minimum of two for each men=s
            toilet room and a minimum of four for each women's toilet room, enclosed with modern stall partitions
            and doors.  Each men's toilet room should also have at least two urinals. The number of water closets
            in each women's toilet room shall be no less than the sum of water closets plus urinals of the adjacent
            men's toilet room.  The number of water closets, urinals, and lavatories shall comply with all state and
            local codes and with project criteria. If a conflict exists between the project criteria and the state and
            local codes, the more stringent shall apply unless otherwise directed by the contracting officer.

15.10.11.2   ACCESSORIES
            Each main toilet room shall contain:

            •   A soap dispenser, shelf, and mirror above the lavatory
            •   A toilet paper dispenser in each water closet stall
            •   A coat hook on the inside face of each water closet stall door and on the wall immediately inside
                the door of the toilet room.
            •   At least one modern paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle for every two lavatories
            •   A coin-operated sanitary napkin dispenser in women's toilet rooms
            •   Ceramic tile or comparable wainscot from the floor to a minimum height of 4 feet 6 inches
            •   A disposable toilet-seat-cover dispenser
            •   A convenience electrical outlet located adjacent to one mirror in each toilet room
            •   A small covered container located inside each water  closet partition enclosure in the women's
                toilet room for the disposal of used sanitary napkins
            •   Toilet partitions made of recycled material.

            The toilet room shall have at least one towel rack, towel dispenser, and other dispensers and disposal
            units mounted no higher than 48 inches from the floor, or 54 inches if a person in a wheelchair has to
            approach it from the side. One mirror with shelf shall be provided above the lavatory at as low a
            height as possible and no higher than 40 inches above the floor, measured from the top of the shelf and
            the bottom of the mirror. A common mirror provided for both the able and the disabled must provide a
            convenient view for both.

15.10.11.3   TOILET STALL ACCESSIBILITY
            All toilet rooms designated for public access shall have one toilet stall that:

            •   Is 60 inches wide.
            •   Has a minimum depth of 56 inches when wall-mounted toilets are used or 59 inches when floor-
                mounted sets are used.
            •   Has a clear floor area.
            •   Has a door that is 32 inches wide and swings out.
            •   Has handrails on each side (front-transfer stall) or on the side and back (side-transfer stall).
                Handrails shall be 33 to 36 inches high and parallel to the floor, shall be 1 to 12 inches in outside
                diameter, shall have 12 inches of clearance between  rail and wall, and shall be fastened securely at
                ends and center.  Handrails shall have no sharp edges and must permit the continuous sliding of
                hands.
            •   Has a water closet mounted at a height of 17 to 19 inches, measured from the floor to the top of
                the seat.  Hand-operated or automatic flush controls  shall be mounted no higher than 44 inches
                above the floor.

            A toilet stall measuring 36 or 48 inches wide by 66 inches, but preferably 72 inches, deep may be
            acceptable, as determined by EPA.
                                                  15-41

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

15.10.11.4   LAVATORY ACCESSIBILITY
            At least one lavatory shall be mounted with a clearance of 29 inches from the floor to the top of the
            bottom of the apron. The height from the floor to the top of the lavatory rim shall not exceed 34
            inches.  Faucets shall be lever operated, push type, or electronically activated for one-hand operation
            without the need for tight pinching or grasping. Drain pipes and hot-water pipes under a lavatory must
            be covered, insulated, or recessed far enough so that individuals in wheelchairs who are without
            sensation will not burn themselves.

15.10.11.5   URINAL ACCESSIBILITY
            Toilet rooms for men shall have wall-mounted urinals with elongated lips, with the basin opening no
            more than 17 inches above the floor. Accessible floor-mounted stall  urinals with basins at the level of
            the floor are acceptable.

15.10.11.6   WATER-CONSERVING WATER CLOSETS, SINKS, AND LAVATORIES
            Flow control devices shall be installed (unless otherwise dictated by the project criteria) on all water
            closets,  sinks, and lavatories. Devices shall limit water closet flow to 1.6 gallons per flush, urinals to
            1.0 gallon per minute, and regular lavatories to 1.5 gallons per minute.  New lavatory faucets shall be
            equipped with automatic, sensor-operated shut-off valves. Automatic sensors shall be adjusted and
            maintained according to the manufacturer's specifications. Waterless urinals shall be considered
            whenever new facilities are built or renovations are made to an existing site.  Section 104 of the
            Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal
            agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See sections 5.1, 5.3, and 5.4 of
            Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient faucets, toilets, and urinals.

15.10.12 SHOWER STALLS
        Shower stalls shall be of fiberglass construction, complete with door, soap ledge, shower head, separate
        hot- and cold-water knobs, non-skid floor finish, and standard 2-inch floor drain.  Shower stalls shall also
        provide a small change area with lockers. Emergency shower deluge heads shall  not be used in regular
        shower stalls. Shower stalls shall conform with requirements of ADA and/or UFAS, as applicable.  Section
        104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal
        agencies  procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 5.2 of Addendum 1 to view
        FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient showerheads.

15.10.13 HOSE BIBBS
        Three-quarter-inch hose  bibbs should be provided on exterior walls of the building(s), 30 inches above
        grade.  At least one hose bibb shall be installed on each wall.  When an exterior wall exceeds 75 feet in
        length, additional bibbs shall be installed so that distance between bibbs does not exceed 75 feet.
        Depending on the geographical location of the facility, the design professional shall use freeze-proof hose
        bibbs.

15.10.14 WATER CONSERVATION ELEMENTS AND TECHNIQUES
        All significant water-using processes should be evaluated using the pollution prevention hierarchy of
        reduce, recycle, and reuse. Water use reduction should be considered as the first alternative. Each system
        shall be designed and operated in a manner that uses the minimum amount of water practicable.  Within a
        system, water shall be recycled to the maximum degree practicable, prior to discharge. Water discharged
        from processes that require high quality water shall be considered for reuse in systems where the residual
        quality is sufficient for proper operation.

15.10.15 SINGLE PASS COOLING
        Use of potable water for single pass cooling is prohibited. Acceptable replacements for single pass cooling
        are recirculated chilled water loops or point of use chillers. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005
        requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star


                                                  15-42

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                          July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        or FEMP-designated products. See sections 2.2 and 2.3 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing
        specifications for energy efficient air-cooled chillers and water-cooled chillers.


15.11  Acid Neutralization System
        All nonsanitary laboratory wastewaters are required to pass through an acid neutralization system to control
        pH as well as other chemical and/or material constituents, before discharging into a local publicly owned
        treatment works (POTW). The system shall be designed and constructed in accordance with 40 CFR 403.5,
        National Pretreatment Standard Prohibited Discharges, the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination
        System (NPDES), and the local POTW.  The system shall have the capability of automatic, continuous
        monitoring and recording of wastewater discharge flow, pH, and other constituents to conform with POTW
        requirements.  System components shall be accessible for monitoring, sampling, and maintenance.  In
        addition, the system shall be provided with emergency power and an audible and visual alarm to alert staff
        in event of non-conforming discharges.


15.12 Laboratory Gases and Process Piping Systems

15.12.1 NONFLAMMABLE AND FLAMMABLE GAS SYSTEMS
        Systems for flammable and nonflammable gas must meet the following requirements.

15.12.1.1    GENERAL
            Special gas services for flammable and nonflammable gases shall be provided to all laboratories
            requiring their use.  Gases shall be stored and piped in accordance with NFPA 45, Fire Protection for
            Laboratories Using Chemicals; NFPA 50A, Gaseous Hydrogen at Consumer Sites; NFPA SOB,
            Liquified Hydrogen at Consumer Sites; NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code; and NFPA 55,
            Compressed and Liquefied Gases in Portable Cylinders, as applicable. In situations not covered by
            NFPA code, the Compressed Gas Association (CGA) shall be consulted for guidance.  No piping from
            any of these systems shall be run above or in the exit corridors.

            •   Gas cylinders for nonflammable gases, both in-use and standby, shall be manifolded from  a
                remotely located space that is central to the laboratory areas and served by and accessible from the
                main storeroom or loading and receiving dock area.  This space shall be designed and ventilated in
                accordance with code requirements.
            •   Flammable-gas cylinders shall be provided at the point of use only and shall be housed in
                ventilated cabinet enclosures mechanically ventilated to atmosphere with leak detection and
                alarm-monitoring devices.

15.12.1.2    DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
            For all laboratories except metals analysis laboratories, a  seamless-copper-piping gas distribution
            system for nonflammable gases shall be provided to all designated laboratories. Ideally, the length of
            the gas distribution lines should not exceed 100 feet to avoid the necessity for pipe j oints.  If pipe j oints
            are required due to line length, prior approval by EPA is required.  The process piping contractor shall
            propose proper sleeving.  Regulator valves and other auxiliary equipment required to furnish gas at the
            required pressures shall be provided. Pipe sizes shall be coordinated to ensure proper velocity  of the
            gas from the cylinders(s) to the point of application.  The number and type of gas outlets in each room
            are indicated in the room data sheets.  Exact and final outlet location in each laboratory must be
            approved by EPA during the design phase. The system design shall include a capability for individual
            room cutoff.

15.12.1.3    DISTRIBUTION TO METALS LABORATORIES
            For all laboratories used for metals analysis, a seamless Teflon-piping gas-distribution system shall be
            provided.  The lines shall be placed inside larger PVC pipes and vented to the outside of the building.

                                                 15-43

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                      Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

            Each line in this system shall be equipped at both ends with regulator valves and other auxiliary
            equipment required to furnish gas at required pressures. Gas-distribution systems other than Teflon
            may be utilized if approved by EPA. Pipe sizes shall be coordinated to ensure proper velocity of the
            gas from the cylinder(s) to the point of use.

15.12.1.4    BOTTLE GAS SUPPLY
            The bottle gas supply shall be provided with duty and standby sets with automatic changeover valves
            and controls.  For all gases, an indicator panel shall be installed close to the point of use in each of the
            laboratories.  Rooms may be clustered in the panel as long as the distance between the point of use and
            the panel does not exceed 75 feet.

            When toxic or explosive gases are used in a confined space, a multipoint gas analyzer and alarm
            system shall be provided to monitor concentration of the gases within this space.  This system shall
            consist of gas sensors/transmitters, wiring, and a microprocessor-based monitoring-and-alarm control
            panel.  The number and type of sensors/ transmitters shall depend on the specific application. Each
            sensor/transmitter shall transmit a frequency signal proportional to the gas concentration and  shall have
            a special amplifier to eliminate the effects of radio frequency interferences. The control panel shall be
            capable of monitoring, and providing an alarm on, different types of gases in different zones; the panel
            shall have an  audible and a visible alarm.  The control panel shall also have a factory -wired terminal
            strip to interface with the energy management system for remote monitoring and alarms.

15.12.1.5    LIQUID NITROGEN AND LIQUID ARGON
            Liquid nitrogen and liquid argon must be delivered to the point of use in liquid form.  Insulation in the
            delivery system must be sufficient to prevent evaporation losses of liquid nitrogen. The gas
            distribution room for these two gases shall be as close as possible to the laboratory rooms where the
            gases are usedCpreferably adjacent to them.  This gas distribution room shall also be directly
            accessible from the outside of the building without use of the laboratory corridors. One large tank for
            each gas shall be provided; each tank shall be permanently fixed in the room.  The tanks shall be
            outfitted with necessary valves and  controls, as required by the gas supplier.

15.12.1.6    NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
            Unless otherwise  specified in the project criteria, each laboratory must have a natural gas distribution
            system.

15.12.1.7    TESTING AND PURGING
            Before acceptance, the distribution  system must be pressure tested and purged. The required level of
            purity specified at the point of use shall be maintained at all points in the system during testing and
            purging.

15.12.2 COMPRESSED-AIR SYSTEMS
        When compressed-air systems are required, these systems should have oil and water traps, a dryer, and all
        controls. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each compressed-air system shall have duplex
        compressors (one  redundant) with an automatic lead/lag switch and a single compressor tank.  Compressed-
        air systems for processes shall be completely independent of the compressed-air system for the HVAC
        controls. The compressed-air system shall provide a water trap and pressure regulation at each laboratory.
        An audible alarm and remote annunciation shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of air pressure.  Air
        compressors shall use vibration pads and springs, as needed, to substantially diminish vibration and sound
        generated by compressors. Further, compressor location should minimize transmission of vibration and
        sound to the building or rooms that the compressors service.

15.12.3 VACUUM SYSTEMS
        When a laboratory vacuum system is required, it  shall be composed of several vacuum pumps capable of
        evacuating air at a regulated suction of 25 inches of mercury or as specified in the project criteria. Storage

                                                   15-44

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

        volume and number of pumps shall be determined at the design stage as needed to meet laboratory
        benchwork requirements. Unless otherwise specified in the project criteria, each vacuum system shall have
        duplex pumps, an automatic lead/lag switch, and a single tank. An audible alarm and remote annunciation
        shall be provided to alert personnel to a loss of vacuum. Vacuum pumps shall use vibration pads and
        springs, as needed, to substantially diminish vibration and sound generated by the pumps. Further, pump
        location should minimize transmission of vibration and sound to the building or rooms that the pumps
        service.


15.13 Testing and Balancing

15.13.1 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
        An independent air balance and testing agency that specializes in the balancing and testing of HVAC
        systems shall be used to balance, adjust, and test air-moving equipment and the air distribution system,
        water system, gas system, and compressed air-piping systems, as applicable. The independent contractor
        shall be an organization (1) whose specialty is testing and balancing environmental systems, (2) that is a
        member of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental Balancing Bureau
        (NEBB), and (3) that has satisfactorily balanced at least three systems whose type and size are comparable
        to those of this project. The independent testing and balancing contractor shall be registered in the state in
        which the project is located.

15.13.2 SCOPE OF WORK
        The testing and balancing (TAB) work shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the following
        items:

            •   All air-conditioning supply and return systems
            •   Air exhaust systems
            •   Laboratory fume hood (LFH) supply and exhaust systems (including certification and performance
                testing of the laboratory fume hoods in accordance with EPA Procedure for Certifying Laboratory
                Fume Hoods to Meet EPA Standards)
            •   All hydronic systems
            •   Gas and compressed-air systems.

15.13.3 TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
        The TAB procedures shall be in accordance with those prescribed by AABC or NEBB.  The certification of
        the newly installed laboratory fume hoods requires use of test methods described in the ANSI/ASHRAE
        110 "Method of Testing Performance Laboratory Fume Hoods" and the Scientific Equipment & Furniture
        Association, "Laboratory Fume Hoods Recommended Practices."  The tests are modified to meet EPA
        standards and include:

            •   Measurement of cross draft velocities using a velocity anemometer located with the tip of the
                probe approximately 12 to 18 inches in front of the hood.  Cross draft velocities should be
                measured parallel and perpendicular to hood face opening in front of the left, center and right sides
                of the hood.
            •   Measurement efface velocity with the vertical sash open 100 percent, 80 percent (design opening
                and height of mechanical sash stop) and vertical 6 inches open. The grid velocity measurements
                must be made using a velocity anemometer. Each grid velocity measurement should be recorded
                as the average velocity over a minimum of 10 seconds or ten readings per grid location.
            •   Smoke Visualization Tests at the 80% design sash opening.  The smoke tests must include  a low
                volume challenge and a high volume challenge.
            •   VAV Tests that measure flow response and stability in response to sash movements between 6
                inches open and 80% open.  The VAV tests are conducted by measuring face velocity or sbt
                velocity in the baffle (variations in face velocity greater than 10 percent requires slot velocity
                                                 15-45

-------
July 2006
                                                                  Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 15- Mechanical Requirements


                measurement). A data logger is required to record face velocity data at a rate of at least 1 sample
                per second. The VAV tests consist of a 5 minute response test and two five minute stability tests.
                The response test is conducted by recording velocity while raising and lowering the sash three
                times during the 5 minute period.  The sash is raised and lowered at a rate of approximately 1.5
                ft/sec following the sash being lowered for 30 seconds and raised for 60 seconds.  The stability
                tests are conducted by measuring velocity for five minutes at the 6 inch sash height and the five
                minutes at the 80% sash height.
            •   Recording of exhaust flow at the 6 inch sash opening and 80% sash opening. The flow rates are
                particularly important when  slot velocities are measured and be verified against face velocity
                measurements.


        The certification and/or performance  testing of the LFH shall be performed by the fume hood manufacturer
        in presence of a SHEMD representative after the testing and balancing work has been completed, and the
        testing and balancing report submitted and approved by SHEMD.  The TAB contractor shall be present and
        available to make needed adjustments during certifications and performance testing of LFHs by the LFH
        manufacturer. Criteria for the tests are summarized in Table 15.13.3.1.
 Table 15.13.3.1 Testing Criteria for Newly Installed Laboratory Fume Hoods
                                                                Notes
                                                                Sash 80% open
Test
Cross Draft Test
Criteria
Vcd < 25 fpm
Max < 50 fpm
 Face Velocity -100% Open
 Face Velocity - 80% Open
 Face Velocity - 6" Open
 VAV Response Test
 VAV Stability Test-6 inch
 Opening
                             Vfavg = 80 fpm
                             Vfmin > 70 fpm
                             Vfmax< 90 fpm

                             Vfavg = 100 fpm
                             Vfmin > 90 fpm
                             Vfmax< 110 fpm

                             Vf avg < 300 fpm for CAV hoods
                             Vfavg  100 fpm for VAV hoods

                             Dynamic Sash Movement
                             DSSV6 > 100 fpm (equivalent slot
                             velocity)
                             DSSD6< 10%
                             DSSV80 = 100 fpm ± 10 fpm

                             DSSD80< 10%
                             DRT80 < 5 seconds
                             DRD80 < 20%
                             Stability Test
                             SSSV6> 100 fpm
                             SSSD6< 10%
                             QBAS6 > 50 cfm/linear ft of hood
                             width
                                 VAV hoods can have 100 fpm face
                                 velocity at 100% sash full open.
                                 Mechanical sash stop installed.
                                 Monitor must indicate within 10% of
                                 actual face velocity.
                                 Average steady state velocity at 6
                                 inches
                                 Steady state deviation
                                 Average steady state velocity at 80%
                                 open
                                 Steady state deviation
                                 Response time
                                 Max deviation from average steady state
                                 velocity.

                                 Steady state velocity at 6 inch opening
                                 or equivalent
                                 Steady state deviation
                                 Reported flow at 6 inch opening
 VAV Stability Test - 80%
 Opening
                             Stability Test
                             SSSV80=100fpm± 10
                             SSSD80< 10%
                             QBAS80 ± 10% of design flow
                                 Steady state velocity at 6 inch opening
                                 or equivalent
                                 Steady state deviation
                                 Reported flow at 80% opening
                                                  15-46

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 15- Mechanical Requirements

15.13.4 TESTING AND BALANCING DEVICES
        HVAC air and water distribution systems shall be provided with permanently installed, calibrated testing
        and balancing devices, such as pressure gages, balancing valves, pilot tubes, dampers, thermometers, test
        holes, with access, as needed, to accurately measure and adjust water and air flows, pressures, and
        temperatures as required. At a minimum, the balancing devices in Table 15.13.4.1, Required Balancing
        Devices for Water and Steam Distribution Systems, and Table 15.13.4.2, Required Balancing Devices for
        Air Distribution Systems, shall be provided. Test devices shall be located and installed according to AABC
        Volume A-82.


        Table 15.13.4.1 Required Balancing Devices for Water and Steam Distribution Systems	
        System Components (Water)                        Required System Devices
        Pump suction and discharge piping                   Manifold pressure gauge with pressure taps
        Pump discharge piping                              Flow-measuring device (type depending on accuracy
                                                          required) or inlet and discharge pressure gauges
        Chiller evaporator water suction and discharge piping  Thermometer/test well; pressure gauge and
                                                          gaugecock
        Boiler or heat exchanger suction and discharge piping  Same devices as required for chiller evaporator
                                                          piping
        Heating or cooling coil (air-handling unit [AHU])     Thermometer/test well; pressure gauge/pressure tap
        suction and discharge piping
        Heating or cooling coil (AHU) discharge piping       Presettable calibrated balancing valve with integral
                                                          pressure test ports
        Reheat coil, fan coil unit, unit heater, ports, and finned Presettable calibrated balancing valve with integral
        tube radiation, convector: (1) discharge piping        pressure test ports; temperature test; and pressure tap
        (2) suction piping
        Three-way control valves (each port) suction and     Pressure tap
        discharge piping
        Boiler discharge piping                             Flow-measuring device (orifice or venturi type)
                                                  15-47

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                    Section 15- Mechanical Requirements


       Table 15.13.4.2 Required Balancing Devices for Air Distribution Systems	
       System Components                              Required System Device
       Diffusers, grilles, registers                         Round butterfly or square/rectangular opposed-blade
                                                       volume damper, either integral with device or in spin-in
                                                       takeoffs
       Branch ductwork runs                             Rectangular/square or round (with more than one
                                                       opposed-blade damper and terminal device). Sealed
                                                       test hole for pilot tube traverse
       Fan discharge ductwork                           Sealed test holes for pilot tube Iraverse.  Sealed lesl
                                                       hole for slalic pressure measuremenls
       Fan suction duclwork                             Sealed lesl hole for slalic pressure measuremenl
       Cooling coil suction and discharge airslreams         Ducl-mounled airslream Ihermomeler
       Healing coil suction and discharge airslreams         Ducl-mounled airslream Ihermomeler
       Mixed-air plenum airslream                        Ducl-mounled airslream Ihermomeler
15.13.5  REPORTING
        Al Ihe completion of Ihe testing and balancing work, Ihe testing and balancing conlraclor shall submil a
        report for EPA approval lhal conforms in formal, and conlenl to Ihe requiremenls of AABC and/or NEBB
        The report shall reflecl all aspecls of Ihe testing and balancing work, including a comparison of Ihe
        adjusted/balanced performance of Ihe systems wilh design requiremenls. The report shall be delivered al
        leasl 15 days prior lo final inspection of Ihe building.

15.14   Commissioning

        Refer lo Appendix B of Ihis Manual for Ihe commissioning requiremenls.


END OF SECTION 15
                                                 15-48

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                          July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements


                         Section 16 - Electrical Requirements


16.1       General

16.1.1   CODE COMPLIANCE
        All work done in this section shall comply with the applicable requirements of the most current edition of
        the following codes and references:

        •   National Electrical Code (NEC) (NFPA 70)
        •   National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72)
        •   Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems (NFPA 90A)
        •   Life Safety  Code (NFPA 101)
        •   Emergency  and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 110)
        •   Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power Systems (NFPA 111)
        •   Lightning Protection Systems (NFPA 780)
        •   Factory Mutual (FM) Engineering Loss Prevention Data Sheet 5-4, Transformers
        •   29 CFR §§1910.303-305
        •   Prudent Practices in the Laboratory: Handling and Disposal of Chemicals, National Research Council
        •   Title III Standards for the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)  and Uniform Federal Accessibility
            Standards, sections  2,  3, 4, and 4a, respectively, of the Architectural Barriers Act of 1968, as amended
        •   NACE International Standards
        •   Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
        •   American National  Standard Institute (ANSI)
        •   National Electrical  Safety Code (NESC)
        •   Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IBS) Lighting Handbook
        •   Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCEA)
        •   Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) standards
        •   PBS-P100, Facilities Standards for the Public Building Service.

        In addition, all work must comply with all applicable federal, state, city, and local codes, regulations,
        ordinances, publications, and manuals. All newly manufactured equipment shall be listed by Underwriters
        Laboratories Inc. (UL) or a similar testing laboratory acceptable to EPA.  When codes conflict, the most
        stringent standard shall govern.

16.1.2   ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
        Electrical installations shall maintain the integrity of fire stopping, fire resistance, fire separation, smoke
        control, zoning,  and other structurally oriented fire safety features in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA
        101.

16.1.3   ENERGY CONSERVATION IN DESIGN
        After careful study of the facility's requirements as well as of the day-to-day operation of its various
        departments, the design  professional shall design systems that meet facility operating requirements in an
        energy-efficient manner. The health and safety aspects of the operation must retain first priority, however,
        and cannot be relaxed or traded off for more efficient systems. System and lighting design shall comply
        with the requirements of American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
        (ASHRAE) standard 90, IBS Lighting Handbook, the Facilities Management and Services Division
        (FMSD) Energy Conservation Planning Handbook, EPA's Energy Star Program, and any state or local
        energy conservation codes or recommendations.  Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires
        that, when procuring energy consuming  products, all federal  agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-

                                                 16-1

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

        designated products. See section 1.0 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy
        efficient lighting.

16.1.3.1     LOCAL ENERGY CONSERVATION PROGRAMS
            The local utility company shall be contacted to find the latest information on any and all energy
            conservation programs in effect sponsored by the utility company. The economic validity of pursuing
            these programs shall be presented to EPA with the first design submittal, and if the programs are
            deemed viable, they shall be incorporated into the design for the project. The design professional, with
            EPA, shall pursue rebates and other assistance to install energy conserving equipment, if applicable.

16.1.3.2     LOAD SHEDDING/PEAK SHAVING
            The payback and attributed atmospheric admissions involved in introducing a load-shedding/peak-
            shaving system into the facility design shall be evaluated.  If a preliminary evaluation indicates a
            payback of 5 years or less, a detailed evaluation of load shedding/peak shaving systems for the project
            shall be prepared and submitted to EPA for funding consideration. The operational duty ratings of the
            systems evaluated and proposed is of utmost importance.  Continuous duty operation equipment is
            required. Factors such as the various fuel sources, exhaust fume contribution to outdoor air quality,
            local air quality standards, and energy-efficient generator equipment shall also be considered.

16.1.3.3     DEMAND-SIDE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
            A demand-side management system to keep the peak demand of the facility below a predetermined
            level shall be evaluated. An economic analysis to determine the payback on such a system shall be
            performed. This system, if feasible, shall have the capability to follow the demand variations as an
            operator manually switches the loads.

16.1.4   COORDINATION OF WORK
        A coordinated set of documents (i.e., coordination between architectural; electrical; heating, ventilation,
        and air-conditioning [HVAC]; plumbing; equipment; and structural systems forbidding) shall be provided.
        Documentation shall clearly identify the division of work among the trades and delineate the coordination
        responsibilities of the contractor.  Special attention shall be given to designed-in equipment and equipment
        to be provided by the facility occupants.

16.1.5   POWER FACTORS
        The design professional shall design the facility's electrical system so as to assure that the overall power
        factor of the entire  electrical installation is a minimum of 90 percent.  This power factor may be achieved
        by selection of electrical utilization equipment with individual power factor ratings that would render the
        required facility power factor or through the installation of power factor correction devices to meet the
        overall facility power factor requirement.  The design professional shall assure that certain groups of
        inductive type loads, such as motors of 5 HP and above, fluorescent lighting fixtures, transformers, etc., are
        equipped with power factor correction at an individual level so that combined, the overall facility power
        factor will be attained. All required power factor correction devices shall be switched with the utilization
        equipment unless doing so results in an unsafe condition.

16.1.6   HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS
        The facility shall also comply with the electrical requirements of the Uniform Federal Accessibility
        Standards (UFAS) (1984), adopted by  the General Services Administration (GSA) in 41 CFR Parts 101 -
        19.6, as well as with ADA and all state and local laws and standards for buildings and facilities that must
        be accessible and usable by physically handicapped people. The most stringent of these codes shall apply.

16.1.7   MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
        All specified materials and equipment shall be standard products of manufacturers that are regularly and
        currently engaged in production of such items. Items that are obsolete or to be discontinued by the
        manufacturer, as well as materials and equipment of an experimental nature (or products that would be

                                                   16-2

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

        installed in a facility for the first time with this project), are not acceptable and will not be permitted. All
        material and equipment shall be specification grade, new, free from defects, and high quality, and shall be
        entirely suitable for these specific facilities.

16.1.8  ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
        Careful consideration shall be given in the design to the types of materials to be used for the project as they
        relate to the environment in which they will be installed.  Exterior equipment may be subject to different
        types of corrosive atmospheres and environments. Interior equipment in laboratories and testing and
        storage areas may also be subject to corrosive conditions. All equipment and material shall be suitable for
        the environment in which it will be installed.  Noise mitigation shall be provided for equipment such as
        transformers and generators. Environmental considerations for electrical raceways and enclosures are
        further discussed in paragraph 16.13 of this section.


16.2   Primary Distribution

16.2.1  DUCTBANKS AND CABLE
        All primary electrical distribution at new sites shall be underground. Underground cables should be
        preferably installed in conduit; however, very long cable runs may be installed where the cost of installing
        cables in conduit is extremely high.  A cost comparison between direct burial cables and cables installed in
        conduit shall be submitted to the Project Officer for approval within ten (10) calendar days after contract
        award.  The minimum conduit size for primary voltage cables shall  be 4 inches. On multiple conduit
        ductbanks for primary distribution systems and for the emergency power distribution system up to the
        emergency distribution switchgear, 25  percent and not less than one (1) spare empty conduit shall be
        provided.  Spare empty conduits for other critical  equipment feeders, like the central HVAC equipment,
        shall be provided as directed by the FOR or the Project Officer.

16.2.1.1     DUCTBANK ENCASEMENT
            All underground cables and wires  shall be installed in conduit.  Underground conduit for circuits rated
            600 volts or higher shall be encased in concrete.  Multiple ductbanks where the heat produced by
            adjacent circuits  affect the current carrying capacity of each individual circuit shall be encased in
            concrete.

16.2.2  SWITCHES
        When a new campus-type utility distribution system or an extension of an existing campus-type distribution
        system is a part of the project, a loop system shall be considered. This system shall have sectionalizing
        primary switches. Primary switches shall be of load break design.  All switches shall be pad mounted and
        lockable. Enclosures for  switches shall be suitable to the environment in which the switches will be
        located. Where switches are to be located indoors, they shall be physically isolated from any emergency
        electrical equipment and shall be located in electrical rooms only.

16.2.3  OVERHEAD POWER SUPPLY LINES
        Overhead power supply lines can be used only where service is to be installed in remote or unsettled areas,
        industrial areas, or areas where underground service is not feasible.  Maximum use shall be made of single-
        pole structures. Overhead power supply lines may also be used for  feeders to small single-phase loads or
        buildings.  Careful consideration shall be given to the location of overhead lines in relation to future land
        use.

16.2.3.1     POWER AND COMMUNICATION POLES
            Joint use of poles for power and communications distribution shall maintain safety standards and shall
            limit electrical interference to communications services. In joint use of poles, either for multiple
            electrical distribution systems or for both electrical distribution and communication lines, underbuilt
            lines or cables shall be of vertical construction. Use of double-stacked cross run construction shall be

                                                   16-3

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

            allowed only where proper clearances for hot-line maintenance work can be ensured. Clearances shall
            comply with the National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) [American National Standards Institute
            (ANSI) standard C2].

16.2.4   TRANSFORMERS
        Transformers shall be located and installed in accordance with NEC Article 450 and in such a way as to
        minimize the fire and contamination hazards to the EPA facility and its occupants. The following
        requirements also apply:

        •   Whenever any public utility transformer or other equipment involves a dielectric fluid that is
            combustible, toxic, or otherwise hazardous, it shall not be located inside an EPA facility.

        •   Utility transformer vaults or transformer locations abutting an EPA building shall conform to the
            requirements of the NEC. Transformer equipment shall not be located adjacent to, or directly beneath,
            any exit.

        •   Transformers, fluorescent ballasts, and other electrical devices containing poly chlorinated biphenyls
            (PCBs) shall not be used in EPA facilities.

        •   All transformers located within an EPA building shall be dry-type only (unless they are located within
            a transformer vault and furnished with a liquid confinement area and a pressure relief vent).

16.2.4.1     DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
            Dry-type transformers shall be provided with four 2.5 percent taps, two above and two below rated
            primary voltage.  All transformers shall be designed for continuous operation; the insulation for dry
            type transformers shall be class "H." All transformers shall conform to the design, temperature-rise,
            testing, and other requirements specified by the Acoustical Society of America (ASA), NEMA, and
            IEEE standards and shall have a rated sound level of 45 decibels (dBA) or below.  To ensure against
            objectionable levels of noise being transmitted through the building, the dry-type transformers shall be
            mounted on approved vibration-isolation mountings. Connection to transformers shall be made with
            flexible steel conduit (Greenfield) with grounding jumper.  All dry-type transformers shall be designed
            for nonlinear loads and shall be isolated-type transformers. They shall be K-rated and shall be shielded
            and located as close as possible to the load. The designer shall consider the use of shielded isolation
            transformers for sensitive computer and other electronic equipment loads.

16.2.4.2     OUTSIDE SUBSTATIONS AND TRANSFORMER INSTALLATIONS
            In addition to the requirements above, outside substations and transformers meet the most current
            requirements of Article 450 of the NEC and applicable local utility company  substation construction
            standards.

16.2.5   SYSTEM REDUNDANCY
        A risk/benefit analysis should be performed to justify added capital costs for system redundancy.


16.3   Service Entrance

16.3.1   GENERAL
        All service entrance equipment shall be UL listed for use as service entrance equipment. All components
        shall be factory wired for switchboards, panelboards, or unit substations before shipment. Service entrance
        equipment shall be physically isolated from all emergency power systems so that a failure in either system
        will not affect the operation of the other system. All service switchboards shall have factory-installed
        ammeters and voltmeters.


                                                   16-4

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

16.3.2  OVERHEAD SERVICES
        Overhead services to buildings should not be used except in particular circumstances where underground
        services are not feasible, and then only with approval of the EPA contracting officer's representative
        (COR). Where electrical service to the building is by overhead lines, proper dip poles, weatherheads, and
        supports shall be provided.  The main service switch, panelboard, or switchboard shall be located
        immediately adjacent to the entrance of feeders into the building. Code-required clearances shall be
        maintained under all overhead lines. The openings necessary for bringing conductors into buildings shall
        be grouted or otherwise fire -stopped.

16.3.3  UNDERGROUND SERVICES
        All underground secondary (voltage less than 600) conductors shall be installed in direct buried conduits.
        Where secondary -service reliability is a prime consideration, secondary service ductbanks shall be concrete
        encased. Minimum duct size of service entrance ducts shall be 4 inches, all other secondary conduits that
        might be necessary for power distribution to exterior lighting and other electrical loads shall be sized based
        on conduit fill as calculated in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC.  A minimum of 25 percent
        spare service entrance ducts (but not less than one spare duct) shall be provided. Spare ducts shall be
        plugged or capped to prevent contamination. The locations where manholes (if required) are to be included
        shall be investigated to ensure that they will drain properly.

16.3.4  SERVICE CAPACITY
        Incoming  transformers must be provided, as required,  and must be of sufficient capacity to accommodate
        the full design load plus 30 percent. To the greatest extent possible, public utility transformers shall be
        located outside of the actual building. If public utility transformers must be located within buildings
        because of site constraints, they shall be installed in standard transformer vaults conforming to the
        requirements of the NEC. These vaults shall not be located adjacent to, or directly beneath,  any exit from
        the building.  In calculating the design load, a demand factor of 100 percent should be used for lighting and
        fixed mechanical equipment loads and a demand factor of 75 percent for all other loads.  The incoming
        service shall have sufficient capacity to accommodate the full design load plus 30 percent additional
        capacity for future growth.

16.3.5  METERING
        Where medium voltage power is brought to the facility, electrical energy metering (kilowatt hour [kwh])
        shall be furnished at each substation of 500 kilovolt-ampere (kVA) or greater capacity.  Demand metering
        (kilowatt demand [kwd]) shall be furnished as required for load management.  The economics of primary
        metering and secondary metering for campus-type facilities shall als o be investigated; the most cost-
        effective method shall be used.  Coordination with the local utility company should be performed to
        determine points of utility metering requirements.  Single metering is preferred. Sub-metering of lighting
        and equipment in individual buildings is encouraged to monitor and adjust energy performance.

16.3.6  SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT
        Service entrance equipment shall consist of a main switch or switches, a main circuit breaker or circuit
        breakers, or a main switchboard or panelboard. In  determining whether the service entrance equipment
        should be  of the fused or circuit breaker type, careful consideration shall be given to the short-circuit
        current available at various points in the proposed distribution system.

16.3.5.1     SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
            All service entrance equipment shall have copper busing. If the main service consists of a switchboard
            or panelboard, it shall have at least 10 percent  of the switchboard rating as spare breaker or switches
            and 20 percent of the rating as bused spaces. The  electrical system shall be properly coordinated for
            selective tripping in order to permit removal of only that portion of the system that has experienced a
            fault or overload condition.
                                                   16-5

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.3.5.2     RENOVATION
            If this project is a renovation or an extension of an existing building, the history of the loads shall be
            carefully studied to ensure that the existing service entrance equipment has sufficient capacity to
            handle the loads of the addition or renovation and has spare capacity for future loads.


16.4    Interior Electrical Systems

16.4.1   BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
        Electrical systems shall be designed so that all components operate within their capacities for initial and
        projected loads. Preferred standard voltages (per ANSI C84.1) shall be used, with a single voltage level
        characteristic in any classification, in order to minimize stocks of spare equipment and to standardize
        operating and maintenance practices and procedures.  On-site acceptance testing shall be required for each
        major electrical system.  Tests shall be performed in the presence of EPA personnel. Copies of all test
        results shall be submitted for approval. All receptacles, switches, and wiring devices shall be specification
        grade.  All safety switches shall be heavy duty. All equipment shall be new and shall be installed and used
        in accordance with any instructions included in the listing or labeling as required and acceptable to EPA
        (i.e., UL listing or other EPA acceptable listing).

        The design of the electrical distribution system (both normal and emergency power) shall take into account
        the effects that harmonics from nonlinear loads can produce on the system.  Harmonics from nonlinear
        loads can affect the capacities of the neutral conductor, panelboards, phase conductors, and emergency
        generators. "K" rated transformers shall be used where the associated panelboards are feeding a large
        quantity of nonlinear loads.  Special attention shall be given to the harmonics produced by variable-speed
        and variable-frequency drive units used for control of H VAC equipment.

16.4.2   CONDUCTORS
        All conductors (wire and cable) shall be copper. All conductors for systems operating at 480 volts and
        below shall have 600-volt insulation with distinctive markings, as required by UL, for identification in the
        field. All conductors shall be continuous, without splices.  All conductors operating at 600 volts and above
        shall be insulated and shall have the appropriate voltage and insulation ratings as required by their location
        in the system and in the facility.  Branch circuit wiring shall not be smaller than No. 12 American Wire
        Gage (AWG).  All conductors shall be color coded to identify each phase and the neutral. The grounding
        conductor shall be green or bare.

16.4.3   RACEWAYS
        All electrical wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway or shall be  otherwise physically protected in
        accordance with the NEC. Conduit shall be at least 3A inch.

16.4.3.1     SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUIT
            Service entrance conduit shall be provided as permitted by the NEC for the intended purpose. Service
            entrance conduits shall be enveloped in a minimum of 2 inches of concrete encasement. An empty
            conduit shall be provided up to the service entrance disconnect.

16.4.3.2     FLEXIBLE-METAL CONDUIT
            Liquid-tight flexible-metal conduit shall be used for connections to meters, transformers, pumps, and
            other equipment, as  required by the NEC and local codes, where vibration or movement can be a
            problem and where there is a need for protection from liquids, vapors, or solids.

16.4.3.3     RATED ASSEMBLIES
            Raceways that penetrate fire-rated assemblies shall be noncombustible.  Openings shall be sealed to
            maintain the established fire ratings as defined by UL.


                                                   16-6

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

16.4.3.4     SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
            Surface metal raceways shall be used to provide receptacles with power and for low-potential services
            (e.g., data and telecommunications wiring) in the laboratories themselves. The design professional
            shall review and make recommendations to EPA concerning the type of surface metal raceways
            appropriate to the project.  The design professional shall consider using single-compartment surface
            metal raceways (2e inches high by 1% inches deep, minimum size) where only power receptacles are
            required and double-compartment surface metal raceways (43/4 inches high by 2% inches deep,
            minimum size) where both power receptacles and telecommunications/data outlets are required.
            Raceway covers shall be precut to 12-inch sections. The raceway shall be divisible into two or three
            separate wiring components to facilitate installation of power or low-potential wiring.  The material
            and color of the raceway shall be appropriate to the atmosphere in which the raceway will be installed.

16.4.3.5     PLENUMS,  DUCTS, AND OTHER AIR-HANDLING SPACES
            All wiring shall be in accordance with NEC Article 300, except that communication circuits (Article
            800) and Class 2 and Class 3 circuits (Article 725) need not be run in conduit when conductors are of
            materials that are classified by UL as having adequate fire-resistant and low smoke-producing
            characteristics.

16.4.4  NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR
        The neutral conductors of four-wire system feeder(s), directly serving nonlinear load shall be sized  at
        double the ampere rating of the phase conductors through the entire interior electrical distribution system.
        The neutral conductors of 480/277 -volt, four-wire feeders serving the lighting panels that control the
        electronic ballast fluorescent fixtures shall be sized at double the wire size of the phase conductors.  Neutral
        conductors of circuits serving nonlinear load shall be dedicated to the circuit only. Therefore, when there is
        more than one circuit in a single conduit run and any of the circuits are serving nonlinear load, a dedicated
        neutral wire for each of the circuits serving nonlinear loads, in addition to the neutral wire serving the other
        circuits, shall be provided.

16.4.5  PANELBOARDS AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
        Panelboards shall comply with UL 50 and UL 67. Panelboards for use as service-disconnecting means
        shall also conform to UL 869A. Panelboards shall be equipped with a main circuit breaker and all branch
        circuit breakers as required. Design shall be such that any individual breaker can be removed without
        disturbing adjacent units and without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as a means
        of obtaining clearances as required by UL.  Where "space only" is indicated, provisions should be made for
        the future installation of a breaker, which shall be sized as indicated. All panelboard locks included in the
        project shall be keyed alike. All distribution panels serving fluorescent fixtures, laboratory room
        distribution panels, and any other panels serving nonlinear load shall be UL listed and labeled for nonlinear
        loads. An isolated neutral bus  shall be provided in each panel for connection of circuit-neutral conductors.
        A separate ground bus marked with a yellow stripe along its front and bonded to the steel cabinet shall be
        provided for connecting grounding conductors. A separate ground bus marked with a green strip along its
        front and isolated from the panel cabinet shall be provided for connecting isolated insulated ground wires.

16.4.5.1     DIRECTORIES
            Directories shall be provided to indicate the load served by each circuit. These directories shall be
            typed and shall be mounted in a holder behind a transparent protective covering. Bus board shall be
            supported on bases independent of the circuit breakers. Main buses and back pans shall be designed so
            that breakers  may be changed without machining, drilling, or tapping.

16.4.5.2     CIRCUIT BREAKERS
            Molded-case  circuit breakers shall conform to NEMA AB  1 and UL 489 and  UL 877 for circuit
            breakers and  circuit breaker enclosures located in hazardous (classified) locations.  Circuit breakers
            shall be thermal magnetic  type with an interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes symmetrical minimum.
            The design professional is required to submit for approval by the EPA, short circuit calculations; if
            these calculations indicate that a higher circuit breaker interrupting capacity is required, then circuit
                                                   16-7

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

            breakers with the calculated interrupting capacity shall be provided.  Breaker terminals shall be UL
            listed as suitable for the type of conductor provided.  Plug-in circuit breakers are not acceptable.
            Common trip-type multiple breakers with a single operating handle shall be provided. Breaker design
            shall be such that an overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open. Phase sequences
            should be maintained throughout each panel so that any adjacent breaker poles are connected to phases
            A, B, and C, respectively. Circuit breakers should be provided with ground fault interrupter as
            required by the NEC and in conformance with UL 1053. In addition, ground-fault circuit interrupter
            circuit breakers should be provided with a push-to-test button, visible indication of tripped condition,
            and an ability to detect a current imbalance of approximately 5 milliamperes.

16.4.5.3     SHUNT TRIP BREAKERS
            Shunt trip main breakers shall be provided in panelboards to remove power to laboratory modules
            upon activation of fire protection systems or devices and emergency power off (EPO) button(s) in the
            immediate lab module.  Shunt trip branch circuit breakers may also be required in order to remove
            power to other specific areas or equipment (e.g., to elevators with equipment room protected by a
            sprinkler system, computer rooms protected by sprinkler systems). It shall be the responsibility of the
            design professional to consult with the EPA very early in the electrical design (such as during the
            conceptual design phase) to enable the EPA to indicate and designate where shunt trip breakers are
            required in each specific facility that is being designed. Note: The activation of a fire sprinkler head in
            an individual laboratory module is required to shutdown the power to that laboratory module.  This
            power shutdown may be accomplished through the use of shunt trip breakers in the power panels.

16.4.5.4     LABORATORY MODULE
            Each laboratory module shall be provided with a separate 120/208-volt, three-phase, four-wire
            panelboard.  The branch circuit system shall be as flexible as possible to  accommodate any type of
            laboratory alteration.  In addition, each laboratory module shall be provided with emergency power
            from an emergency power panelboard; the  emergency power panelboard may serve more than one
            module.  The panelboard should be rated for nonlinear loads. Each lab module shall be provided with
            UPS power from a UPS power panelboard. The UPS power panelboard may serve more than one lab
            module.

16.4.5.4.1       EMERGENCY POWER OFF (EPO) BUTTON
                Each laboratory module and computer rooms protected by  sprinkler systems shall have an EPO
                button by each main exit into the corridor. Activation of the EPO button shall shut down the
                power to the normal power panelboard for the laboratory module. The EPO button shall
                simultaneously shut down the power of each emergency circuit into the lab module and each UPS
                circuit into the lab module. The EPO button should activate the appropriate circuits  via shunt trip
                breakers in the normal, emergency, and UPS power panels. The design professional should
                confirm with EPA early in the design if any  HVAC components or equipment are required to be
                shutdown or required to provide a reduced air flow in the lab module when an EPO button is
                activated

16.4.6   MOTOR CONTROLLERS AND DISCONNECTS
        Motor controllers and starters shall be provided for all motors and equipment containing motors. All
        controllers shall have thermal-overload protection in  each phase.  Solid -state motor controllers shall have
        undervoltage protection when used with momentary -contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall have
        undervoltage release when used with maintained-contact pushbutton stations or switches.

        When used with a pressure, float, or similar automatic-type or maintained-contact switch, the controller
        shall have a hand-off-automatic selector switch. Connections to the selector switch shall be such that only
        the normal automatic regulatory-control devices will be bypassed when the switch is in the "hand" position.
        All safety control devices, such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts,  and motor-
        overload protective devices, shall be connected in the motor circuit in both the "hand" and the "automatic"

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

        positions. Control circuit connections to any hand-off-automatic selector switch or to more than one
        automatic regulatory -control device shall be made in accordance with a manufacturer-approved wiring
        diagram. The selector switch shall be capable of locking in any position.

        For each motor that is not in sight of the controller, either the controlled disconnecting means shall be
        capable of being locked in the open position or a manually operated, nonfused switch that will disconnect
        the motor from the source of supply shall be placed within sight  of the motor location.

        Overload protective devices shall give adequate protection to the motor windings, shall be of the thermal
        inverse-time-limit type, and shall include a manual-reset pushbutton on the outside of the motor controller
        case.  The cover of a combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker shall be
        interlocked with the operating handle of the switch or circuit breaker so that the cover cannot be opened
        unless the handle of the switch or circuit breaker is in the off position. Variable-frequency drive units shall
        be considered for larger HVAC equipment loads, and for other motor loads as feasible. See Section 15,
        Mechanical Requirements, of this Manual for equipment to be used with variable-speed drives.

16.4.6.1     CONTROL EQUIPMENT
            Control equipment shall comply with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA),
            Industrial Controls and Systems (ICS) standards, NFPA 70 (NEC), and with UL 508. Single -phase
            motors may be controlled directly by  automatic control devices of adequate rating. Automatically
            controlled polyphase motors and all polyphase motors rated greater than 1 horsepower (hp) shall have
            magnetic starters.  Control devices shall be of adequate voltage and shall have an adequate current
            rating for the duty to be performed. Pilot control circuits shall operate with one side grounded and at
            no greater than 120 volts. Where control power transformers are required, they shall be located inside
            the associated motor starter housing, shall be protected against faults and overload by properly sized
            overcurrent devices, and shall be of sufficient capacity to serve all devices connected to them without
            overload. Reduced-voltage starters or variable frequency drives (VFDs) shall be provided for larger
            motors to avoid an unacceptable voltage dip when the motors are started. As a minimum, reduced
            voltage starters shall be required when the locked rotor current of motors exceeds the full-load of
            supply transformers or supply conductors.

16.4.6.2     SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES
            Safety disconnect switches shall be provided for all hard-wired electrically  operated equipment and
            motors in locations where they are required by code.  Switches shall meet the requirements of NEMA
            Type HD. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use and NEMA 3R for exterior use. All safety
            switches shall be horsepower rated. The switches shall be of the quick-make quick-break type, and all
            parts shall be mounted on insulating base to permit replacement of any part from the front of the
            switch.  All current-carrying parts shall be of higher rated load without excessive heating.  Contacts
            shall be plated to prevent corrosion and oxidation and to ensure suitable conductivity.

16.4.6.2.1        GROUND FAULT PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
                 With the exception of emergency systems,  systems carrying 150 volts or greater to ground and not
                 exceeding 600 volts phase-to-phase shall be provided with ground fault protection for each
                 service-disconnecting means rated 1,000 amperes or more. Necessary precautions shall, however,
                 be taken to minimize the possibility of nuisance tripping. In addition, all buses or other
                 conductors at motor control centers, switchgear, switchboards, and busways shall be insulated or
                 isolated. The facility may have special requirements with respect to ground fault protection on the
                 main switchboard (such as two levels of ground fault).  Very early in the design phase (such as
                 during the conceptual  design submittal phase), it shall be the responsibility of the design
                 professional to consult with EPA concerning any  special requirements above  those required by the
                 NEC. All special ground fault requirements above those required by the NEC shall be
                 incorporated into the facility design.
                                                   16-9

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section  16 - Electrical Requirements

16.4.6.2.2       GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER PROTECTION FOR PERSONNEL
                At a minimum, ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) protection shall be provided for all 125-
                volt, single-phase, 15- and 20-ampere receptacles located outdoors; elevator electrical systems; as
                required by NEC Article 620, the Safety Manual, and the National Research Council' sPrudent
                Practices; and receptacles installed on roofs.  GFCI protection shall also be required in the
                following circumstances:

                •   In any location where EPA personnel are operating electrical equipment in direct contact with
                    water or other liquids or where electrical receptacles are installed  within 6 feet of a sink
                    provided with a plumbed water supply or a drain, tub, or other water source.

                •   If GFCI protection is prescribed for electrical equipment by the equipment's manufacturer.

                •   If previous experience indicates a need for GFCI protection.

                This protection shall be provided in new and existing construction by  means of interrupter devices
                incorporated in receptacles or circuit breakers. These GFCI receptacles may  be terminating type
                or feed-through type, whichever will satisfy the need. GFCI receptacles shall be color coded or
                shall otherwise indicate GFCI protection.  Scheduled testing of the GFCI is required in accordance
                with the manufacturer's recommendations, but not less than semiannually. Upon completion of
                the initial installation,  the electrical ground system shall be checked or verified for continuity with
                the conduit system, the equipment housing, and the final connection to the receptacle grounding
                stud.  In aquatic laboratories and other required areas, not only will the GFCI-protective device be
                installed in the receptacle, but also the receptacles will be connected to the grounded system.

16.4.6.2.3       REMOVAL OF GFCI CIRCUITS
                Existing circuits with GFCI protection shall remain unless persistent problems are encountered or
                unless renovations occur that would alter the use so that GFCI protection is not necessary.  An
                example of such a renovation would be converting an aquatic laboratory to office space.

16.4.6.3     MOTOR  CONTROL CENTER
            Where several motors (all of larger-than-fractional horsepower) are located in one room or space, a
            motor control center should be used. Busing in the control center should be arranged so that the center
            can be expanded from both ends. Bus shall be of silver-plated copper. Interconnecting wires shall be
            copper.  Terminal blocks should be of the plug-in type so that controllers may be  removed without
            disconnecting individual control wiring.

16.4.7   GROUNDING
        The grounding system must meet the requirements of the NFPA  70 and IEEE 142. All electrical outlets
        and non-current carrying metal parts of permanently connected electrical equipment shall be permanently
        connected to ground. All EPA  facilities will be provided with two different equipment grounding systems:
        the general facility grounding system that is connected to the building structure and other systems, and an
        isolated grounding system to provide equipment grounding to the laboratory and critical computer
        equipment.  Raceway systems shall not be accepted as the only grounding path. The isolated grounding
        conductors shall be green and the general facility ground conductor shall be gray.

16.4.7.1     LABORATORY BUILDING MODULE GROUNDING
            All laboratory building modules shall be connected to the isolated grounding system described in
            paragraph 16.4.8. The isolated grounding system shall consist of a bare earth copper ground grid or
            field, direct buried outside  to provide an isolated ground for instrumentation. This ground system
            (critical computer equipment in areas of the facility other than in the laboratory modules are also
            connected to this isolated grounding system) shall be clearly identified and protected against improper
            usage.  All building ground systems shall be tied together as required by NEC Article 250.

                                                  16-10

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                             July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements


16.4.7.2     GROUND BUS
            Every panelboard and switchboard in the facility shall be provided with a ground bus.

16.4.8  LABORATORY POWER REQUIREMENTS
        Specific and generic electrical requirements are indicated for most spaces in the room data sheets generated
        during the pre-design process. In the design of a new facility, however, these requirements must be
        reviewed, verified, and tested with the appropriate EPA representatives and must gain approval from EPA.
        This reviewing, verification, and testing should occur during the program verification and design phase of
        the project.

        Duplex convenience outlets shall be laboratory standard grade, 20 amps,  120 volts in surface metal
        raceways, as defined below.  These outlets should be provided in addition to specific electrical outlets and
        receptacles called for or shown in the respective room data sheets, and in addition to outlets needed to feed
        the equipment used in each room.  These convenience outlets shall be located either on the reagent shelf or,
        if no reagent shelf is required, 8 inches above countertop level when base cabinets are used, and 44 inches
        above floor level in other locations. The maximum spacing between convenience outlets shall be 3 feet.  In
        addition, the following requirements apply:

            •   Peninsulas. Provide a quadruplex receptacle outlet every 3 feet  over the peninsula on overhead
                carriers (these carriers also support the various gas lines that terminate at the peninsulas).  No
                pedestal receptacle outlets shall be installed.  The receptacles on the overhead carriers shall be
                installed  in surface metal raceway mounted to the overhead carriers.

            •   Equipment Outlet Location.  Electrical outlet location shall be near the equipment to be powered;
                the exact location of equipment and outlets shall be determined by the Government during early
                design stage.

            •   All 120-volt general convenience receptacles shall be rated a minimum of 20 amperes and shall be
                grounding type (NEMA 5-20R) and specification grade.

            •   120-volt circuits shall have a minimum rating of 20 amperes.

            •   A maximum of four general convenience receptacles shall  be connected to a circuit.

            •   Equipment such  as refrigerators, freezers, and centrifuges shall each have individual dedicated
                circuits.

            •   Receptacles located within 6 feet of a sink (or other water sources) shall be GFCI type.

            •   All branch circuits or panelboard feeder conduit runs shall be provided with separate equipment
                grounding conductors sized per NEC  Table 250.122.

            •   Each laboratory shall be provided with separate, dedicated 120/208-volt, three-phase, four-wire
                panelboards; panelboards shall be spaced at a maximum spacing of one panelboard every two
                modules.  Additional panelboards shall be provided as required by electrical usage or as directed
                by the EPA project officer.

            •   Each laboratory panelboard shall be provided with a separate ground bus.

            •   Receptacles that are located above wall, peninsula, or island benches and at equipment spaces
                shall be in surface metal raceways wherever possible.  Raceways shall be single compartment or


                                                   16-11

-------
July 2006
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

                double compartment (for both power and telecommunications/data) as directed by the EPA project
                officer.

                In accordance with NEMA 14-30R, 30-ampere, 125/250-volt single-phase receptacles will be
                provided for 30-ampere, 208-volt single-phase equipment.

                One receptacle on a dedicated 20-ampere, 120-volt emergency power circuit shall be provided in
                each laboratory. Emergency power shall also be provided for special equipment requiring such
                power.

                UPS systems within the computer/data-processing rooms and laboratories and their supply and
                output circuits shall comply with NEC Article 645.10. The disconnecting means shall also
                disconnect the battery from its load.
16.5   Interior Lighting System

16.5.1   ILLUMINANCE LEVELS
        The minimum acceptable levels of maintained general overhead illuminance shall be as indicated in Table
        16.5.1, Illuminance Levels, for the particular areas. The maximum illuminance level shall be no greater
        than 115% of the minimum level of the table. Illuminance levels shall manifest an energy conserving
        design that indicates coherence to EPA energy conserving initiatives. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act
        of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either
        Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section  1.0 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing
        specifications for energy efficient lighting. For areas not listed in Table  16.5.1, the recommendations of the
        Illuminating Engineering Society (IBS) handbooks shall be followed. The lighting illuminance on the work
        surface or at the prescribed height above finished floor (AFF) is to be the area with the highest illuminance
        level within the lab module or office space.
Table 16.5.1 Illuminance Levels
FUNCTION
General office space - ambient and task
Animal room
Autopsy

Boiler room
Corridors
Emergency lighting (general, at floor level)
Emergency lighting in laboratory blocks, at
floor level
Examination
Laboratory module at work surface 36
inches AFF (dual switching)
Loading dock
Lobby
Locker rooms
Shops (dual switching)
General office and record rooms - ambient
and task
FOOTCANDLES
50
70
100

20
10
3
5

100
50/100

20
20
20
50/100
50

FUNCTION
Parking, driveway, and walkways
Stairways
Storage
Inactive
Rough bulky
Medium
Fine
Telephone equipment room

Toilets
Exterior entrances

Desk level (task lighting)
Utility rooms
X-ray
Parking decks
Library-conference rooms (dual
switching)
FOOTCANDLES
1-3
20

5
10
20
50
70

30
5

50-100
20
10
5
50/100

Note: These values represent general illumination 30 inches above the floor unless indicated otherwise.
16.5.2   LIGHTING CONTROLS
        Switches shall be provided to control lighting in all areas.  Provide at least one switch for room lighting at
        54 inches above the finished floor at each door that provides hallway egress and the controls described
                                                 16-12

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

        below. Large rooms (more than 200 square feet) shall have multiple switching to reduce the lighting level
        by approximately half.

16.5.2.1     DAYLIGHT-LEVEL SENSORY CONTROLS
            In building areas (except laboratories) that are larger than 200 square feet and that will have a large
            contribution of natural daylight, daylight-level sensory controls shall be used to control lighting levels.

16.5.2.2     BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
            In buildings with building automation systems (BAS), the BAS (in addition to light switches) shall
            control overall building lighting. Each floor shall be a separate control zone with appropriate
            subzoning of each floor for special functions.

16.5.2.3     OCCUPANCY SENSORS
            Occupancy sensors shall be provided (in addition to switches) to control lighting in offices and smaller
            rooms, bath and locker areas, conference rooms, storage rooms, and mechanical rooms. For offices,
            conference rooms and other non-support rooms, the occupancy sensors shall be manual on/automatic
            off type.

16.5.3  LAMPS AND BALLASTS
        Electrical discharge lamps and high-intensity discharge (HID) lamps should be the primary lamps
        considered in the selection of the illumination concept.  The lighting system shall use, to the maximum
        extent feasible, energy-efficient fixtures with electronic high-frequency ballasts, T-5 and T-8 fluorescent
        lamps, and high-quality light reflectors and lenses. The use of filament light sources should be kept to  an
        absolute minimum (i.e., only in spaces that do not have a need for high levels of illuminance, that are
        normally occupied only for short durations, and for which discharge lamps are not suitable). Where
        fluorescent lamps will be utilized, these lamps shall be of the T-5 or T-8 type to conserve energy.

        Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming products, all
        federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See sections 1.5, 1.6, and 1.7 of
        Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for, respectively, energy efficient fluorescent
        luminaries, downlight luminaries, and industrial HID luminaries.

16.5.3.1     INDOOR HID LIGHTING
            In using HID lighting  indoors, the required color rendition shall be carefully considered from both
            visual  and health safety perspectives.

16.5.3.2     BALLASTS
            All ballasts to  be used in EPA facilities shall be of the energy-saving type (electronic high-frequency
            ballasts shall be used in all possible locations). Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires
            that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or
            FEMP-designated products. See section 1.4 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications
            for energy efficient fluorescent ballasts.

16.5.3.3     LIGHT FIXTURE SELECTION
            The selection of light fixtures should involve careful consideration of the quality of construction, ease
            of maintenance, ease of relamping, efficiency, illumination characteristics, mounting technique, and
            special purpose characteristics (e.g., vapor-proof, explosion-proof, elimination of radio frequency
            interferences). For office areas and laboratories, pendant lighting with direct/indirect light is
            recommended. In addition, Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring
            energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated
            products. See section  1.2 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy
            efficient residential light fixtures.
                                                   16-13

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.5.4   EMERGENCY LIGHTING (GENERATORS AND BATTERY UNITS)
        An emergency lighting system shall be provided in accordance with NEC Article 700 and arranged to
        provide a minimum of 3 footcandles of illumination (measured at floor level) throughout the path of egress,
        including exit access routes, exit stairways, and other routes, such as exit passageways to the outside of the
        building. The emergency lighting system in laboratory modules shall provide a minimum of 5 footcandles
        of illumination.

            •   Laboratories and large open areas such as cafeterias; assembly areas; large mechanical, electrical,
                and storage rooms; and open-plan office spaces where exit access is normally through the major
                portion of the areas shall be provided with emergency lighting.  In addition, emergency lighting
                systems shall be provided in computer rooms and in any location where chemicals are stored,
                handled, or used.

            •   The emergency lighting in laboratory rooms should provide at least 5 footcandles of illumination,
                measured at the exit access door.

            •   The type of system used shall be such that it will operate in the event of any failure of a public
                utility or internal disruption of the normal power distribution system in a building.

            •   Buildings seven stories high or less may be powered from two separate substations which are
                served by two different primary lines not constructed in the same right of way or path. This dual
                feeder arrangement can be used instead of having to install an emergency generator, but the
                transfer to feed the building from one substation to the other must be automatic and within the
                maximum time lapse required by the life safety code and the facility operation needs.

            •   Egress lighting in offices/lab areas should be connected to the fire alarm system, where permitted
                by code,  so that these lights do not remain on 24 hours/day.

            •   The emergency lighting shall be connected to a generator, when a generator is provided. In
                buildings where there is no emergency generator, battery backup shall be provided for egress and
                emergency lighting.  This battery backup may be by unit-type battery fixtures, battery packs in
                fluorescent fixtures, or use of inverters.  Where HID lamps are used (and connected to a
                generator), a standby lighting system shall be provided  to meet emergency lighting requirements
                during HID lamp restrike periods.

16.5.5   ENERGY CONSERVATION
        EPA seeks to minimize energy use dedicated to electric  lighting  and the resulting cooling loads through
        proper use of natural lighting in the facility.  In effect, it seeks a well-integrated lighting system for its new
        buildings that makes optimum use of both natural and artificial lighting sources and balances the buildings'
        heating and cooling needs. A lighting-power budget shall be determined, in conformance with ASHRAE
        90, and strictly adhered to in the design of the lighting and cooling load for each facility. This budget may
        be exceeded in laboratory areas and in shops where a higher level of illumination is required because of the
        type of work being performed. All design of lighting for EPA facilities shall be in accordance with the
        EPA Energy Star Program. In addition, Section 104 of the Energy  Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when
        procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated
        products. See Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient products.

16.5.6   GLARE
        The selection of the type of diffuser and lens to be used  on the lighting fixtures shall take into account the
        glare that can be produced on the work surface. All lighting design shall minimize the effects of glare on
        the task surface. Indirect lighting shall be used wherever possible.  Additionally, fixtures should be located
        to keep glare to a minimum.  In locating lighting fixtures, consideration must be given to the fact that many


                                                  16-14

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

        of the surfaces in the facility (especially in laboratory areas) have highly reflective materials at the task
        location.

16.5.7   AUTOMATIC DATA PROCESSING AREAS
        Lighting fixture types, location, and illumination levels shall be coordinated with the equipment and
        functions of the telecommunications, alarm, and automatic data processing (ADP) centers to provide the
        required illumination without:

            •   Interfering with prompt identification of self-illuminated indicating devices
            •   Creating reflecting glare that might detract from adequate observations of essential equipment
            •   Creating electrical or electromagnetic interference detrimental to proper operation of equipment.


16.6   Fire Safety Requirements for  Lighting  Fixtures
        Lighting fixtures shall comply with the NEC and the following criteria.

16.6.1   MOUNTING
        All lamps shall be mounted in a way that prevents direct contact between the lamp and any combustible
        material.  Wherever accidental contact is remotely possible, the lamp shall be protected by a guard, globe,
        reflector, fixture, or other protective means (NEC Article 410).

16.6.2   FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
        All fluorescent fixtures installed indoors shall be provided with ballasts that have integral thermal overload
        protection (NEC Article 410). Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring
        energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products.
        See sections 1.3, 1.4, and 1.5 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for, respectively,
        energy efficient fluorescent tube lamps, ballasts, and luminaries.

16.6.3   LIGHT DIFFUSERS
        Light diffusers shall be either of noncombustible material or of a design or material that will drop  from the
        fixture before ignition. Where combustible dropout-type fixtures are used, plastic material shall not
        constitute more than 30 percent of the total ceiling area.  Where luminous or diffuser ceilings are used,
        these restrictions also apply.

16.6.4   LOCATION
        Lighting in locations where dangerous gases, liquids, dusts, or fibers may exist shall meet the requirements
        of NEC Article 500.


16.7   Exterior Lighting Systems

16.7.1   GENERAL
        Exterior lighting systems shall comply with the IBS Lighting Handbook.  System controls shall use a time
        clock and/or photocell to provide illumination only when needed. In buildings with a building automation
        system (BAS), exterior lighting circuits shall be  switched by photocells and the BSA system, which shall
        be able to override the photocell switch on request.  Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005  requires
        that, when procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-
        designated products. See section 1.0 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy
        efficient lighting.
                                                  16-15

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.7.1.1     EXTERIOR LIGHT GLARE
            Light glare shall be kept to a minimum in situations where it would impede effective operations of
            protective force personnel; interfere with rail, highway, or navigable water traffic; or be objectionable
            to occupants of adjacent properties. Uplighting should be minimized.

16.7.1.2     HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMPS
            Maximum use shall be made of HID lamps such as metal halide or high-pressure sodium vapor lamps.
            Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming
            products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 1.7
            of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient industrial HID
            luminaries.

16.7.2   PARKING LOT LIGHTING
        Lighting over driveways and parking areas shall consist of a complete HID lighting system, including
        control equipment, underground wiring, luminaries, and all necessary accessories for a complete and
        functioning system. The maintained level of illumination shall be at least 1 to 3 footcandles. Consideration
        shall be given to reducing the amount of light in parking lot areas during times (e.g., between 12:00 AM to
        4:30 AM) when it is very unlikely that the lots will be in use. EPA personnel at the site shall be contacted
        and approval must be obtained from the appropriate EPA facility personnel prior to incorporating this
        lighting feature into the design.

16.7.3   BUILDING EXTERIOR LIGHTING
        Appropriate security and accent lighting shall be provided. All exterior doors and entrance ways shall be
        illuminated for security.  Entrance ways shall have a maintained illumination level of at least 3  footcandles.
        Entrance ways with cameras shall have an illumination level as required by the security camera to operate.

16.7.4   TRAFFIC CONTROL LIGHTING
        If the facility is on a site where traffic controls are necessary and will not be provided by the local
        municipality or state transportation authority, a complete traffic control system for the facility shall be
        designed, including all stoplights, directional lights, controls, and wiring, for a complete operating system.
        Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy consuming  products, all
        federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated products. See section 1.10 of Addendum 1
        to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient traffic signals.

16.7.5   ROADWAY LIGHTING
        All new access roadways, or continuations of loop or access roadways, and driveways shall be  lighted. The
        maintained level of illumination shall be at least 1  to 3 footcandles on vehicular roadways and pedestrian
        walkways. The same type of lighting that is used for parking lots (HID source) shall be used for roadways.

16.7.6   EXTERIOR ELECTRIC SIGNS
        All exterior electric signs and nonelectric signs shall be integrated into the total design of the facility and
        approved by the Contracting Officer's Representative (COR).


16.8    Emergency Power System

16.8.1   GENERAL
        An emergency power system shall be designed and provided for all  administrative and laboratory space.
        The system shall provide electric power in the event of loss of normal power and shall provide  power for
        emergency and egress lighting. The system shall also  supply power to critical equipment during planned
        outages for maintenance. The emergency power system shall comply with NFPA 37, NFPA 70 (the NEC),
        NFPA 101, NFPA 110, and IEEE 446.


                                                  16-16

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

16.8.1.1     BATTERY-TYPE LIGHTING
            In smaller buildings when the emergency power system is installed primarily for egress lighting,
            battery-type lighting units shall be used.

16.8.1.2     EMERGENCY POWER
            In facilities where the emergency power needs are larger than can be handled by battery packs, an
            emergency power source shall be supplied. Normally, the emergency power source will be a
            generator; however, other power sources should be considered by the design professional whenever
            they appear to be feasible, can be justified for approval by EPA, are allowed by the applicable code(s)
            (e.g., NFPA 101 and NFPA 110), and are acceptable to the local authorities having jurisdiction.
            Alternate sources that might be considered, but not necessarily be limited to, fuel cells, micro turbines,
            turbines, photovoltaic (solar), wind, and biomass.  The design professional shall justify the use of
            emergency power sources other a than generator by submission of design justification documents to
            EPA for approval.  These justification documents shall include a complete life cycle cost analysis
            indicating a payback period acceptable to EPA, a narrative pertaining to the reliability of the current
            technology of the source, a narrative of the availability and applicability of the particular source to the
            specific facility and environment, a discussion of environmental impact considerations, and any other
            pertinent information relating to the alternative source that may be necessary for EPA to determine if
            the alternative source is acceptable for the specific project.

            When it is not feasible to consider other sources for a specific project or when other sources prove to
            be unacceptable, a diesel engine-driven generator shall be provided to serve as the emergency source
            of power. If the loads and the availability of natural gas allow, a natural gas generator shall be
            considered.  Any emergency power system provided shall be equipped with phase-synchronized
            automatic transfer switch or switches and with necessary controls for automatic operation. All
            automatic transfer switches shall be of the isolation/bypass type. The generator(s) (or alternate
            emergency power source) shall transfer and pick up the critical load(s) within 10 seconds.  The system
            shall be able to carry a continuous full load for not less than 24 hours. The generator exhaust and fuel
            pipe vents shall be arranged and located away from fresh-air intakes. The generator exh aust shall be
            located where maximum dilution can be accomplished. The generator shall be water cooled. The
            emergency power source shall be designed to handle nonlinear loads.

16.8.1.2.1        EMERGENCY POWER REQUIREMENTS
                 Table 16.8.1, Emergency Power Requirements, outlines the emergency power requirements for
                 different building heights and particular fire safely systems. Generators are not required by these
                 criteria unless an analysis of the cost of installation and maintenance of acceptable emergency
                 power sources shows that a generator is the most cost-effective power source or as required by
                 applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction (however, a generator may be required by
                 EPA regardless of the outcome of this analysis). Automatic switching schemes shall be provided
                 for all emergency power sources. Where emergency generators are used, their installation shall be
                 in accordance with NFPA 110 and NEC Article 700.
                                                  16-17

-------
July 2006
        Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                         Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
 Table 16.8.1 Emergency Power Requirements
 Emergency System
Acceptable Sources of Emergency Power*
 Building Heightf        Building Height t
 75 Feet or Less           Over 75 Feet
Emergency lighting (1 1/4 hours)
Exit lighting (1/4 hours)
Fire alarm
Fire pump
Jockey pump
Elevator
Smoke control
Sprinkler system air compressor
Special extinguishing system power supply (dry chemical,
CO2, or other EPA-approved system)
Fume hoods (full or partial containment or where deemed
necessary)
1,2,3
1,2,3
1,3
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
—
N.R.
N.R.
1,2
1,3
1,3
1,3
1,2
1,2
1,2*
N.R.
N.R.
N.R.
1,2
 Note: 1 = Generator; 2 = Connection either to two separate primary sources or to a utility network system; 3 = Battery with
 charger;
 N.R. = Not Required.

 *   Power source must be capable of providing power to one elevator on a selective basis when the building contains six or
     fewer elevators.  Otherwise, two elevators must be supplied on a selective basis.
 f   The building height for application of the criteria shall be determined by measurement of the distance from grade level of the
     lowest accessible floor to ceiling height of the highest occupied floor in the building.  Mechanical rooms and penthouse are
     not considered occupied floors in this case.
16.8.1.3     EMERGENCY GENERATOR LOCATION
            The preferable location for the generator is outdoors. However, whatever the final approved location
            of the generator might be, the design professional must adhere to the following location parameters:
            locate with exhaust away from fresh air intakes; and locate away from vibration, acoustic, or
            electrically sensitive equipment. The location should be such that the generator will be hidden from
            view (including screening, as necessary, to appropriately hide the generator) and should be to the rear
            of the main facility when located outdoors (the preferred location). The generator should be placed
            over vibration isolators and should make use of noise dampers  and other devices, as required, to
            substantially attenuate noise and vibration resulting from its operation.  The generator exhaust
            requirements must be addressed and incorporated into the design.  The generator shall  be equipped
            with a low-noise exhaust silencer (hospital or critical type) and weatherproof housing (outdoor
            locations). If the generator is located indoors, the size and shape of the generator room, including
            usable space around the generator, must be considered and resolved during the facility  design phase.
            Additionally, fuel supply and location (incorporating code and environmental  requirements) must also
            be addressed during the design phase.

16.8.1.4     ECONOMIC ANALYSIS
            For all installations where a generator is provided, an economic analysis shall  be done to determine the
            economic feasibility of including load-shedding or peak-shaving equipment as part of the installation.
            EPA will provide instructions on the possible inclusion of this item in the project after the economic
            analysis has been completed.  It shall be the responsibility of the design professional to specifically
            request these instructions pertaining to the inclusion of this item from EPA after completion of the
            economic analysis.
                                                   16-18

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

16.8.1.5     FUEL STORAGE TANK
            If a diesel-type generator is used, the system shall be provided with a fuel storage tank that is capable
            of carrying a continuous full load for not less than 24 hours.  The preferred type of tank is an
            aboveground storage tank. If allowed by EPA, the tank may be installed underground. If so, the tank
            shall be of double-wall construction and of noncorrosive material with interstitial monitoring
            capabilities. The tank shall meet the most current promulgated rules effective on the date of
            installation. The design professional shall justify in writing the need or lack of need, whichever may
            be the case, for a cathodic protection system for the site and type of construction and equipment
            specified. This evaluation shall be submitted with the first submission.

16.8.2   EMERGENCY LOADS
        In addition to the loads required by NFPA 101, NEC, and the room data sheets, the following loads shall be
        connected to the emergency power system:

            •   Fire alarm system
            •   Exit lights
            •   Emergency lighting system—3 footcandles minimum for egress; 10 footcandles at switchboards
            •   Critical operations laboratory equipment
            •   Telephone relay system
            •   Certain HVAC systems (as required by the applicable state and local codes and as directed by
                EPA)
            •   Critical sump pumps and other associated mechanical equipment and controls
            •   All animal care facilities
            •   Local HVAC air compressors for special rooms
            •   Paging system
            •   Selected elevators (as required by the applicable state and local codes and as directed by EPA)
            •   Gas chromatograph
            •   Selected refrigerators and freezers (as directed by EPA)
            •   Incubators
            •   X-ray fluorescent analyzer
            •   UPS system
            •   Air-conditioning system associated with computer rooms, UPS room, and environmental rooms
            •   Security systems
            •   Safety alarm systems.

16.8.3   UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
        A UPS system shall be provided for loads requiring guaranteed continuous power. The application of UPS
        systems shall comply with IEEE 446. The design professbnal shall make a recommendation concerning
        the appropriate type of system for a particular facility (i.e., rotary or stationary [static] type). UPS
        equipment shall be capable of supplying power through multiple means-(normal, static switch bypass, and
        total system bypass). The UPS system shall be sized to provide at least 5 minutes of protection upon loss
        of normal power.  The UPS system shall be rated for "multi-range" input voltage and shall provide a
        sinusoidal or, as a minimum, a quasi-sinusoidal power output wave form. Total system bypass power shall
        include an isolation transformer. All components shall be UL listed. The supplied UPS system shall be
        specified to operate properly with an emergency generator.

16.8.3.1     MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
            The UPS system shall operate continuously  and in conjunction with the existing building electrical
            system to provide precise power for critical  equipment loads.  The static system shall consist of a solid-
            state inverter, a rectifier/battery charger, a storage battery, a static bypass transfer switch,
            synchronizing circuitry, and an internal maintenance bypass switch.  The rotary system shall include a
            solid-state inverter, a battery charger, a storage battery, an automatic transfer assembly, an internal

                                                  16-19

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

            (automatic) bypass switch, and a low-voltage transient synchronous generator with flywheel. The UPS
            system, along with the supporting equipment, shall be housed in dedicated room(s) under controlled
            environmental conditions that meet the manufacturer's recommendations and code requirements.

16.8.3.2     CODES, STANDARDS, AND DOCUMENTS
            The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable codes and standards of the following:

                •   NFPA
                •   NEMA
                •   IEEE inverter standards
                •   ASA
                •   American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
                •   National Electrical Code (NEC)
                •   Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
                •   Local codes.

16.8.3.3     ON-LINE REVERSE TRANSFER SYSTEM
            The UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line-reverse transfer system in the following modes:

                •   Normal (Static).  The critical load shall be continuously supplied by the inverter. The
                    rectifier/battery charger shall derive power from the utility alternating current (AC) source
                    and it shall in turn supply direct current (DC) power to the inverter while simultaneously
                    float-charging the battery.

                •   Normal (Rotary). The critical load shall receive power from the motor-generator set which is
                    supplied power from the utility company.  While the motor-generator supplies power to the
                    critical load, it simultaneously charges the batteries.

                •   Emergency (Static). Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the critical load shall be
                    supplied by the inverter, which, without any switching, obtains its power from the storage
                    battery. There shall be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the
                    utility AC source.

                •   Emergency (Rotary).  Upon failure of the utility AC power source, the control logic shall turn
                    on the inverter which is supplied power from the battery.  The inverter then supplies AC
                    power to the motor-generator set which subsequently supplies power to the critical load. The
                    inverter shall be capable of full-power  operation within 50 milliseconds  after loss of utility
                    power.

                •   Recharge. Upon restoration of the utility AC source (prior to complete discharge of the
                    battery), the rectifier/battery charger powers the inverter and simultaneously recharges the
                    battery. This shall be  an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical
                    load.

                •   Bypass mode. If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair of internal
                    failures, the static bypass transfer switch shall be used to transfer the load to the utility
                    alternating current (AC) source without interruption. Automatic transfer of the load shall be
                    accomplished after the UPS inverter output synchronizes to the utility alternating current
                    (AC)  source (or the bypass input source).  Once the sources are synchronized, the static
                    bypass transfer switch shall transfer the load from the bypass input source to the UPS inverter
                    output by paralleling the two sources and then disconnecting the bypass AC input source.
                    Overlap shall be limited to one-half cycle.

                                                  16-20

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements


                •   Maintenance bypass/test. Test switching shall be provided to simulate a normal power
                    outage, transfer the load to the source of backup power through the UPS, and switch the load
                    back to the normal power source upon completion of the test.

                •   Downgrade. If only the battery will be taken out of service for maintenance, it shall be
                    disconnected from the rectifier/battery charger and inverter by means of an external battery
                    disconnect.  The UPS shall continue to function as specified herein, except for power outage
                    protection and transient characteristics.

16.8.3.4     UPS OUTPUT
            The UPS output shall have the following characteristics:

                •   Frequency:  60 hertz (Hz) nominal +0.5 Hz (when synchronized to the bypass AC input
                    source).

                •   Output voltage transient characteristics for:

                        25 percent voltage fluctuation load step change ±4 percent
                        50 percent voltage fluctuation load step change ±6 percent
                        100 percent voltage fluctuation load step change +10 percent/-8 percent.

                •   Output voltage transient response: The system output voltage shall return to within +1
                    percent of the steady state value within 30 milliseconds.

                •   Output voltage regulation: The  steady state output voltage shall not deviate by more than
                    +1.0 percent from no load to full load.

16.8.3.5     OUTPUT FREQUENCY REGULATION
            The UPS shall be capable of providing the nominal output frequency ±0.1 percent when the UPS
            inverter is not synchronized (free running) to the AC bypass input line and also when the utility
            alternating current (AC) source is not available (i.e., operation from battery source only).

16.8.3.6     SYSTEM OVERLOAD
            System overload is a load of at least 125 percent of the system rating for a period of 10 minutes, and
            150 percent current for 1 minute. Overloads in excess of 170 percent of the UPS rating, on an
            instantaneous basis, or in excess of the overload time periods previously stated shall cause the static
            bypass transfer switch to  reverse-transfer and allow the AC bypass input source to supply the
            necessary fault-clearing current. After approximately 5 seconds, the static bypass transfer switch shall
            automatically forward -transfer, and normal UPS operation shall resume.  If the overload still exists
            after the 5 -second period, the static bypass transfer switch shall automatically reverse-transfer the load
            to the AC bypass input source and the UPS inverter shall turn off. The system shall require manual
            restart after this sequence.

16.8.3.7     SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
            The overall efficiency, input to output, shall be at least 95 percent with the battery fully charged and
            the inverter supplying full-rated load.

16.8.3.8     LOCATIONS AND LOADS
            The UPS system shall be located in special rooms or in the same room as computer equipment.  These
            rooms shall have special HVAC equipment to maintain the proper environmental conditions for the
            UPS system and its batteries both under normal conditions and  during a power outage.


                                                  16-21

-------
July 2006                                                           Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                       Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.8.3.8.1       UPS LOAD
                The UPS load will consist of the equipment and outlets designated for UPS power connection in
                the room data sheets.

16.8.3.8.2       BATTERY ROOM
                The battery room for the UPS shall be well ventilated so as not to allow an explosive mixture of
                hydrogen to accumulate. Refer to Section 15, Mechanical Requirements, of this manual for the
                following battery room requirements: minimum air change rate, make -up air, monitoring,
                ventilation, emergency eyewash station, emergency shower, and all other mechanical requirements
                for this room. Additionally, these battery rooms shall contain all devices required by the Safety
                Manual (including mechanical ventilation,  an emergency eyewash station, and a fire/smoke
                sensing device). The ventilation fans shall be connected to the emergency power system so that in
                the event of normal (utility) power system failure, electrical power to the fans will be maintained.
                The installation of the UPS system shall be in accordance with NFPA 111. Explosion-proof
                wiring methods, however, are normally not required in battery rooms. The provision for sufficient
                diffusion and ventilation of the gases from the battery to prevent the accumulation of an explosive
                mixture, as required by this paragraph and Section 15 of this manual, is necessary in order to
                prevent classification of the battery room as a hazardous (classified) location, in accordance with
                NEC Article 500. A fire- or smoke-sensing device shall be installed in battery rooms.  Selection
                of this device should be appropriate to the design of the battery room.


16.9   Lightning Protection System

16.9.1   MINIMUM SCOPE
        A lightning protection system shall be provided for all facilities containing laboratory modules, as well as
        for facilities containing radioactive or explosive materials.  The requirements and installation criteria for
        lightning protection systems shall be in accordance with NFPA 780, UL 96A, and the local building code.

16.9.2   ADDITIONAL SCOPE
        For building types not in the above description, the guide in NFPA 780 shall be used to assess the risk of
        loss due to lightning.

16.9.3   MASTER LABEL
        For buildings described in subsection 16.9.1 and for facilities with a strong risk potential (per NFPA 780),
        equipment, accessories, and material necessary for a complete master-labeled lightning protection system
        for all building components should be furnished and installed. The system shall comply with NFPA 780,
        UL  96A, and Lightning Protection Institute (LPI)  175. All cables, lightning rods, and accessories shall be
        copper.  All connections and splices shall be of the exothermic weld type.

16.9.3.1     MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS
            The installed system shall be unobtrusive, with  conductors built during construction (so they are
            concealed). The system shall also be properly flashed and watertight.  Installation shall be done in
            conformance with shop drawings prepared by the supplier and approved by the EPA.

16.9.3.2     CERTIFICATION DELIVERY
            Before the lightning protection system is accepted, the contractor shall obtain and deliver to the
            supervising architect the UL master label or an equivalent certification.


16.10  Seismic Requirements

16.10.1  SEISMIC REVIEW

                                                  16-22

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                          July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

        The design and construction of all new EPA facilities shall comply with those standards and practices that
        are substantially equivalent to, or exceed, the National Earthquake Hazard Reduction Program (NEHRP)
        Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations for New Buildings and Other Structures.


16.11  Automatic Data Processing (ADP) Power Systems

16.11.1 COMPUTER POWER
        All ADP equipment in a centralized ADP room shall be connected to the uninterruptible power supply
        (UPS) power. Utility or emergency input power to the UPS system shall be 480 Volt, 3 phase.  Output
        power from the UPS system shall be 208Y/120 Volts. Power distribution units (PDUs) shall have
        208Y/120 volt input and output power. UPS and PDUs shall have monitoring capabilities with transient
        protection. PDU shall limit the cable  runs to 100 feet from the PDU to the ADP equipment.  The user will
        provide a list of equipment cable types and plug types. All circuits shall have separate neutrals. All UPS
        units and PDUs shall be connected to  a central monitoring and control system.

16.11.2 NON-UPS/PDU OUTLETS
        Non-UPS/PDU outlets shall be spaced every 20 feet around the computer room for utility use (vacuums,
        drills, etc.).

16.11.3 LIGHTING
        Under-floor lights with cutoff timer(s) shall be installed in computer room(s). Room lighting for computer
        rooms shall be either indirect lighting, to reduce glare on terminal screens, or overhead lighting of the
        parabolic type, to reduce eye strain. Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when
        procuring energy consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated
        products. See section 1.0 of Addendum 1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for energy efficient
        lighting.

16.11.4 GROUNDING
        All computer power shall be grounded to the isolated grounding system described in paragraph 16.4.8 of
        this section.  This isolated grounding system can only be connected to the general facility power grounding
        system at the main building service entrance grounding electrode or at the isolation transformer/equipment
        grounding on a separately derived system. A  grounding mat may be locally provided to the computer room
        to connect the non current carrying metal parts of the critical equipment, but this mat must be electrically
        isolated from the general facility grounding system in order to meet the NEC.


16.12 Cathodic Protection

16.12.1 GENERAL  REQUIREMENTS
        An investigation  shall be conducted and a determination made, on whether cathodic protection is required
        for buried utilities.  The design professional shall justify in writing the need or lack of need, whichever may
        be the case, of a cathodic protection system for the type of construction and equipment specified for each
        specific buried utility. This evaluation shall be submitted with the first submission. For additional
        information on corrosion control requirements for underground fuel storage tanks, see paragraph entitled
        "Fuel Storage Tank" of this section. If a cathodic protection system is required, a system shall be
        recommended to  satisfy the local conditions.  The cathodic protection system shall be designed by a
        professional who is certified by NACE International as a Cathodic Protection Specialist or Corrosion
        Specialist or who is a registered professional corrosion engineer.  Additionally, the design professional
        must have  a minimum of 3 years experience in similar installations. The cathodic protection design, as a
        minimum,  shall be in compliance with the applicable NACE International standard corresponding with the
        type of structure that is to be cathodically protected. The installed cathodic protection system shall  be able


                                                 16-23

-------
July 2006                                                          Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                     Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

        to provide protective currents to the intended structure meeting the minimum performance criteria as
        defined in NACE International standards.


16.13  Environmental Considerations (Raceways, Enclosures)

16.13.1  CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE
        Special consideration shall be given to the type of raceways to be used in corrosive environments (such as
        chemical storage areas, some laboratories, and areas near air exhausts for spaces with corrosive fumes). All
        raceways to be used in corrosive atmospheres shall be deemed suitable by the raceway manufacturer for the
        atmosphere in which they will be installed.

16.13.1.1    EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
            The enclosures for electrical equipment (e.g., panels, switches, breakers) shall have the proper NEMA
            rating for the atmosphere in which the equipment is being installed.

16.13.2  SALTWATER ATMOSPHERE
        Only hot-dipped galvanized steel and P VC conduit and fittings are acceptable for buildings in salty weather
        areas.

16.13.3  EXTREME COLD
        Electrical equipment such as emergency generators, transformers,  and switch gear installed in weatherproof
        enclosures of the facility that are subject to extremely cold temperatures should be provided with
        supplemental heating within the enclosures.


16.14  Communication Systems

16.14.1  TELECOMMUNICATIONS/DATA SYSTEMS
        One telephone outlet and one Local Area Network (LAN) computer shall be provided per 125 net usable
        square feet (NUSF) of office space. If workstations are identified  and are smaller than 125 NUSF, one
        telephone outlet and one LAN outlet will be required per workstation or single module space. One
        telephone outlet and one Laboratory Information Management Systems (LIMS) shall be provided per single
        laboratory module space. One LIMS outlet shall be provided per 125 NUSF of laboratory office space.
        The exact location for  all communications/data outlets shall be determined by the Government at an early
        design stage. All telephone and computer outlets shall be provided with PVC or equivalent corrosion-
        resistant cover/face plates; metal covers shall not be used.

16.14.2  VIDEO CONFERENCE ROOMS
        Cabled video teleconference space (C VTS) communication wiring should be limited to 300 unrepeated
        cable runs.  The network interface (service delivery point) to support C VTS rooms will be located in the
        network control facility (NCF); therefore, CVTS room locations must be within 300 cable feet of the NCF
        and have conduit access for 22-gauge shielded solid copper twisted-pair wire.  Longer runs may require
        repeaters and require additional expenses, but they must remain within the 1.5-decibel loss specifications of
        the technical advisory manuscript concerning the wiring.

16.14.3  RECORDING SYSTEMS
        In areas where conferences are to be recorded, built -in microphones shall be provided along with a closet
        containing the recording equipment.  Wiring shall be installed from the microphone (omnidirectional) to
        recorders for a complete system.
                                                16-24

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements


16.14.4 SATELLITE DISHES
        An area may be required for the installation of satellite dishes that will be used for telecommunications,
        television reception, or data transmission. If required, an area shall also be designed for location of satellite
        dish head-in equipment (receivers and transmitters). Where use of a satellite dish is required, power shall
        be furnished for all head-in equipment.  Cable raceways shall be provided from the satellite dish location to
        the room for the head-in equipment and from the head-in equipment to each outlet served and to the
        controller location for the dish. All equipment and cable will be furnished by EPA.

16.14.5 TELEVISION BROADCAST SYSTEMS
        In facilities from which a local or national television station will be broadcasting live meetings or press
        conferences, a complete raceway (or cable-tray) system shall be furnished to allow the station to run cables
        from the designated television van parking areas to the conference/press room.  If cable tray is provided, it
        shall be completely accessible throughout its length.

16.14.5.1    WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES/DISCONNECT SWITCHES
            In addition, weatherproof receptacles or disconnect switches (fused) shall be provided at the van
            parking areas to allow each van to receive power from the building.

16.14.6 MICROWAVE COMMUNICATIONS
        Where required, an area shall be designed for the installation of a microwave dish that will be used for
        telecommunications or data transmission. An area shall also be designed for microwave head-in
        equipment. Power shall be furnished for all head-in equipment. Cable raceways shall be provided from the
        microwave dish location to the room for the head-in equipment and, from there, to the room where the
        controller will be located.  All equipment and cables will be furnished by EPA.

16.14.7 OTHER
        A complete raceway system shall be furnished for other communication/data systems (systems not
        otherwise mentioned in subsection 16.14).  The raceway system shall include raceways, outlet and junction
        boxes, and power connections (direct or receptacle) for all associated equipment to be located in the
        facility.  Unless otherwise directed by EPA, all cabling and equipment for these other systems will be
        furnished by EPA.


16.15 Alarm  and Security Systems

16.15.1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
        Fire alarm systems must be installed in  accordance with NEC Article 760 and NFPA 72. Devices that
        activate fire alarm systems and evacuation alarms must be completely separated from other building
        systems such as environmental monitoring systems and security systems. Other features of the fire alarm
        system (e.g., fan shutdown) may be shared with these other building systems, but the performance of the
        fire alarm system must not be compromised and must meet the requirements stated in this subsection.  In
        general, auxiliary functions, such as elevator recall and smoke control, are not performed by the fire alarm
        system but by other mechanical or electrical systems. The main fire alarm system should supervise any
        auxiliary  system (e.g.,  computer room).  Activation of the main fire alarm shall also activate the audible
        (and visual, if applicable) devices of the auxiliary system in the associated alarm area. The fire protection
        system shall be in compliance with the most current codes and publications, as listed below (see other
        sections for additional  codes and standards):

            •   Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13
            •   Standpipe and Hose Systems, NFPA 14
            •   National Electrical Code, NFPA 70
            •   National Fire  Alarm Code, NFPA 72

                                                  16-25

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                         Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

            •   Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems, NFPA 90A
            •   Life Safety Code, NFPA 101
            •   GSA handbook PBS-P100, Facilities Standards for the Public Building Service
            •   UFAS and ADA Requirements
            •   Safety Manual, Chapter 2
            •   Local codes.

16.15.1.1    GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
            Pull stations shall be installed adjacent to all exit doors and all exit stairs' access doors.  Automatic
            smoke and temperature rise detectors shall be installed as required by all applicable national and local
            codes and as determined by the standard practice. Activation of a manual station or any of the
            automatic detectors shall set off the fire alarm system throughout the building or the building zone, and
            shall send an alarm signal to the local fire department or a central station service unit.  Activation of
            any automatic fire suppression system (sprinkler or chemical) shall set off the fire alarm as described
            for a manual station but will also send a suppression activated signal to the local fire department or a
            central station service unit, as required.  The fire alarm system shall be totally supervised.  All alarm
            initiating devices, all the alarm conditions indicating devices, all fire alarm signal carrying circuits, the
            fire alarm back up battery system, the circuits carrying the fire alarm signal to the local fire station or
            to a central station service unit, all the sprinkler system and/or standpipe system valves and switches
            operational position shall be supervised. The supervisory system alert signal shall be different than a
            fire alarm signal and shall be transmitted both to the local fire station or central station service unit and
            to the building's fire alarm control panel.  The buildings shall be divided into fire zones and the
            elevator lobbies  smoke detection system shall have its own zones with its own identifiable codes or
            labeling system.  Activation of any smoke detector shall send a pre -alarm conditions signal to the local
            fire station or central station service unit and to the building's fire alarm control panel.

16.15.1.2    BASIC REQUIREMENTS
            Unless the most recent edition of NFPA 101 has more stringent  requirements, fire alarm systems are
            required, as a minimum, in any office, computer room, library, classroom, meeting room, cafeteria, or
            similar business-type occupancy, if the occupancies have any of these characteristics:

            •   The occupancies are two or more stories above the level of  exit discharge.
            •   The occupancies may have 100 or more occupants, above or below grade.
            •   The occupancies consist of more than 50,000 square feet.
            •   A human voice, gas-powered horn, or other similar nonelectric system cannot efficiently or
                effectively be used to alert occupants to an emergency.

            Storage occupancies equal to or larger than 100,000 square feet  shall have fire alarm systems. All
            other occupancies shall follow the requirements in NFPA 101.

16.15.1.3    MANUAL SYSTEMS INPUT
            Each system shall provide manual input from manual fire alarm stations, which shall be located in exit
            or public corridors adjacent to each stairway and to each exit from the building.  Additional stations
            may be provided at any location where there is a special risk or  where the travel distance to the nearest
            station exceeds 200 feet.  As a general principle, the station shall be placed so that a person using it
            will be between the fire and the exit. If necessary, emergency telephone systems shall be provided in
            the exit stairs or  in another protected location, as indicated for manual fire alarm stations. In addition,
            telephones shall  be provided at each elevator lobby, at the ground floor, and on alternate elevator-
            capture floors.

16.15.1.4    AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS  INPUT
            Automatic fire detection shall be provided as described below.

                                                   16-26

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

            •   A water flow switch shall be provided for each floor or fire area protected by wet-pipe sprinkler
                systems. Other types of sprinkler systems will be activated by a pressure switch at the dry or
                deluge valve only.

            •   Automatic heat or smoke detection shall not be installed in lieu of automatic sprinkler protection
                unless this decision is otherwise supported through recognized equivalency methodologies (NFPA
                101 A).  Detection shall be provided where a preaction or deluge sprinkler system exists.
                Automatic sprinkler protection requirements are described in Section 13, Special Construction, of
                this Manual.

            •   In accordance with NFPA 72, smoke detectors shall be provided for essential electronic
                equipment, air-handling systems, and elevator lobbies and machine rooms. All smoke detectors
                shall be approved for their intended use and installation. Smoke detectors require periodic
                maintenance, and arrangements for this should be made at the time of installation to ensure proper
                operation and to guard against false alarm or unintended discharge.

            •   Heat and smoke detection in air-handling systems shall comply with NFPA 90A. Detectors, when
                required, shall be located in the main supply duct downstream of a fan filter and in the return air
                ducts for each floor or fire  area.

            •   When heat and smoke detectors are installed, they shall be designed and installed in accordance
                with NFPA 72.

            •   Special hazard protection systems shall initiate an alarm.  These special systems include, but are
                not limited to, dry chemical extinguishing systems, elevator recall systems, and computer
                detection systems.

            •   Supervisory signals shall be transmitted under each of the following conditions:

                    Operation of generator
                    Operation of fire pump
                    Loss of primary power to a fire alarm system, fire pump, or extinguishing system
                    Failure of any of the alarm initiating devices or circuits (open, grounding, etc.)
                    Failure of any of the alarm conditions indicating devices or their circuits (open, short,
                    grounded, etc.)
                    Malfunctioning of the fire protection system battery back-up system
                    Failure of any of the signal circuits to equipment that respond to alarm initiating devices (e.g.,
                    signal circuits to elevators, to automatic fire doors, to smoke dampers, to automatic valves of
                    dry sprinkler systems)
                    Failure of one of the circuits/channels that carries the fire alarm signal to the remote,
                    constantly manned Central Fire Station
                    Loss of air pressure for dry -pipe sprinkler system
                    Loss of a central processing unit (CPU) or of CPU peripheral equipment in a multiplex system
                    Low water level in pressure tanks, elevated tanks, or reservoirs
                    When control valves in the supply or distribution lines of automatic sprinkler systems, fire
                    pumps,  standpipe systems, or interior building fire main systems  are closed either a maximum
                    of two complete turns of a valve wheel or 10 percent closure of the valve, whichever is less.
                    (In this case, the signal will be  transmitted by tamper switches.)

16.15.1.5    AUTOMATIC SYSTEMS OUTPUT
            The signal to all  alarm condition indicating devices, the Central Fire Station, and all equipment, fire
            doors, etc., that respond to a fire alarm shall be transmitted automatically once a fire alarm station or a


                                                   16-27

-------
July 2006                                                             Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                         Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

            detector is activated. In no case shall these alarms depend on manual action. Various outputs include
            those listed below.

                •   Elevator control smoke detector actuation shall sound an alarm at the fire alarm panel, recall
                    elevators, and notify the fire department but shall not initiate an audible alarm signal to
                    building occupants or start any smoke control system, except as noted below.  The smoke
                    detector alarm signal shall be received at a central station or some other location that is
                    constantly attended.  This will ensure an investigative response to the alarm

                •   General area smoke detectors shall initiate an evacuation alarm for the portion of the building
                    or area in which they are used to increase the level of protection. In such situations, smoke
                    detectors and fire alarm panels equipped to provide alarm verification may be desirable.

                •   All alarm signals or messages shall be continuous. Where public address systems are
                    provided for the facility,  there shall be provisions for making announcements from the main
                    fire alarm panel or from an attended location where the fire alarm signal is received. The
                    public address system does not have to be an integral part of the fire alarm system.  Coded
                    alarm signals are unacceptable.

                •   The output of special extinguishing systems, such as those provided for kitchens, shall include
                    the actuation of the building fire alarm system. Special detection systems shall indicate a
                    supervisory signal at the fire alarm panel.

                •   If an entire building can be evacuated within 5 minutes, the fire alarm shall sound either
                    throughout the building or on selected floors.  Where selective evacuation is used on the basis
                    of local code requirements, features such as smoke control and automatic sprinklers shall be
                    provided, as necessary, to ensure the  safely of occupants remaining in the building.

                •   For voice communications systems, only the occupants of the fire floor, the floor below, and
                    the floor above are expected to relocate or evacuate. These occupants must automatically
                    receive that message and be  notified of the emergency. Where automatic prerecorded voices
                    are used, message arrangement and content shall be designed to fit the needs of the individual
                    building (e.g., bilingual messages where appropriate).

                •   The use of visual signals to supplement the audible fire alarm system shall be provided in
                    accordance with NFPA 72 and Title III standards of ADA and UFAS, as applicable.

                •   Every alarm reported on  a building fire alarm system shall automatically actuate one of the
                    following:

                        A transmitter listed by UL, connected to a privately operated, central-station, protective
                        signaling system conforming to NFPA 72. The central-station facility shall be listed by
                        UL; automatic telephone dialers shall not be used.

                        An auxiliary tripping device connected to a municipal fire alarm box to notify the local
                        fire department, in accordance with NFPA 72.

                        A direct supervised circuit between a building and the local fire alarm headquarters or a
                        constantly manned fire station, in accordance with NFPA 72.

                        As a last resort, an alternate method approved by SHEMD.
                                                   16-28

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements
                •   Notification of the fire department shall occur no more than 90 seconds after the initiation of
                    an alarm. The specific location of the alarm may be determined by fire department personnel
                    after they arrive.

                •   A supervisory condition shall transmit a separate signal to a central station, different from an
                    alarm signal. No more than one supervisory signal shall be provided for an entire building.
                    Refer to the automatic systems input information in subsection 16.15.1.3 above for required
                    supervisory conditions.

                •   Additional automatic actions shall be performed for smoke control, elevator capture, and door
                    closings.  Smoke control and elevator capture shall be coordinated with the evacuation plan
                    for a building. (A summary of system actions is shown in Table 16.15.1.)
Table 16.15.1 Status Condition
Output Function
Transmit signal to fire department
Indicate location of device on control panel and annunciator
Cause audible signal at control panel
Initiate emergency operation of elevators
Initiate smoke control sequence
Result in a record on system printer
Cause audible alarm signal throughout building
(voice or nonvoice)
Input Device
A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

B
X
X
X
X*

X


c
X
X
X


X


D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

E
X
X
X


X


F

X
X





A = Manual fire alarm station
B = Smoke detectors (other than duct)
C = Duct smoke detectors
D = Water flow detectors and automatic extinguishing systems
E = Supervisory device
F = Emergency telephone
Note: Only smoke detectors associated with the elevators (e.g., the elevator lobby) must initiate elevator emergency operation.
16.15.1.6    MANUAL SYSTEMS OUTPUT
            Any action that can be performed automatically must be able to be initiated manually from the control
            center or fire alarm system control panel.  A smoke control panel shall be provided when smoke
            control systems are required.  The control center, or fire alarm system control panel, shall have the
            capability of canceling and restoring any action that has been initiated automatically or manually.

16.15.1.7    SYSTEMS FEATURES
            All systems shall include the following:

                 •   Indication of normal or abnormal conditions
                 •   Annunciation of alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions by zone
                 •   Graphic annunciation of alarm conditions by zone
                 •   Ringback feature when a silence switch for audible trouble signal is provided.

16.15.1.8    HIGH-RISE SYSTEMS FEATURES
            For buildings 12 stories tall or higher, the systems shall also include the following:

                 •   Permanent record of alarm, supervisory, or trouble conditions via printer

                                                   16-29

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

                •   Initiation of an alert tone followed by a digitized voice message.

            All power supply equipment and wiring shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of
            NFPA 70 (NEC) and NFPA 72.

16.15.1.9    RELIABILITY
            The maximum elapsed time from the moment that an alarm is activated to the moment that all alarm
            condition indicating devices and all alarm responding equipment are in operation shall not exceed 10
            seconds. In accordance with and as defined in NFPA 72, the design professional shall indicate by class
            and style, the initiating device, notification appliance, and signaling line circuits, which shall define the
            circuit's capability to continue to operate during specified fault conditions.  As a minimum, the system
            shall be designed such that any system alarm input device shall be capable of initiating an alarm during
            a single break, or a single ground fault condition, on any system alarm-initiating circuit.  In addition,
            any signaling line circuit of a multiplex system (other than combination multiplex-point wired
            systems) shall also perform its intended service during a wire -to-wire short or a combination of a
            single break and a single ground of a circuit. The system shall also be designed requiring the provision
            of a looped conduit system such that if the conduit  and all conductors within are severed at any point,
            all indicating device circuits (IDC), notification appliance circuits (NAC) and signal line circuits (SLC)
            will remain functional.

16.15.1.10  CODE  COMPLIANCE, MANUAL SYSTEM
            A complete, code-complying fire alarm system shall be designed. For small buildings, and where
            allowed by code, the system may be a manual system only.  The manual system shall include manual
            stations, fire alarm annunciator signals, and an annunciator p anel indicating the zone where the alarm
            was initiated. The alarm shall be sent to the local fire station.

16.15.1.11  CODE  COMPLIANCE, AUTOMATIC SYSTEM
            In large facilities, or where required by code, the systems shall be automatic and shall include smoke
            detectors, manual pull stations, rate of rise detectors, alarm bells or horns and strobe lights, sprinklers,
            and a central annunciator panel. Suppression systems shall be tied to the central annunciator panel.
            The fire alarm system shall be tied to the local fire  station in the area.  Smoke detectors shall be
            provided in all corridors and designated laboratory  modules.

16.15.1.12  CENTRAL, LOCAL, AND PROPRIETARY ALARM SYSTEM
            The building(s) shall be protected by a central, local, proprietary -type fire alarm system.  Location of
            pull stations, bells, automatic fire detectors, and other equipment pertinent to the fire alarm system
            shall be in accordance with the referenced NFPA and local codes.  When there is a difference between
            the NFPA codes and local codes, compliance with the most stringent code will be required.  Visual
            alarms are required throughout the facility for handicapped fire warning.

16.15.1.13  CENTRAL STATION SERVICE
            The building(s) shall be protected by a local fire alarm system(s) connected to either a UL-listed fire
            department station or a central station service unit meeting the requirements of NFPA 72.

16.15.1.14  FIRE ZONES
            Building(s) shall be subdivided into fire zones as recommended by NFPA and state codes.  Graphic
            annunciators shall be provided at the main entrances and the security control center. These
            annunciators shall clearly show the outline of the buildings, the fire zones, and the alarm-initiating
            devices. All signal devices shall be addressable (i.e., each device shall have its own address, which
            shall report to monitoring devices in the English language for clear and quick identification of the
            alarm source).
                                                  16-30

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

16.15.1.15  WIRE CLASS AND CIRCUIT SURVIVABILITY
        The fire alarm system-initiating device circuits shall be wired Class A, Style 7, and alarm-indicating
            circuits (visual and audible) shall be wired Class A (NFPA 72).

16.15.1.16  CONTROL CENTER
            Building(s) must have a control center where fire-related control panels are located.  This control
            center must be located next to the main entrance and shall be separated from the rest of the building by
            1-hour fire resistive construction. Emergency power, room illumination, room HVAC, telephone, and
            fire protection systems that operate independently of the effect of a fire anywhere in the building shall
            be provided in the control center.

16.15.1.17  HELD-OPEN FIRE DOORS
            Fire doors that are normally held open by electromagnetic devices should be released by the activation
            of any automatic detection, extinguishing, or manual alarm signaling device.  Additional information
            on door requirements may be found in Section 8, Doors and Windows, of this Manual. Maintenance,
            operation, testing, and equipment shall conform to NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.

16.15.1.18  ELECTRICAL SUPERVISION
            The fire alarm system shall be totally  supervised.  All initiating device circuits (including those for
            smoke detectors), signal line device circuits, and notification appliance circuits must be electrically
            supervised. The system shall monitor all electrically supervised circuits.  A trouble alarm and visual
            indicator shall activate upon a single break, open, or ground fault condition which prevents the
            required normal operation of the system. The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss  of primary
            power (ac) supply, loss of stand-by generator power, low battery voltage, removal of alarm zone
            module (card, PC board), and disconnection of the circuit used for transmitting alarm signals off-
            premises. The system shall also provide electrical supervision (capable of detecting any  open, short, or
            ground) for circuits used for supervisory signal services (e.g., sprinkler systems, valves).  The fire
            alarm control panel shall provide supervised relays for HVAC shutdown. An override at the HVAC
            panel shall not be provided. The fire  alarm control panel shall provide the required monitoring and
            supervised control outputs needed to accomplish elevator recall. All supervisory signals (except for
            the transmitter disconnect switch provided to allow testing and maintenance of the system without
            activating the transmitter) shall be transmitted both to the fire station or central station service unit and
            to the building's fire alarm control panel.

16.15.1.19  EMERGENCY POWER
            Emergency power shall be provided for the fire alarm system in accordance with NFPA 72, NFPA
            101, and paragraph 16.8 of this section.  If an emergency generator is available at the facility meeting
            the requirements of NFPA 72, then the fire alarm system must be connected to it; otherwise a battery
            backup with charger, meeting the code requirements specified herein, shall be provided.  Emergency
            power must be able to operate the fire alarm system in the supervisory mode for 48 hours and to
            operate all alarm devices and system output signals for at least 90 minutes.

16.15.2 SAFETY ALARM SYSTEM
        Requirements for this system are as follows.

16.15.2.1    ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
            A central safety alarm system annunciator panel that will indicate any abnormal condition shall be
            designed for the facility. The  annunciator panel shall include all relays, switches, and controls, as
            required for system operation.  The basic operation of the panel shall indicate any  abnormal condition
            in a function supervised by the annunciator system, causing the associated indication to flash and the
            common audible signal to  sound continuously. The audible signal can be silenced at any time by the
            operation of an "acknowledge" push button. The audible signal will automatically sound again with
            any new indication. The visual signal shall become steady when acknowledged.

                                                   16-31

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 16 - Electrical Requirements

16.15.2.2    INDICATING PLATES
            Indicating plates shall be red with filled-in place characters. All lamps in the annunciator are tested
            simultaneously by pressing the remotely mounted "Lamp Test" push button.  The annunciator shall
            indicate the following systems and equipment statuses:

                •   Fire alarm initiation
                •   HVAC system motors alarms
                •   Emergency generator running
                •   Freezer and cold box temperature alarms
                •   UPS system failure
                •   Fume hood and bio-safety cabinet alarms (critical low-flow)
                •   Location of activated detection, extinguishing or manual alarm device
                •   Exhaust hood and ventilated cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow)
                •   Exhaust systems for instrument and safety cabinet failure alarms (critical low-flow)
                •   Acid neutralization system alarms
                •   Power failure
                •   Incubator temperature alarm
                •   Gas alarm
                •   Sensor (gas) alarm
                •   Laboratory negative pressure failure alarm
                •   Additional systems to be identified by the agency.

16.15.3 SECURITY SYSTEMS
        General requirements and requirements for particular types of systems and facility and site areas are as
        follows.

16.15.3.1    GENERAL
            A complete security system shall be designed for the facility. All security systems shall be operated
            and monitored from a central point selected by EPA. All security systems shall have a primary and an
            emergency power source.

16.15.3.1.1      STANDBY BATTERIES
                Standby batteries or a UPS shall be furnished to power the system automatically in the event of
                commercial power failure. If the facility has a generator, batteries shall ensure that there is no loss
                of power to central equipment until the generator takes over. An alarm shall not be generated
                when the equipment transfers from AC to DC operation as it does from DC to AC operation.  If
                the facility does not have an emergency generator, sufficient batteries shall be provided to power
                the controller and necessary devices to prevent unauthorized entry into the building (electronic
                locks shall stay in the locked position upon power loss but shall still allow emergency egress).
                Batteries shall be chargeable. If batteries lose charge, an alarm condition shall indicate this at the
                control console.

16.15.3.2    ACCESS SYSTEMS
            A complete building access system shall be designed as an on-line type that reports to a central
            controller.  The professional designing this system shall have at least 3 years of experience in the
            design of similar installations.

16.15.3.2.1      KEY CARD CONTROL
                Key card control shall be provided for all entry to  the facility. The key card reader should read
                key cards with numbering encoded within the card. The card reader shall be capable of operating
                in an off-line mode to allow persons to enter and exit without recording of card numbers. The
                card reader shall also be capable of operating  in an on-line mode, which causes the card reader to

                                                  16-32

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                            July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

                report into a central controller that provides additional security checks on the key card and
                provides a printout of time, date, card number, etc., for the person entering or leaving the
                premises.  The system shall be of the anti-passback type.  In addition, one key access lock and
                card reader shall be furnished inside the building for every 5,000 square feet of gross floor area (in
                addition to the vestibules) and at entry to controlled computer areas.

16.15.3.2.2      COMPUTERIZED ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
                The computerized access control system shall be capable of programming access cards by hour
                and day.  The system shall be designed with 50 percent spare capacity for both card readers and
                number of cards on the system.  Key cards, once removed from the system,  shall be replaceable
                without lowering the integrity of the system or reducing the system's capacity.

16.15.3.2.3      PROXIMITY TYPE CARD READERS
                Card readers shall be of the proximity type and shall be suitable for the environment in which they
                will be located.

16.15.3.2.4      PROGRAMMABLE KEY PAD, SMALL FACILITIES
                For very small facilities, a programmable keypad may be used at each entry to control access to
                the system. The keypad shall be suitable for the environment in which it will be located.

16.15.3.3    INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMS
            A design professional with a minimum of 3 years' experience in the design of similar installations shall
            design a complete intrusion detection system. The intrusion detection system shall protect all grade
            level doors, operable windows, and openings leading into the facility, as well as roof hatches and roof
            access doors. Operable windows shall be lockable,  and accessible windows  shall be equipped with an
            alarm. Roof access doors or hatches shall be secured with heavy-duty hardware and equipped with an
            alarm. All floor telecommunications closets shall be locked with dead bolt locking devices. In
            addition to installing perimeter protection, the design professional shall equip a minimum of 10 interior
            doors with an alarm. It shall be the responsibility of the design professional  to coordinate with EPA
            for the locations of the 10 interior doors to be equipped with the alarms; locations shall be as directed
            by EPA. Door switches shall be of the balanced magnetic type.

16.15.3.3.1      CENTRAL CONTROL, REMOTELY MONITORED
                The entire system shall be monitored at the central control desk of the facility and remotely
                monitored either on the campus, by an alarm company, or by the local law enforcement agency.

16.15.3.4    SITE ACCESS SYSTEMS
            One alarm zone with an infrared beam shall be provided to monitor vehicles passing through the gate
            of the fenced area.  The beam should be positioned to monitor the entire length of the fence on the side
            with the gate. The alarm zone  shall be monitored at the central alarm desk (as part of the intrusion
            detection system) by remote monitoring of the same type as the intrusion detection system. One zone
            and an infrared beam detection system shall be provided for each location where there is a gate in the
            fenced-in area of the site.

16.15.3.5    CLOSED-CIRCUIT TELEVISION SECURITY  SYSTEMS
            A complete closed-circuit television (CCTV) security  system  shall be designed.  The professional
            designing this system shall have at least 3 years of experience in the design of similar installations.
            Conduit and wiring shall be  installed for the system and a camera shall be installed at all entrance and
            exit areas. The location of the  camera shall be suitable for monitoring persons' movements when they
            are entering or leaving the building.  An emergency  circuit shall provide power for each camera
            location.  Conduit, wiring, cameras, and all other appropriate monitoring equipment  shall also be
            installed in all parking lots, loading docks, and computer areas.
                                                  16-33

-------
July 2006                                                            Architecture and Engineering Guidelines
                                                                        Section 16 - Electrical Requirements
16.15.3.5.1      CAMERAS, FIXED OR PAN-TILT-ZOOM
                Cameras shall be of the fixed or pan-tilt-zoom type, low light color, as required for each specific
                location. Cameras shall be housed in proper enclosures for the environment in which they are to
                operate (e.g., enclosures with defrosters or heaters, weatherproof enclosures, corrosion-resistant or
                vandal-proof enclosures).

16.15.3.5.2      CAMERAS, MONITORED AND CONTROLLED
                All cameras shall be monitored and controlled at the facility's central control station. Monitors
                shall be event driven.  A recording device shall be provided to record unauthorized access (control
                by guard).  A 120-volt single-duplex receptacle (emergency power) shall be provided immediately
                next to all CCTV camera locations.

16.15.3.5.3      CCTV SECURITY CAMERAS, LOADING DOCKS
                CCTV cameras shall be provided to monitor entry and exit from the loading dock areas. CCTV
                monitors (in addition to that at the central console for the loading dock areas) shall be provided in
                the loading dock office to provide identification of delivery vehicles before the loading dock doors
                are opened.

16.15.3.6    BUILDING PERIMETER SYSTEMS
            A complete grade-level perimeter intrusion detection system shall be  designed. This system shall be in
            addition to the intrusion detection system described above and shall be monitored at the same control
            panel provided for the intrusion detection system.

16.15.3.6.1      ULTRASONIC PROTECTION
                Ultrasonic  protection  should be furnished to protect the grade-level, glass-enclosed office area  and
                any other area that contains exterior glass at grade level.  The ultrasonic control panel shall be the
                type that controls nominally 20 pairs of transmitters and receivers. Input should be connected into
                the main alarm panels as a separate zone. Sufficient transmitter-receiver pairs shall be installed to
                protect the entire office area and other grade level areas with exterior glass.

16.15.3.7    DATA PROCESSING
            A complete access-intrusion detection system shall be designed for all data processing areas. A card
            reader and balanced magnetic switch shall be provided at each door leading into the data processing
            areas. Card readers shall be of the proximity  type. The system shall be monitored  at the central
            control station for the facility. The control computer shall be capable of programming access cards by
            hour and day. The central controller shall also furnish a printout of time, date, card number, etc., for
            the person entering or leaving the data processing area.  The system shall be of the  anti-passback type.

16.15.3.7.1      COMPUTER AREA DOORS
                If a card access system is being furnished for other doors in the facility, the same cards shall work
                for the computer area doors (if so encoded for certain personnel).

16.15.3.7.2      CENTRAL CONTROL DOOR  MONITORING
                The door shall be monitored at the central control station in case  it is left open or the card access
                system is bypassed.

16.15.3.8    PARKING  CONTROLS
            The parking facility(s) shall be enclosed and equipped with a perimeter sensor system andlockable
            gates. The gates shall be equipped with a computerized access control system.  EPA card readers shall
            be installed in parallel with any other card readers (if required) on all  the access roads.
                                                   16-34

-------
Architecture and Engineering Guidelines                                                           July 2006
Section 16- Electrical Requirements

16.15.3.8.1  ACCESS SYSTEM
                The parking control access system shall have all the components discussed above for access
                systems.  For very small facilities, a programmable keypad may be used in lieu of a card reader.
                The same cards used for building access shall operate the parking controls (if so encoded).

16.15.4 DISASTER EVACUATION SYSTEM
        If the facility is located in an area prone to tornados or hurricanes, a warning/evacuation alarm system for
        the building shall be included. The system shall provide for building evacuation in accordance with the
        facility's emergency preparedness plan, which shall be coordinated with the community's emergency
        preparedness plan.

16.15.5 EXIT LIGHTING AND MARKINGS
        The requirements for exit lighting and marking are contained in NFPA 101 and the local building code.

            •   Exit lighting and exit signs shall be provided to clearly indicate the location of exits in
                conformance with 29 CFR §1910.36 and §1910.37 and the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101).  The
                means of egress, exterior steps, and ramps shall be adequately lighted to prevent accidents.

            •   Internally illuminated signs shall meet the following criteria:

                    Emergency lighting for the area shall conform to OSHA and the Life Safely Code and shall
                    provide at least 5 footcandles on the sign surface.

                    Exit  signs shall be at least 8 inches high by \21A inches long.

                    Letters shall be at least 6 inches high.

                    The maximum physical distance to a visual sign shall not exceed 100 feet. In addition, an exit
                    sign shall be visible from all points in the corridor.

                    Section 104 of the Energy Policy Act of 2005 requires that, when procuring energy
                    consuming products, all federal agencies procure either Energy Star or FEMP-designated
                    products. See section 1.8 of Addendum  1 to view FEMP's purchasing specifications for
                    energy efficient exit signs.


16.16 Commissioning

        Refer to Appendix B of this Manual for the commissioning requirements.


END OF SECTION 16
                                                  16-35

-------